Home

Milestone XProtect Corporate 2013: Administrator`s Manual

1. e eeeeeeee eere 305 Administrators role and federated sites eeeeeeee ecce 305 Possibilities and constrains of federated sites 306 Frequently asked questions to federated sites 307 Federated sites example scenario Limestone City 308 About XProtect Smart Wall control in Milestone Federated Architecture 310 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 ILLUSTRATION OF MILESTONE FEDERATED ARCHITECTURE 311 MANAGE MILESTONE FEDERATED ARCHITECTURE eere eren 312 Federated ICONS iieri aaa 312 Expand Colapse scs a a 313 te Navigator pahne sessin EE a EE 313 Right click does not select asssssnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 313 CONTEE MENU sa E a 313 Ada St to TY al hy sia a a a a 313 Accept inclusion in hierarchy t 314 Connect to another site in Nierarchy cccccssessecsesseeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeesseesoenseeeoenseeseoesseeees 315 Detach a site from nIerar CT euueececounenuu eene e ueotaxuicta c envE ENEA GE 316 Helresn sile hieraro My assu osx dieu cect iustis em cee ce ccs cree E
2. 56 Memory La o 1o7 o aee t ER 56 PANES OVERVIEW 57 SS acca cee E ere eee E niece cece tenet an dene eae EE ee E 58 1 Fg eee ene eee 58 Log in to the Management Clie Nnt cccccesssseseeeeeeeeeceneneeeeeeeeeoeensnseeeseseeooeanseeeeeessaoes 61 Management Client menu overview ccccccsecseeseeeeeenseeeeenseeeeenseeeeoesseesoenseesoenseesooenseesonas 61 Customize the Management Client s layout 11111eceeeeee ecce ceeeeeee enn nnn 64 Activate licenses online me t Y 69 ADOULICENS tc T1 Manage Software License Codes ee eiieeeeee eee LL eieeeee enne enn n nnn nana n ntt 74 REMOTE CONNECT SERVICES vcore cececosecosavececenacetneestcesecenesessoantsedueesssecesesnsacasascse 75 About remote connect services ee eee iieeeee eee eeeee eene nennen nena nhan nnn nnn nana nana nts 75 Axis One Click Camera connection properties eese eeeeeeeeee rre 77 SERVERS AND HARDWARE ccccesccescnecnscneensensensenseneeneeeeeneseeeeeeeusneseaseasensensensenees 78 Add AVG ANS es esse cele sce EESE 78 ADOUL IVE WW AEC ccc ta cst tates toee EE ERARA ARE ERRERA 81 About Milestone Interconnect ssssssnnnunennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn mnnn nn 85 About storage and a
3. eeeeseeeee eee eeee eene eene nnne nnn 37 DOWNLOAD MANAGER DOWNLOAD WEB PAGE eee nennen nennen nnn nnn 38 Download Manager s default configuration e ee eeeeeee e ceeeeeeeu 39 Download Manager s standard installers user 41 Add publish Download Manager installer components 41 Hide remove Download Manager installer components 42 Device pack installer must be downloaded 43 Download Manager and virus scanning 111eeeeee ee eeeeee eene eene nnne nnn 43 PORT NUMBERS OF SPECIAL INTEREST eere nennen nnne n enhn nnnm nnn nn 43 POMS used by the A ESI oo 44 MULTIPLE MANAGEMENT SERVERS CLUSTER sscssccessecnseeeseeenseenseeeneeeaseoeseeeaeees 45 Prere guisites TO Cll SUC III e 45 Install in a CU SUC Fa ae cs rece sire ececnsieneneseeecsnnccenee E E 45 Upgrade mi a Cluster ain Eom 47 MULTIPLE RECORDING SERVER INSTANCES eee nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nn 48 Install multiple recording server instances 1eeee eere eere 48 UPGRADE FROM PREVIOUS VERSION eene nenne nuna uma usa a uasa SR RR RR Ra RR uA 48 PrercdUlS MeS NIRE
4. 9 367 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Copyright trademarks and disclaimer Copyright 2013 Milestone Systems A S Trademarks XProtect is a registered trademark of Milestone Systems A S Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc Android is a trademark of Google Inc All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners Disclaimer This text is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty Milestone Systems A S reserve the right to make adjustments without prior notification All names of people and organizations used in the examples in this text are fictitious Any resemblance to any actual organization or person living or dead is purely coincidental and unintended This product may make use of third party software for which specific terms and conditions may apply When that is the case you can find more information in the file 3rd_party_software_terms_and_conditions txt located in your Milestone surveillance system installation folder www milestonesys com Copyright trademarks and
5. One or more administrators A Milestone Federated Architecture setup can have many administrators working on it at the same time Furthermore the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 is dynamic and reflects changes to the federated site made both by you and possibly other administrators This means that you might see changes here caused by other users You might also experience that a site you are connected to is removed from the federated site by another user In this case your site will be removed from the Federated Site Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 but nothing will change in the Site Navigation pane or elsewhere allowing you to continue working Possibilities and constrains of federated sites In principle there is no limit to the number of sites you can add to MFA and how these can be linked offering you unlimited scaling flexibility and accessibility There are however a few issues to be aware of when working with a federated hierarchy Maps Can only contain cameras from the federated site to which the map is attached not from other sites in the hierarchy Alarms Can only be viewed per site In other words it is not possible to see all alarms for all sites in the hierarchy at the same time www milestonesys com 306 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Frequently asked questions to federated sites What is a federated si
6. Select a Time Profile E3 The rule description now reflects our selection Next Eda the tule descnphon chck an underlined ter Perform an action in a time interval thin selected time in Daytime Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard 5 Onstep 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform gt In this example we want patrolling according to a specific patrolling profile We therefore select the action Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt irst Select actions to perform Start recording on devices Start feed on devices Set live frame rete on devices Set recording frame rate on devices Start patrolling on lt device gt using profile with PTZ priority priority Pause patrolling on devices Based on the selection of actions the wizard extends the rule description and prompts us to specify the required device patrolling profile and its priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 lext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval vithin selected time in Daytime start patrolling on device using profile with PTZ priority priorit Click the underlined items in the extension of the rule description in order to specify their exact contents www milestonesys com 210 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 g
7. ecce ceeeeeeen 334 Group failover recording servers icis cia ocacsocua idis abE aS ae Devs esos pPaS DuCS nnmnnn nnmnnn Erat dads 336 Assign failover recording servers ee e ieeee eee eeee nne eene n nnn nnn nnnm n nnnm 337 Fallover Telated events uoces dacs cece diac cesi rari uas en E EC RuE cR RE iuia A cobi Sau EV CES urea iC diss RN E EAE 338 Read failover recording server status icons eere 338 FAILOVER RECORDING SERVER SERVICE 1 eese eese nenne nnn nnn n nnn 339 Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service 339 Change the management server address eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeere rrr 339 VIEW Status TCS SASS iirc sis oct aces dud vaicdsc A dus aebidsss ico RIAM Ua sOE 340 View VERSION IMTORMALON E 340 ji 341 ABOUT ilc 341 DATABASE CORRUPTION ccce rere ere 343 PROTECT RECORDING DATABASES FROM CORRUPTION ee eere ene 343 Power outages Use a UPS sercon san UGE ER ER 343 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Windows Task Manager Careful when ending processes
8. gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Operating System gt Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework DirectX 9 0 or newer and Software Windows Help WinHlp32 exe which you can download from http www microsoft com downloads Computer running event server CPU Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Dual Core recommended RAM Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Adapter e GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 10 GB free depends on number of servers cameras Hard Disk Space rules and logging settings www milestonesys com 18 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Microsoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit
9. 343 Hard disk failure Protect your drives cccccssesesseeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeeenseeeeeeeenonensseeeeessenons 343 SQL DATABASE ADMINISTRATION eere 345 UPDATE SQL SERVER ADDRESS eren nnne hh unu ne nen h ausus rsen saura una 345 SERVICES ADMINISTRATION ee nens 347 ABOUT THE SERVICE CHANNEL e enun unu nnus nana a aou RR R IRR SER RR Rs ursus run 347 MANAGEMENT SERVER SERVICE AND RECORDING SERVER SERVICE 347 Access the server Service cou aou cvu stb Ete nvs CVES MEE CUR UVP COE Roc veg a pN PM NUS nnmnnn 348 Start the server Service eere nenne nen u nun h enun ana DRIN RRRR RR RRRR RR Re sR su s Re sar Rr urn 348 Stop th server SO CC RI EE cen ti cre eee ae ere ence eee es ce names 348 Change recording server SCttinGS cccccsssesssseeeeeesseeessseeeeeeeeeeeeesseseeeessenoeesseeeeeeeeenoeeses 349 VIEW Status MESSAGES e 349 View version information eee rennen nnn hh hh h hehehe hene ne nene sese nena sa nasa sauna 349 sized a 350 Read server service icons management recording and failover 350 VIRUS SCANNING eere rennen nennen enun nnn 354 VIRUS SCANNING INFORMATION s neuen unen annue nana ua usua usa uses ua eua aaa 354 TRAY ICON asiearE as dux hux euusE SEDES QUEM KV EE PUN EErEy VENERE PUE
10. Compatible Factory properties are enabled echoes all bytes TCP and UDP Ipv4 only port 1234 no separator local host only current code page encoding ANSI Compatible with XProtect Enterprise version 6 0 up to 8 x any version beginning with 8 but not with 2013 and future versions International Factory properties are enabled echoes statistics only TCP only lpv4 6 port 1235 lt CR gt lt LF gt as separator local host only UTF 8 encoding CR LF 13 10 Data source A Data source B and so on 298 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 New Name Port Enabled Reset Protocol type selector IPv type selector Separator bytes Encoding type selector Show all Allowed external IPv4 addresses Allowed external IPv6 addresses Administrator s Manual Click to create a new data source Name of the data source Indicates the port number used Data sources are by default enabled Clear the check box to disable the data source Click to reset all settings for the selected data source except the name entered in the Name field Protocol type selector Selectable protocols which the system should listen for and analyze in order to detect the generic event Any TCP as well as UDP TCP TCP only UDP UDP only Tip It is OK for TCP and UDP packages used for generic events to contain special characters such as a etc Selectable IPv address
11. Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether a client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you are able to define a list of IP ranges see Manage local IP address ranges on page 301 which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network On the Network tab click Configure Read recording server icons The following icons are used in the Management Client to indicate the state of individual recording Servers Recording server is running G g Recording server is communicating Recording server requires attention This icon will typically appear because the Recording Server service has been stopped Tip You can verify whether the recording server is stopped by looking at the recording server icon in the notification area of the computer running the zh recording server Right clicking the recording server icon in the notification area opens a menu with which you can start stop the Recording Server service view recording server status messages and so on Refer to Recording Server service administration see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 for more information Recording server must be authorized Appears when the recording server is loaded for the first time When first using a recording server you must authorize it kh Right click the required r
12. Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 or Copy Rule or Rename Rule depending on your needs ee WE Rules E My First Rule Mu Sernnr Rule ey Add New Rule CTRL N 2 Edk Rule SE Delete Rule DELETE qm Copy Rule Ey validate Rule Vabdate All Rules gu Refresh ES The wizard Manage Rule opens 3 In the wizard rename and or change the rule as required If you selected Copy Rule the wizard opens displaying a copy of the selected rule 4 Click Finish Deactivate and activate a rule A rule is by default active meaning that your system applies the rule as soon as the rule s conditions apply If you do not want a rule to be active you can deactivate the rule When the rule is deactivated the system does not apply the rule even if the rule s conditions apply A deactivated rule can easily be activated later Deactivating a rule 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required rule www milestonesys com 233 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 Clear the Active check box in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Ede y In dmt hrs x My Feni Rute Nave u p My Second Hule My Tard Fide u Clencrgnon v Active Dafenihcr Peto an schon oo Merten Start He Pv mtm o Medoesdey pn recor aeath oo tre devine on wihi esent
13. a Site Prbneri Hami London Eara Descr pio URLs Aemaise Acres htip faye 27 02 Pu aia Esternal Add Version EE Service mowai HT ALITHORITANETWORK SER Tiras for laa aiymehronizaben 17 G2 2017 TO TO 10 Statue For last ppro romi iion Deces Help Gk Cancel 2 If needed change the following General tab Information related to the site you are currently connected to e Name Enter the name of the site displayed in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane and the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 e Description Enter a description of the site e URLs Use the list to add and remove URL s for this site and indicate whether they are external or not e Version Version number of the site management server e Service account The service account under which the management server is running e Time for last synchronization Last synchronization date e Status for last synchronization Status of last synchronization It can be either Successful or Failed If failed further information is offered Click OK to save changes Parent Site tab available on child sites only marked in red Non editable information regarding the parent of the child you are currently connected to e Name Shows the name of the parent to be displayed in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane and Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 e Description Shows a description of the parent e URLs Lists U
14. oa EN uE mu ca TEL ETA IIIT Sakae Ea gm m uwmswgxa EN z Move panes You can move a pane to a different position either as a floating pane or to a docked position by clicking on a pane s title bar and dragging it with the mouse The position and whether the pane becomes a floating pane or docked depend on where you release the mouse button Ez The Management Client offers some layout elements that help you control the new position of the pane The le ow ee Floating panes www milestonesys com 64 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 To move a pane to a floating pane drag the pane to its new position without using one of the layout elements lower Lue wert peng 2 74 v a E M wm La _ ed te w 70 Dragging a pane to a position without using a la Dee gt Cpns 13 ome 9p j 4 owe paa P v0 o fl rnt incr ng a Result A floating pane Move a pane to a docked outer position If you move a pane to a docked outer position it fills the area with a horizontal or vertical split that goes from top to bottom or left to right 1 Drag the pane to one of the outer layout elements Tip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position Tana oL AM wes p aj wee _ o e bl be w
15. 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the relevant recording server and find the device on which the output is placed 3 Right click the required output and select Enabled Specify output properties Each output has several properties which can be found on the output s Settings and Info tabs You can access these tabs in two ways e Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices and select Outputs then in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required outputs folder and select the required output Of e Inthe Overview pane select a device group to change the settings for all outputs in this group or expand a device group and select the required output The properties of the selected output or the common properties for all outputs in a selected device group will be displayed on the following tabs Settings and Info Automatic manual activation of output Output can be activated automatically or manually e Automatic activation of output With the Management Client s rules see Manage rules on page 226 feature you are able to create rules that automatically activate or deactivate output and rules that trigger actions when the state of an output is changed www milestonesys com 151 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 For example you may create a rule specifying that a siren should sound if
16. In the example the system has been installed in an English language version If you expand one of the other languages in the tree structure s third level for example Arabic you will see that users who select the Arabic version of the web page will initially also only have access to English versions of the XProtect Smart Client The fact that only standard components are initially available and only in the same language version as the system itself helps reduce installation time and save space on the server There is no need to have a component or language version available on the server if nobody uses tt You can however make more components and or languages available see Add publish Download Manager installer components on page 41 as required Likewise you can hide or remove unwanted components and or languages see Hide remove Download Manager installer components on page 42 Download Manager s standard installers user By default the following components are available for separate installation from the management server s download web page targeted at users controlled by the Download Manager e Recording servers including failover recording servers failover recording servers are initially downloaded and installed as recording servers during the installation process you specify that you want a failover recording server e Management Client e XProtect Smart Client e Event server used in connection with map functional
17. Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When a camera or device records video and or audio all specified recordings are per default stored in the storage area defined for the device More precisely in the storage area s default recording database named Recording A storage area has no default archive s but these can easily be created Depending on recording settings the storage areas s recording database will most likely run full at some point and its contents need to be archived in order to be saved It is therefore possible to create archives within the default storage area and start an archiving process Furthermore it is possible to create alternative storage area s and configure that selected video audio recordings must be stored archived here Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s or device s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the device s recording database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice otorage and archiving is configured on a per recording server basis To ease explanations the following mostly mentions cameras and video but all is true about speakers and microphones and audio and sound as well IMPORTANT We recommend that you use a dedicated hard disk drive for the recording server database Using a dedicated hard dis
18. To be able to send video to Matrix recipients you must after you have configured a Matrix recipient include the Matrix recipient in a rule that triggers the video transmission to the requested Matrix recipient 1 Start the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 226 and in step 1 select a rule type and if necessary a condition in step 2 2 In Manage Rule s step 3 Step 3 Actions select the Set Matrix to view devices action www milestonesys com 188 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Click the Matrix link in the initial rule description 4 n the Select MatrixConfiguration dialog select the required Matrix recipient and click OK 5 Click the devices link in the initial rule description and select from which cameras you would like to send video to the Matrix recipient then click OK to confirm your selection 6 Click Finish if the rule is complete or define if required additional actions and or a stop action If you delete a Matrix recipient any rule that includes the Matrix recipient will stop working Advanced tips for Smart Client Matrix recipients If the Matrix recipient is a Smart Client you can send the same video to Matrix positions in several of the Smart Client s views provided the views Matrix positions share the same port number and password Do the following 1 In the Smart Client create the required views and Matrix positions th
19. _ Dynamic Content Compression LE Management Tools v IIS Management Console HS Management Scripts and Tools Management Service iv II 6 Management Compatibility V IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility V IIS 6 WMI Compatibility V IIS 6 Scripting Tools V IIS 6 Management Console E GTA ndeLblne9 Carn m Conlrmahbon Prog ess Reuss chos TE con 6 Complete the wizard by following the remaining steps Issue Changes to SQL server location prevents database access This is an issue if the location of the SQL Server is changed for example by changing the host name of the computer running the SQL Server The result of this issue will be that the access to the database is lost Solution Use the update SQL address tool see Update SQL server address on page 345 found at the tray icon aka Systray Issue Insufficient continuous virtual memory fails installation The following is only relevant if you use Windows Server 2003 If you try to install a large Windows Installer package or patch package in Windows Server 2003 this problem might occur if the Windows Installer process has insufficient continuous virtual memory to verify that the msi package or the msp package is correctly signed Solution A supported fix is available for Windows Server 2003 Issue Multi domain environments one way trusts not working Refer to Setup with one way trust on page 363 www milestonesys
20. i 1l 5 gt AllCamera m PTZ Camera B Daytime Nighttime 2 Click Finish Pause PTZ patrolling and go to PTZ preset on input rule In this example we assume that patrolling has already been set up for the PTZ camera and that the external input unit is a door sensor connected to an input port on a device on the system When the door sensor is activated the PTZ camera will pause patrolling move to a preset position covering the door area remain at the preset position for 15 seconds then resume patrolling Prerequisites This rule is based on an input being activated and on a patrolling PTZ camera moving to a specific preset position Therefore an external input unit must be available i e connected to the input port of a device on the system Furthermore the preset position to which the PTZ camera should move when the rule is applied must have been defined Before creating a rule like this always verify the following www milestonesys com An external input unit is successfully connected to an input port on a device and the states of the input unit activated deactivated work as required The camera in question is a PTZ camera with the required preset positions and patrolling defined How to define preset positions and patrolling profiles When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it moves between a number of preset positions Thus before you able to define patrolli
21. o LE zd Dragging a pane to the inner center layout element of another pane Qiao t e Lo vU Result The pane shares the same position as the other pane Split shared positions If you do not want a pane to share a position with another pane do this 1 Click the tab of the relevant pane and drag it to a new position The pane s new position can be a docked position or a floating pane 2 Release the mouse to place the pane at its current position www milestonesys com 67 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Use auto hide You can auto hide panes An auto hidden pane is available as a tab to the right or left of the previous position of the pane When you place your mouse pointer over the tab the content of the pane slides out As soon the cursor is positioned outside the pane it slides back To auto hide a pane click the Auto Hide pushpin in the title bar of the pane you want to auto hide Dee AM _ rapes Cove Sal ED Comme Gene Anse Hace D Caves Mec e Cones Frames per ocorre 7h Cora M Cnm T Cia D Cave D Lane letauit a opearance a nd D 9sition of the Overview pane o Properties 17 M l he Overview pane is hidden and available through a tab to the left Do the following to show and open an auto hidden pane again 1 Place your mouse pointer over the tab of the auto hidden pane to show the pane 2 Click the Auto Hide pushpin in th
22. on page 41 to see what component are available for separate download Since most single component installer elements are identical to the common installer elements single component installers are not described in detail Only exception is the failover recording server installer see Install failover recording server recording server on page 33 As well as installing on physical servers your XProtect system installation can also take place on virtualized servers see Install your system on virtual servers on page 37 Install your system preconditions If you are upgrading from a previous version refer to Upgrade from previous version on page 48 If you plan to run Milestone Federated Architecture refer to About Milestone Federated Architecture see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 If you run workgroups make sure to ignore the normal installation guidelines and use the alternative method for installing for workgroups indicated in the following e Microsoft Windows Installer 4 5 only on Windows Server 2003 Before installing your XProtect system it is important to install Windows Installer 4 5 e SQL Server The management server requires access to a relational database Later in this installation process you must choose between using an existing SQL Server on the network Administrator rights on the SQL Server are required or setting up a SQL Server Express Edition a lighter version of a fu
23. 1 2 3 Part one enabling the analytics events feature and setting up its security A list of allowed addresses can be used to control who can send event data to the system and which port the server listens on Part two creating the analytics event possibly with a description of the event and testing it Part three using the analytics event as the source of an alarm definition Furthermore to use VCA based events a third party VCA tool is required for supplying data to the system Which VCA tool to use is entirely up to you as long as the data supplied by the tool adheres to the format This format is set out in the Milestone Analytics Events Developers Manual Contact your system provider for more details Third party VCA tools are developed by independent partners delivering solutions based on a Milestone open platform These solutions can impact performance on the system Add an analytics event 1 2 3 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Rules and Events right click Analytics Events Select Add New The Analytics Events Information window appears Type a name for the event in the Name field Optionally type a description text in the Description field Tip Description texts can for example be used to give more background info on the event and how it is used The description is not visible to users of the XProtect Smart Client In the toolbar see
24. 221 298 Recording 166 Recording frame rate camera 166 Recording server 14 Recording server settings 350 351 352 Recording servers 225 Recording failover recording server install properties 32 33 34 Refresh site hierarchy 307 319 Register new Axis One click camera 77 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Registered services 293 Registered services settings 293 294 Registering Your Software License Code SLC 74 Remote connect hardware 82 Remote connect services 41 75 Remote recording camera remote system 88 89 143 169 198 269 Remote Recording rights 269 Remote Retrieval tab 87 174 Remove a recording server 97 Remove recording server 53 Remove STSs 77 Remove system components 43 47 53 Remove users and groups from role 263 Remove video device drivers 332 Rename a user defined event 245 Rename site 319 Replace a recording server 97 Replace hardware device 74 83 Reset to default layout 69 Resize panes 64 Restore system configuration from manual back up 327 331 357 Restore system configuration from scheduled back up 324 329 Retrieve remote recordings from remote site camera 89 169 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Right click does not select 315 Rule that activates deactivates an output 156 Rule that makes an input trigger an action 157 Rule that makes an outp
25. 29 30 33 38 60 76 343 Download Manager s default configuration 39 Download Manager s standard installers user e 30 41 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 E Edit a preset position 135 Edit a time profile e 238 Edit an alarm 287 Edit analytics events settings 249 Edit Axis Dispatch Service properties 76 Edit basic hardware device settings 82 Edit existing analytics event 246 Edit local IP address ranges 303 Edit menu items 62 Edit monitor properties 181 Edit settings for a selected storage area or archive 104 Edit XProtect Enterprise servers 292 Edit copy and rename a rule 233 Enable and disable motion detection 120 Enable and disable panomorph support 136 Enable and disable privacy masking 125 Enable input 147 Enable microphones 138 Enable multicasting 108 Enable multicasting for individual cameras 109 Enable output 152 Enable playback directly from remote site camera 89 166 Enable PTZ on a video encoder 173 Enable public access 110 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Enable speakers 144 Enable disable individual devices 84 Establish remote desktop connection to remote system 88 Event server settings 299 Events overview 86 170 171 191 199 222 2 4 275 285 286 340 Events tab overview 86 115 139 170 222 223 Example Create and test a simple generic event 251 Examples
26. 319 321 Basic user properties 271 Basics 58 Bookmarks 298 C Camera 162 165 170 Change log language 277 Change recording server settings 350 351 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Change Software License Code 75 357 Change the management server address 341 354 Change verify a recording server s basic configuration 112 Client settings 117 Client tab camera properties 109 115 117 Clients 176 Clients overview 23 Computer running event server 18 Computer running log server 19 Computer running Management Client 17 Computer running management server 15 Computer running recording server or failover recording server 16 Computer running service channel 20 Computer running XProtect Smart Client 22 Configurable events devices 157 222 224 Configurable events hardware 222 Configuration 119 Configure individual cameras 115 Configure individual microphones 139 Configure report details 274 Configure SNMP service 358 Configure speakers 145 Connect to another site in hierarchy 314 317 Context menu 315 Copy a role 260 369 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Copy a Smart Client profile 186 Copy log server database 330 Copy system configuration from old server step 1 329 Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 330 331 Copyright trademarks and disclaimer 11 Create a day length time
27. 82 114 116 120 139 145 150 155 157 175 Manage day length time profiles 236 239 Manage generic events 170 171 191 225 249 Manage hardware on a recording server 96 Manage input 60 82 116 139 145 146 150 155 156 171 175 Manage local IP address ranges 110 111 298 302 Manage logs 41 196 274 296 326 327 Manage microphones 60 116 138 139 145 150 155 158 175 Manage Milestone Federated Architecture 99 9 62 304 306 307 310 314 Manage monitors 177 180 Manage network configuration 294 Manage notification profiles 60 191 196 226 240 297 Manage output 60 82 116 139 145 150 151 155 156 171 175 Manage registered services 293 343 349 Manage roles 25 60 184 186 236 256 258 263 Manage roles with XProtect Smart Wall 183 Manage rules 60 86 120 127 132 135 140 146 151 152 156 165 166 168 184 190 191 222 227 236 2389 240 242 244 245 251 274 340 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Manage rules with XProtect Smart Wall 179 184 Manage Software License Codes 70 74 306 Manage speakers 60 116 139 144 145 150 155 158 175 Manage time profiles e 60 186 187 190 206 209 236 239 256 259 285 286 Manage user defined events 170 171 191 225 244 249 285 286 Manage users and groups 15 60 63 256 258 261 Manage video device drivers 29 332
28. Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Default goto preset when PTZ is done rule Ensures that PTZ Pan Tilt zoom cameras go to their respective default preset positions after they have been operated manually IMPORTANT This rule is by default not enabled Even when the rule is enabled you must have defined default preset positions for the required PTZ cameras in order for the rule to work you do this on the Presets tab see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 In case you accidentally delete the default goto preset when PTZ is done rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action on PTZ Manual Session Stopped from All Cameras Move immediately to default preset on the device on which event occurred Default record on bookmark rule Ensures that video is recorded automatically when a bookmark is set by an operator in the XProtect Smart Client This is provided recording is enabled see Record tab overview on page 164 for the cameras in question recording is by default enabled IMPORTANT The default recording time for this rule is three seconds before the bookmark is set and 30 seconds after the bookmark is set However these default recoding times can be edited in the rule In case you accidentally delete the default record on bookmark rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action on Bookmark Reference Requested from All Cameras All Microphones All Speak
29. Frog Daytime Patroling v Daytime Patroling Nighttime Patroling Lufeel and Ostrie 2 Click Add This will open the Select Preset dialog www milestonesys com 127 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Inthe Select Preset dialog select the preset positions required for your patrolling profile m Select Preset EJ vi i Back Door 3 Canned Foods Section ia Dey Product Sechon 1 Foesh Produce Section Footer Foods Sechon MIG l Household Goods Sechon vm A LSA 1e Pouhy Secton Som Danks Sechon o Cancel JORI 4 Click OK The selected preset positions are added to the list of preset positions for the patrolling profile Fiotie D astime Patrolling v ete Back Door t Canned Foods Section t Day Products Section 5 The preset position at the top of the list will be used as the first stop when the camera patrols according to the patrolling profile the preset position in second position from the top will be the second stop and so forth If required change the sequence by selecting the required preset position and using the up down buttons Tip If required you can easily add more preset positions to the list by clicking Add or remove unwanted preset positions from the list by selecting the unwanted preset position then clicking Remove Specify for how long to stay at each preset position When patrolling
30. Furthermore it is not possible to validate whether configuration of prerequisites outside the rule itself may prevent the rule from working For example a rule specifying that recording should take place when motion is detected by a particular camera will validate OK if the elements in the rule itself are correct even though motion detection which is enabled on a camera level not through rules has not been enabled for the camera in question To validate an individual rule or all rules in one go do the following in the Management Client www milestonesys com 234 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the rule you wish to validate and select Validate Rule or Validate All Rules depending on your needs 2 Asimple dialog will inform you whether the rule s validated successfully or not If you chose to validated more than one rule and one or more rules did not succeed the dialog will list the names of the affected rules 2 Rule validated e X Al rules validated i Rule did not validate Rules that did not validate j My First rule Manage time profiles Time profiles are periods of time defined by the administrator Time profiles can be used when creating rules see Manage rules on page 226 for example a rule specifying that a certain action should take place within a certain time period As an alter
31. L3 Auchving Example are from camera In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Specify common settings for all items in a device group hardware 1 2 3 4 In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the required recording server to see its device groups Select the relevant hardware under the wanted device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s hardware will be listed Recording Server 1 gt ca Asti Cane 10 1088 Sp Camera 6 fo Input 1 wo Output 1 Aus 2100 Camera 10 10 693 4 Selecting hardware under a recording server You are now able to verify or change both common settings and settings for the individual hardware types within the device group From the menu above the settings list select the required type of hardware Make changes as needed In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Set up a secure connection on all items in a device group Tip Some organizations may be required to establish a secure HTTPS connection using SSL Secure Sockets Layer between a hardware device and the Matrix and or XProtect Smart Client To establish such a connection you must upload a certificate to the hardware device to enable HTTPS support on the hardware device Certificates are generated differently by camera vendors Consult your camera vendor to find out ho
32. Manage XProtect Enterprise servers cccccseessecesesseeeeesseeeeesseeeeenseeeeenseeseenseeeeoenseesos 287 REGISTERED SERVICES o itedbeabedcedioe Lem bebes iA 291 Manage registered services soeoocuc eee enuccas enia eie oua s exa c cu oux Es c uesdns esu E Cada uu E En uA AM nmmn 291 OPTIONS 293 NS o tee eee em ean steed enna seemiad aes oountueeeradiuecdc se Uexelidieesecuscics 293 Specify AVI compression settings cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneenseeeeeesenoneeenes 299 Outgoing SMTP mail server settings eeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeee eere rennen nnn 299 AVI compression settings ee seiscccete cessed cosa c ao Euza c CUu asoeGusu uu UG sueu nda cU nu xe o bu uES En durMlzx E CU SIN S USE EE 300 Manage local IP address ranges 11 eeeeeLeeeee eccL eeeeee nnne enne nnn n nnn 301 MILESTONE FEDERATED ARCHITECTURE 302 MILESTONE FEDERATED ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW eere nne 302 Important prerequisites when running federated sites 303 Licensing of Milestone Federated Architecture 304 Basic rules of federated sites eeeeeeLeeeeeeeeeee eee ceeeeeeeeee nere nennen 305 Principles for setting up federated sites
33. Manage view groups 176 184 261 Manage XProtect Enterprise servers 63 269 289 290 304 310 363 Manage XProtect Smart Walls 177 178 Management Client 14 54 Management Client menu overview 56 62 314 315 Management Client overview 54 76 89 92 99 148 150 154 155 158 164 171 174 183 235 245 246 249 271 285 287 291 295 352 Management Client s elements 54 Management server 13 177 293 304 Management Server service and Recording Server service 33 35 46 47 48 97 111 324 325 329 331 349 Manual 81 87 Manual back up of system configuration 326 374 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Manual backup and restore of system configuration 322 325 Map 343 Matrix rights 269 Memory indicator 56 Menu bar 56 Microphone 166 171 Microphone and speaker 162 Milestone Federated Architecture 304 Milestone Federated Architecture Overview 13 30 56 57 62 74 199 256 270 281 284 289 304 314 315 Milestone Interconnect and licensing 88 MIP rights 270 More about administrators role 259 More about alarms 281 More about installing 34 More about Milestone Interconnect 86 Motion detection settings 120 Motion tab camera properties 116 119 Move non archived recordings from one storage to another 103 104 Move panes 64 Move system configuration to new management server 326 328 Multicas
34. Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Optionally you can test the validity of the event by clicking Test Event see Testing an Analytics Event on page 246 Tip You can continually correct errors indicated in the test and run the test as many times as you wish and from anywhere in the process Edit existing analytics event 1 www milestonesys com 245 To edit an existing analytics event click it This opens the Analytics Event Information window where you can edit relevant fields Optionally you can test the validity of the event by clicking Test Event see Testing an Analytics Event on page 246 Tip You can continually correct errors indicated in the test and run the test as many times as you wish and from anywhere in the process Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Testing an Analytics Event Optionally you can test the validity of an event by clicking Test Event Tip You can carry out this test at any step of the analytics event creation editing process and as many times as you wish To test an analytics event you must first create one refer to Create a new analytics event see Add an analytics event on page 245 1 2 Click on an existing analytics event This opens a new window In this window click Test Event 3 This opens the Test Analytics Event window which goes through a number of conditions that must be successful for a
35. Otherwise not o If the management server is installed as a Network Service Both All computers involved must be added as users to each other s administrator role before a parent child link can be established without acceptance from the administrator of the child Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles for details This type of setup is primarily recommended if all sites in the hierarchy are not a member of the same Domain Also refer to Important prerequisites when running federated sites on page 303 o If the management server is installed as a user account This user account must be a member of the administrator group of the server being linked to before one or more parent child link s can be established without acceptance from the administrator of the child This type of user right setup is primarily recommended if the number of sites ina hierarchy is large How to become an administrator using work groups How to become administrator of a federated architecture setup using work groups depends on how accounts are created If they are set up correctly you gain administrator rights of the entire setup Otherwise not Refer to Important prerequisites when running federated sites on page 303 for details on how to do this If the previous criteria are not met the administrator of a child must accept requests for inclusion in hierarchy see Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 314 manually before links can be established
36. Start menu select Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Administrative Tools 3 Inthe Administrative Tools window double click Services 4 Inthe Services window double click Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP 5 In the SMTP Properties window click Stop then set Startup type to either Manual or Disabled Tip When set to Manual the SMTP Service can be started manually from the Services window or from a command prompt using the command net start SMTPSVC 6 Click OK Solution 2 Remove SMTP service Note that removing the SMTP Service may affect other applications using the SMTP Service 1 www milestonesys com 50 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Add or Remove Programs 3 Inthe left side of the Add or Remove Programs window click Add Remove Windows Components 4 Inthe Windows Components wizard select the Internet Information Services IIS item and click Details 5 Inthe Internet Information Services IIS window clear the SMTP Service check box 6 Click OK Next and Finish Issue Manual installation of IIS if needed When installing the Internet Information Services IIS is under normal circumstances automatically installed If the automatic installation fails you must install the IIS manually 1 www milestonesys com 51 If aut
37. Stop criteria select one of the stop actions for instance to deactivate the output after a certain time or event 8 Click Finish to save the rule Rule that makes an output triggers an action In the Rules feature all registered external output activation deactivation or change is treated as an event Based on an event you are able to specify a wide variety of actions to take www milestonesys com 155 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 To define a rule where an output activates an action do the following 1 Start the Manage Rule In step 1 Type of rule select Perform an action on event gt 2 Click event in the initial rule description 3 In the Select an Event dialog in the Devices Predefined Events group see Predefined events devices on page 222 select the appropriate option for your rule Output Activated Output Changed or Output Deactivated Click OK 4 Click devices recorders servers in the initial rule description 5 Inthe Select Devices and Groups dialog select the required output Click OK 6 Click Next to continue to step 2 Conditions and if needed select a condition Continue to step 3 Actions and select one or more actions 7 f you do not want to define a stop action skip this step If you want to define a stop action for instance to deactivate the output again click Next to continue to step 4 Stop criteria and select a stop action
38. The WP eter E eode Server hen Saturne er cerar beg of rete ef udi mede gd fer Corer w cogeret qd oe fe po Pe peor emHmoc qom Bee onde Corver isch ale Oe 40 b ao cdm aum nt alites amp Oe iy mti e 459 eee pee o 4 9 07 9 hab ap eqq ate sed te nemo 9 e fee s A94 9 Fes v hec n ade Be Ctba u Chen Daeetades Be 12 ba Ss 669 te ee Coa Aes M7 overt ed cag M ovtuasidi o D Wo 6s verta cuue oi cas sata amp l 555 Cee Aou o eis Uu oio o4 20555 fae errer lectalhes Lo ee ba font Tem Dtm be 1 ba Tu Log Sev memor s tyve oops b emm ori oes l be 94 bet b Serye jertse vi be 13 M Me ewe tere mew ee net quao egee 974 eae tuo erseger of teatueer eo erho orf et 1 i I i As pet of ew ips 68 byte Pe tobie Le ce uota lat o wa o aaraa eo Bro amni aos besed sett anges of t2 OP Ren Mokio Gps ets Tames Lere tom Dr I by Ao C onmes grow T AJ alg ge W JN IEBRFEC E The web page is capable of displaying two sets of content both by default in a language version matching the language of the system installation e One is targeted at administrators enabling them to download and install key system components Most often the web page is automatically loaded at the end of the management server installation and the default content is displayed Otherwise the web page can be accessed by entering the URL nttp I management serv
39. Tip In the Time Profile Information window edit the time profile as required Remember that a time profile may contain more than one time period and that time periods may be recurring Tip The small month overview in the top right corner of the Time Profile Information window can help you get a quick overview of the time periods covered by the time profile as dates containing specified times are highlighted in bold In this example the bold dates indicate that time periods have been specified on several days and that a recurring time may have been specified on Mondays Manage day length time profiles When cameras are placed outside it is often required to lower the cameras resolution enable black white or change other settings when it gets dark or vice versa when it gets light The further north or south from the equator the cameras are placed the more the sunrise and sunset time varies during the year This makes it impossible to use normal fixed time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 235 to adjusts camera settings according to light conditions To overcome this day length time profiles can be created and defined in the system according to the sunrise and sunset in a specified geographical area Via GPS coordinates the system on a daily basis calculates the sunrise and sunset time even incorporating daylight saving time As a result it automatically follows the yearly changes in sunrise sunset in the selected area ensuri
40. account matters for access to various resources e With a particular user account This account the service uses the specified user account to run the service under the account as management server If the server acting as management server is a member of a domain you should either select the suggested Network Service or specify a user account for the domain in question Note that if the server in question is a failover recording server it is not possible to select This predefined account and when selecting This account it is only possible to select to specify a user account for the domain in question When should I choose a particular user account instead of a predefined If you use network drives you should always specify a particular user account with access to the network drives in question Otherwise the relevant service cannot access the required network drives Choose between a predefined network service account and a particular user account 1 Select This predefined account a Select Network Service www milestonesys com 35 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 b Click OK Or 1 Select This account a Click Browse This opens the Select User window b Verify that the relevant domain workgroup is specified in the From this location field If not click Locations to browse for the required domain workgroup c Inthe Enter the object names to select
41. area of the computer running the failover recording server The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Failover Recording Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray it is located at the far right of the management server computer s Windows taskbar EN F Hy 10 33 AM RR While the Failover Recording Server service is stopped the failover recording server will not be able to take over from standard recording servers Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service The Failover Recording Server service starts automatically If you have stopped the service manually you can start and stop it the following way 1 Right click the notification area s failover recording server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Start Failover Recording Server service or Stop Failover Recording Server service depending on your needs Change the management server address The failover recording server must be able to communicate with your system s management server You therefore specify the IP address hostname of the management server during the installation of the failover recording server Should you later need to change the address of the management server you do it the following way In order to be able to change the management server address the Failover Recording Server service must be stopped 1 Stop the Failover Recording S
42. d el Item recording www milestonesys com 138 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 3 3 T 4 Pp q do T o 6 About device groups gt Q Administrator s Manual Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server for retrieving events setting settings etc as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible Item database being repaired Item requires attention Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is recording since a recording item is also an enabled item You are able to group different types of devices cameras microphones speakers inputs outputs on your system by using device groups The use of device groups has several benefits e Device groups help you maintain an intuitive overview of
43. either the Management Server Status Messages or Recording Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages Ex Management Server Status Messages img oe Tew Message 01 2007 104208 Succerifuly actrvated record server 8266591 H57cf4177 9069 9 59077 d4d T2007 10 36 23 Samce tated 01 2007 1036 23 Suec Mn2007 10323 Succ 01 2007 103820 Succeed tating nde procetso 01 2007 103 20 Successfully ntishved command processor eifully induskoed mangemert serre pry module e P e MOT 2007 1036 20 Succetifull rduakeoed kcenoe module 2 c a e tsfully inssiced recording serve communscabon module M2007 103819 Succerifuly read chert version wfoemston 01 2007 10318 5ucc 101 2007 10 36 16 Succertiay rsdtukmed log modde 01 2007 103616 Succerifuly ntiskced secunty module 301 2007 10 5 16 Sucita edukoed da sbaie correct 301 2007 103607 Waating for SOL server to be orne 34012007 1035 43 Succesiful apphbed new conbigu aon 301 2007 103547 Succestfuly losded congu son Sie 3401 2007 103546 Savice targ tiful appbed extemal plug conhigur sont G V i Qu d GO 4G amp J Gt CGU or x x XE M XE XE xw XX XM XN Ct t Ge Ge ce amp C View version information Knowing the exact version of your management server service or recording server service is an advantage if you need to contact product support 1 In Management Client s menu bar select Help menu click About 2 Asmall dialo
44. even if the notification profile is triggered again by a rule before the 2 minutes have passed If specifying a value of 0 e mail notifications will be sent each time the notification profile is triggered by a rule This can potentially result in a very large number of e mail notifications being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore carefully consider whether you want to use the notification profile in rules which are likely to be triggered frequently Specify the maximum number of still images you want to include in each of the notification profile s e mail notifications Default is five images Specify the number of milliseconds you want between the recordings presented on the included images Example With the default value of 500 milliseconds the included images will show recordings with half a second between them If selected default images will be inserted in the body of e mail notifications If not images will be included in e mail notifications as attached files This setting is used to specify the start of the AVI file By default the AVI file will contain recordings from 2 seconds before the notification profile is triggered You can change this to the number of seconds you require 242 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 This setting is used to specify the end of the AVI file By default the Time after event secs AVI file will end 4 seconds after the
45. o All logs Description of the logged incident e Source Type o Rule Log only Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred Since log entries are administrator defined and relate to incidents in your system source type will normally be System o Event and System Logs only Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred for example Management Server or Device o Audit Log only Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred Since remote user access is handled by the management server source type will typically be Server e ID o All logs Identification number of the logged incident e Event Type o All logs except Audit Log Type of event represented by the logged incident For more information about event types refer also to the events overview on page 221 e Source Name o All logs Name of the management server device etc on which the logged incident occurred e Service Name o Event and Rule Logs only Name of service on which the logged incident occurred e Audit Type o Audit Log only Type of logged incident e Granted o Audit Log only Information about whether the remote user action was allowed granted or not e User www milestonesys com 274 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 o Audit Log only User name of the remote user causing the logged incident e Location o Audit Log only IP address or host name of the computer from wh
46. on page 219 Occurs when a connection to a device is lost or when an attempt is made to communicate with a device and the attempt is unsuccessful Occurs when communication with a device is successfully established Occurs when communication with a device is successfully stopped Feed overflow a k a Media overflow occurs when a recording server is unable to process received video as quickly as specified in the configuration and therefore is forced to discard some images If the server is healthy feed overflow usually happens because of slow disk writes It can be resolved either by reducing the amount of data written or by improving the storage system s performance Reduce the amount of written data by reducing frame rates resolution or image quality on your cameras This will in general degrade recording quality If you are not interested in that instead improve your storage system s performance by installing extra drives to share the load or by installing faster disks or controllers Tip This rare event can be used for triggering actions that will help you avoid the problem e g for lowering the recording frame rate Occurs when feed overflow see description of the Feed Overflow Started event ends Occurs when client users request a live stream from a device The event occurs upon the request even if the client user s request subsequently turns out to be unsuccessful for example because the client user does not ha
47. on page 235 One role is predefined in the system and cannot be deleted the Administrators role In addition to the Administrators role you can add as many roles as required in your organization To manage roles in the system go to the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security and select Roles For more information see e Manage users and groups on page 255 e Manage roles on page 257 e Work with users groups and roles on page 260 e Specify rights of a role on page 262 Note that roles may also determine access to views in clients Manage users and groups In the system you define roles see About roles on page 255 first then you add users groups to the roles Roles determine which of the system s features users and groups are able to use In other words roles determine rights Once you have defined roles you can add users and groups See Assign and remove users amp groups to from a role Prerequisites www milestonesys com 255 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 A server with Active Directory installed that acts as domain controller must be available on your network before you can add users and groups through the Active Directory service Consult your network administrator if in doubt Add users and groups through Active Directory normal way Users and groups are normally added from Active Directory altho
48. ports are both inbound and outbound Port 20 and 21 Used by recording servers to listen for File Transfer Protocol FTP information some devices use FTP for sending event messages FTP is a standard for exchanging files across networks Port 25 Used by recording servers to listen for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP information Also some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages and or for sending images to the surveillance system server via e mail SMTP is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers Port 80 While not directly used by the system but by management servers port 80 is typically used by the Internet Information Services IIS Default Web Site for running the Management Server service Port 443 Used by the basic user authentication process where both management server and the service channel must keep this port open at all times Port 554 Used by recording servers for RTSP traffic which is used for controlling streaming from cameras Port 1024 and above outbound only except ports listed in the following Used by recording servers for HTTP traffic between cameras and servers Port 5210 Used for communication between recording servers and failover recording servers when databases are merged after a failover recording server has been running Port 5432 Used by recording servers to listen for Transmission Control Protocol TCP information some devices use TCP for sending event message
49. will be displayed on the following tabs Settings Info and Events View the current state of an input The change of an input s state is regarded as an event by the system Events can be used in rules and hereby trigger actions when the state of an input is changed Refer to Define input and output related rules see Define in and output related rules on page 155 for more information about how to include an input event in a rule To view the current state of an input in the Management Client do the following 1 In the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices and select Inputs 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required inputs folder and select the required input Tip You may select a group of inputs to view the current status of all inputs in the group 3 Information about the current status of the selected input is presented in the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 www milestonesys com 146 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When an input is deactivated it is shown by a gray indicator Hed Sects Entaeea hga When the input is activated the indicator lights up green Red Dea Ennaeese higa Fill in properties on the Info tab Lets you view and edit basic information about an input Contains the following fields Name of the input Optional but highly recommended Used whenever
50. 3 Locate the Milestone XProtect Data Collector Server Right click it From the menu that appears select Start to restart the service Work with system monitor Use the lt gt and home icons to navigate the System Monitor From here you can view system information and create reports on e Management server shows data on your management server e Recording servers shows data on any number of recording servers in your surveillance setup which can be viewed per o Disks o Storage o Network o Cameras e Failover recording servers shows data on any number of failover recording servers in your surveillance setup e Additional servers shows data on log servers event servers etc in your surveillance setup e Cameras shows data on any camera in any camera group in your surveillance setup www milestonesys com 271 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Each of these corresponds to a clickable expandable area most of which contains sub areas Each sub area represents a server When clicked they provide relevant dynamic data on this server The Cameras bar however contains a list of camera groups to select from Once a group is selected you can select a specific camera and see dynamic data for it All servers display CPU usage and available memory information Furthermore recording servers also display connection status information Within each view you can find a History li
51. 3 The Change XProtect License dialog appears Click Import License 4 Next select the SLC license file saved for this purpose When done the selected license file location will be added just below the Import License button 5 Click OK You are now ready to perform SLC registration Remote connect services About remote connect services Available functionality depends on your product version The remote connect services feature contains the Axis One click Camera Connection technology developed by Axis Communications It enables the system to retrieve video and audio from external cameras where firewalls and or router network configuration normally prevents initiating connections to such cameras The actual communication takes place via so called secure tunnel servers ST servers ST servers use a Virtual Private Network VPN Only devices holding a valid key can operate within a VPN This offers a secure tunnel where data can be exchanged between public networks in a safe way Remote connect services allows you to Edit credentials within the Axis Dispatch Service Add edit and remove ST servers Register Unregister and edit Axis One click cameras Go to the hardware related to the Axis One Click camera Before you can use Axis One click Camera Connection you must first install a suitable ST server environment Install STS environment for One click camera connection l Contact your system provider to obtain the n
52. 317 Rename SIG Met w X X M 317 Ser site DFODGTIIBS sosisini EE uL ONE UOTE se sav eUR RU EU DEP ATI ER DE EEES 317 BACKUP RESTORE AND MOVE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 320 SCHEDULED BACKUP AND RESTORE OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 320 Flush SQL server transaction log ecce eee Le eeesseeeeee eene n nnne e nena nana 320 gir j 320 Scheduled back up of system configuration ee ee ceeeeeeee ss 321 Backup and restore event server configuration eeee ceres 322 Back up log server database uisuetemsadexs cutus cese uenis luus spen decalusmu acer d eu a UEE IUE NE MdNE aU NE 322 Restore system configuration from scheduled back up 322 MANUAL BACKUP AND RESTORE OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION nnn 323 Select shared backup folder 2 icona oua cru auae ecu S Seas RE E Ues one VRuPRP vEn A E uEBSEE S REV EE UAM RENE Ene 324 Manual back up of system configuration eee eeeeee eee ceeee eene enne nnn 324 Restore system configuration from manual back up 325 Back up restore fail and problem scenarios e eee eseeeee erre 326 MOVE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION TO NEW MANA
53. 360 IPv6 Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tip To install IPv6 on a client computer open a command prompt type Ipv6 install and press ENTER Example illustration n t6 lt 6 v J P No XProtect Enterprise integration If you use IPv6 you cannot integrate XProtect Enterprise servers see Manage XProtect Enterprise servers on page 287 into your system No Matrix Monitor compatibility If using IPv6 you cannot use the Matrix Monitor application with your system Matrix functionality in XProtect Smart Client is not affected How to write IPv6 addresses An IPv6 address is usually written as eight blocks of four hexadecimal digits with each block separated by a colon Example 2001 0B80 0000 0000 0000 0F80 3FA8 18AB You may shorten addresses by eliminating leading zeros in a block Also note that some of the four digit blocks may consist of zeros only If any number of such 0000 blocks are consecutive you may shorten addresses by replacing the 0000 blocks with two colons as long as there is only one such double colon in the address Example 2001 0B80 0000 0000 0000 0F80 3FA8 18AB can be shortened to 2001 B80 0000 0000 0000 F80 SFA8 18AB if removing the leading zeros or to 2001 0B80 0F80 3FA8 18AB if removing the 0000 blocks or even to 2001 B80 F80 3FA8 18AB if removing the leading zeros as well as the 0000 blocks Using IPv6 Addresses in URLs IPv6 addresses
54. 7p Red Sector Entrance Cam Specify which devices to include in a device group 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 s device list right click the required device group folder Select Edit Device Group Members The Select Group Members window will appear In the Select Group Members window select either o The Device Groups tab which lists devices based on existing device groups Tip A device can be a member of more than one device group o The Recording Servers tab which lists devices based on which recording servers the devices belong on www milestonesys com 141 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4 Select the devices you wish to include and click Add This will copy the selected devices to the Selected box Select Group Members Production Area Cameras Device Groups Recorders Selected di Recorders Cervers mp Camera 1 on des 2098 HFD Camera 10 10 50 72 dj Recording Server mP Comma on Aes 211M Camera 10 10 50 74 p Camera 1 on Asit 205 Camera 1 on Ass 212 PTZ Camera 10 10 50 71 Tp Camera 1 on Ax 208 Up Cometa 1 on Ass 2730 Camera 10 10 50 581 7p Camera 1 on fois 209 P Camera 1 on Ass 211 SH Camera 1 on Aw 212 7p Comers on Ast 233 p Camera 1 on Axe P33 7p Camera ond Q7 p Carrere 1 on Acct Q7 Cancel Tip You may also double click a device to copy it from one box to the other or you may drag devices bet
55. Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller must be available on your network Clients overview Work with clients Users can access your system with different types of clients All clients are unlicensed and can be downloaded and installed a many times as needed for free e The XProtect Smart Client is very feature rich and flexible for future integration of plugins etc The XProtect Smart Client must be installed on users computers e The XProtect Web Client is web based and primarily for viewing playing back and sharing video It does not have to be installed on users computers and connects through the internet e The Milestone Mobile client is a mobile application providing live video Video push play back exports of video and more from smartphones and tablets You can integrate all clients with the system solution Examples of clients About clients and which one to choose All clients are free and unlicensed This means that you can use all three clients with your system If you would like some users to use the XProtect Smart Client while others use the XProtect Web Client or the Milestone Mobile client you can easily do this All clients provide access user rights permitting to key surveillance system features such as live and recorded video control of PTZ cameras and export of recordings for use as evidence If you want support for multiple screens audio digital zoom intelligent browsing of recordi
56. Also global manual event definitions see Manage user defined events on page 243 can be used Note that when selecting Event based it is not possible to define alarms based on outputs only on inputs 4 Choose the time limit for when operator action is required and what event to trigger when the time limit is reached o Time limit Select a time limit for when operator action is required Default is 1 minute The time limit is not active before an event is attached o Events triggered Lets you select which event to trigger when the time limit has been reached 5 Choose additional settings o Related cameras Lets you select a maximum of 15 cameras for inclusion in the alarm definition even though they are not themselves triggering the alarm This can be relevant for example if you have selected an external event message Such as a door being opened as the source of your alarm By defining one or more cameras near the door you could attach the cameras recordings of the incident to the alarm www milestonesys com 283 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 6 Related map Lets you assign a map to the alarm when tt is listed in the XProtect Smart Client s Alarm Manager Initial alarm owner Lets you select a default user responsible for the alarm Initial alarm priority Lets you select a priority High Medium or Low for the alarm Priorities can be used for sorting pur
57. Click Finish Rule that makes an input trigger an action In the Rules feature all registered external input activation deactivation or change is treated as an event Based on an event you are able to specify a wide variety of actions to take To define a rule specifying that an input should result in one or more actions for example the starting of recording on a certain camera do the following 1 Start Managing Rules In step 1 Type of rule select Perform an action on event gt 2 Click event in the initial rule description 3 In the Select an Event dialog in the Devices Configurable Events group see Configurable events devices on page 221 select the appropriate option for your rule Input Activated Input Changed or Input Deactivated Click OK 4 Click devices recording servers management servers in the initial rule description 5 In the Select Devices and Groups dialog select the required input Click OK 6 Continue to step 2 Conditions and if needed select a condition Continue to step 3 Actions and select one or more actions Continue to step 4 Stop criteria and select a stop criteria Continue to step 5 Stop actions and select a stop action Click Finish Info tab overview The Info tab lets you view and edit basic information about a selected item in a number of fields The following items under Devices have an Info tab e Cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 e Hardware see About h
58. Click OK Alarms Manage Alarms IMPORTANT This feature will not work if you do not have the XProtect event server installed Based on functionality handled in the event server the alarms feature provides central overview control and scalability of alarms in any number of federated see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 installations including XProtect Enterprise systems throughout your organization It can be configured to generate alarms based on either Internal system related events For example motion server responding not responding archiving problems lack of disk space etc External integrated events This group can consist of several types of external events O O Analytics events Typically data received from an external third party video content analysis VCA providers Milestone Integration Platform plug in events www milestonesys com 279 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Through the Milestone Integration Platform Software Development Kit MIP SDK a third party vendor can develop custom plug ins for example integration to external Access Control Systems or similar to your system More about alarms Alarm configuration includes among other things e Dynamic role based setup of alarm handling e Central technical overview of all components servers cameras and external units e Setup of central logging of all incoming alarm
59. Client Enable multicasting On the Multicast tab select the Live multicast check box If the entire IP address range for multicast is already in use on one or more other recording servers you cannot enable multicasting on further recording servers without freeing up some multicasting IP addresses first Assign IP address range In this section you specify the range from which you want to assign addresses for multicast streams from the selected recording server Clients connect to these addresses when viewing multicast video from the relevant recording server In the Start field specify the first IP address in the required range IP address Then specify the last IP address in the range in the End field For more info see the following In the Start field specify the first port number in the required range Port Then specify the last port number in the range in the End field If a recording server has more than one network interface card it is only possible to multicast on one of them This field is therefore relevant if your recording server has more than one network interface card or if it has a network interface card with more than Source IP address for all one IP address multicast streams To use the recording server s default interface leave the value 0 0 0 0 IPv4 or IPv6 in the field If you want to use another network interface card or a different IP address on the same network interface card specify the IP add
60. Directory 258 Add XProtect Enterprise servers 291 Add edit STSs 76 Add publish Download Manager installer components 41 43 Address Range Scanning 80 87 Adjust settings on a Smart Client profile 186 187 Administrators role and federated sites 307 309 316 317 Advanced tips for Smart Client Matrix recipients 190 Alarm Data Settings 287 Alarm definitions 284 288 310 Alarms 270 281 Alarms rights 270 282 Alternative upgrade for workgroup 31 49 Analytics events settings 248 249 298 Appendix 367 Application rights 268 Archive and virus scanning 94 Archive structure 93 Assign a default preset position 134 Assign basic users to role 262 Assign failover recording servers 105 333 334 339 368 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Assign IP address range 108 Assign Windows users and groups to role 262 Attach a device or group of devices to storage area 90 92 Authorize a recording server 59 95 Automatic manual activation of output 152 AVI compression settings 301 AVI generation 297 Axis One Click Camera connection properties 76 77 78 B Back up archived recordings 92 Back up log server database 324 Back up restore fail and problem scenarios 328 Backup and restore event server configuration e 324 Backup restore and move system configuration 322 Basic rules of federated sites 307 309 316 317 318
61. Domain Name System DNS IPv4 and IPv6 see IPv6 vs IPv4 on page 360 address formats can be used in the list You have two ways of adding addresses to your list Either by manually entering each IP address or hostname or by importing an external list of addresses Address list e Manual entering Type the required IP address hostname in the address list Repeat for each required address e Import Click Import to browse for the required external list of addresses To be able to import an external list the external list must have been saved in a txt file format and each IP address or hostname must appear on a separate line in the txt file Windows simple text editor Microsoft Notepad is an excellent tool for creating such txt files Event server settings The Options see Options on page 293 Event Server Settings tab lets you specify settings for alarms events and logs Select the number of days to keep closed alarms i e alarms in the Keep closed alarms for states Closed Ignore and Reject www milestonesys com 297 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Keep all other alarms for Keep events for Keep logs for Let server communication Administrator s Manual Select the number of days for which to keep all other alarms that is alarms not in the states Closed Ignore and Reject IMPORTANT Alarms always have timestamps associated Also if the alarm is camera based the t
62. In this case user defined events make it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in the XProtect Smart Client So when a user defined event occurs because an XProtect Smart Client user triggers it manually a rule can trigger that one or more actions should take place on the system e For providing the ability to trigger events through API In this case user defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance system Using user defined events this way requires that a separate API Application Program Interface a set of building blocks for creating or customizing software applications is used when triggering the user defined event Authentication through Active Directory is required for using user defined events this way This ensures that even though the user defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance system only authorized users will be able to do it Also user defined events can via API be associated with meta data defining certain devices or device groups This is highly usable when using user defined events to trigger rules you avoid having a rule for each device basically doing the same thing Example A company uses access control having 35 entrances each with an access control device When an access control device is activated a user defined event is triggered in the system This user defined www milestonesys com 243 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Ad
63. Moton Note that other settings on the Motion tab such as Sensitivity will determine what will be interpreted as motion Merely enabling motion detection may thus not be sufficient to meet your requirements Time spent on finding the best possible balance of motion detection settings under different conditions day night calm windy weather etc will help you later avoid unnecessary recordings etc Creating the Rule 1 In the Site Navigation pane expand Rules and Events gt Rules gt Add New Rule 2 Type aname for the new rule in the Rule name field Example The rule covers a specific camera Camera 1 Replace the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name 3 OnStep 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type In this example we want to base the rule on an event namely detected motion Therefore we select Perform an action on lt event gt Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half of the wizard window Next Edit the rule description click an underined tem Perform an action on event from devices recorder Server 4 Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content Event link Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups www milestonesys com 200 Management Client Miles
64. PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one preset position has been defined for those devices You define preset positions for a PTZ camera on the Presets tab see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time oets an output on a device to a particular state activated or deactivated When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify which state to set and on which devices This type of action requires that the devices to which the action will be linked each have at least one external output unit connected to an output port 194 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Create bookmark on lt device gt Send notification to lt profile gt Make new lt log entry gt Start plug in on lt devices gt www milestonesys com No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Creates a bookmark on live streaming or recordings from a selected device A bookmark makes it easy to retrace a certain event or period in time Bookmark settings are controlled from the Option
65. Pedre pe thee chon on beten End tom 3 Save the setting by clicking Save in the Management Client s toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 4 The deactivated rule will be indicated by a different icon in the Rules list Rules FE Example Different icon indicates that third rule is deactivated Activating a rule When you want to activate the rule again select the required rule select the Activate check box and save the setting Validate rule s You are able to validate the content of an individual rule or all rules in one go Why would I need to validate the content of rules When you create a rule the Manage Rule ensures that all of the rule s elements make sense However when a rule has existed for some time one or more of the rule s elements may have been affected by other configuration and the rule may no longer work For example if a rule is triggered by a particular time profile the rule will not work if the time profile in question has subsequently been deleted Such unintended effects of configuration may be hard to keep an overview of rule validation helps you keep track of which rules have been affected IMPORTANT Validation takes place on a per rule basis each rule is validated in isolation It is currently not possible to validate rules against each other for example in order to see whether one rule conflicts with another rule not even if using the Validate All Rules feature
66. Q stream Can be started stopped automatically through a rule a d d Item recording www milestonesys com 144 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules 7n 2 A da Q When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server for retrieving events setting settings etc as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the R de W recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible 3 B Item database being repaired T A ca v Item requires attention Pp Lu co wv Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this cp amp g example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is 9 recording since a recording item is also an enabled item Manage input On many devices you are able to attach external units to input ports on the device Input units are typically external sensors Such external sensors
67. Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and then select the Recording Servers node Site Navigation RE Servei i 300 Basics Dicer a ne ie Getting Stated lal License Information y Servers iT Recording Servers E Failover Servers up Devices 7m Camera Recording server listed in Overview pane Backward compatibility with recording servers from product versions older than this current version is limited You can still access recordings on such older recording servers but in order for you to be able to change their configuration they must be of the same version as this current one Milestone highly recommends that all recording servers in your system are upgraded see Upgrade from previous version on page 48 to the latest possible version IMPORTANT When the Recording Server service is running it is very important that neither Windows Explorer nor other programs are accessing Media Database files or folders associated with your system setup Otherwise the recording server might not be able to rename or move relevant media files Unfortunately this might bring the recording server to a halt If this situation has already occurred stop the Recording Server service close the program accessing the media file s or folder s in question and simply restart the Recording Server service Authorize a recording server When first using the system or when new recording servers have been added to the system yo
68. When operators use Pan Tilt Zoom controls for the camera the camera is adjusted relative to its current position Refer to the camera s documentation if in doubt 5 Inthe toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save You are now able to configure preset positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 and patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 for the PTZ camera s in question Remote Retrieval tab The Remote Retrieval tab lets you handle remote recording retrieval settings for the remote site in a Milestone Interconnect setup see About Milestone Interconnect on page 85 Specify the following properties e Retrieve recordings at max Determines the maximum bandwidth in Kbits s to be used for retrieving recordings from a remote site camera Select the check box to enable limiting retrievals e Retrieve recordings between Determines that retrieval of recordings from a remote site camera should be limited to a specific time interval e Retrieve on devices in parallel Determines the maximum number of devices from which recordings are retrieved simultaneously Change the default value in situations where you have a need for more or less capacity depending on your system s capabilities None of the above applies to direct playback of remote recordings Note that if an automatic retrieval or request for retrieval from the XProtect Smart Client is received outside
69. When the specified part of the day ends the PTZ camera will stop patrolling www milestonesys com 198 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Use different PTZ patrolling profiles for day night Ensures that during daytime a PTZ camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile And during nights according to another patrolling profile e Pause PTZ patrolling and go to PTZ preset on input Ensures that a specific external input is activated a PTZ camera will pause its patrolling move to a specific preset position and remain at the preset position for a specific period of time after which it will resume patrolling Use higher live frame rate on motion rule In this example the camera has a default live frame rate of 10 frames per second FPS and the rule increases the live frame rate to 25 FPS when applied The effect is live video of a higher quality for as long as motion is detected on the camera Note that recording frame rate the frame rate with which video sequences will be saved is specified separately and is not affected by this rule If you want to permanently change the default frame rate for a camera do not use a rule Change the camera s default frame rate on the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 160 instead Motion is normally detected by the system when video received from cameras is analyzed This is the type of motion detection dealt with i
70. a help topic relevant to your task Access the help system s table of contents Access the help system s search feature Opens a dialog displaying information about the version of your Management Client 62 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Tools menu items Registered Services Enterprise Servers Effective Roles Options View menu items Depending on context Reset Application Layout Preview Window Show Recording Streams Federated Site Hierarchy Site Navigation www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Add registered servers Add XProtect Enterprise servers see Manage XProtect Enterprise servers on page 287 specifically Only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate View all roles of a selected user or group see Manage users and groups on page 255 Only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate Opens the Options dialog see Options on page 293 which lets you define and edit several global system settings Only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate Reset the layout see Customize the Management Client s layout on page 64 of the different panes in the Management Client to their default settings Toggle the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 on and off when working with recording servers and devices Tip If the Preview pane displays images from many cameras ata high frame rate it may slow down performance To specify the
71. box type the required user name Click OK Tip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the name you have entered is recognized d In the Password field specify the password for the user account and in the Confirm password field confirm the password The password fields cannot be empty The password for the account must contain one or more characters and or digits Click OK About installer commands As an administrator you have a set of installer command you can use when you work with XProtect installers 1 Onthe machine where you want to enter an installer command go to Window s Start and open a Command Prompt window 2 In the Command Prompt execute the required installer command possible with a prefix Note that there is a space before in all installer command lines Example HecordingServer setup x64 exe ss registration Tip To get an overview of installer commands in the Command Promt type space help and the following window appears Command tne opton reference Installer 2 0 This setup package accepts following command line switches arguments filename language lang partner id id idm 1d id quiet help msilog logpaths filepath acceptstatstics 0 1 generateargsfile x path showconsole license bcensefile licensetypes type 5_regestration www milestonesys com Sets the argurne
72. by the value selected in the Grid size list Showing the grid is not a requirement for selecting exclude regions even without the grid you are able to select exclude regions as described earlier Hiding the grid may provide a less obscured view of the preview image www milestonesys com 122 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Show Regions When the Show regions check box is selected default exclude regions will be highlighted in blue in the preview image Hiding exclude regions may provide a less obscured view of the preview image However under normal circumstances it is highly recommended that you keep the Show regions box selected otherwise exclude regions may exist without you or your colleagues being aware of it The blue exclude area indications will only appear in the preview image on the Motion tab not in any other preview images in the Management Client or access clients e Pen size Use the Pen size slider to indicate the size of the selections you wish to make when clicking and dragging the grid to select regions for privacy masking Default is set to small which is equivalent to one square in the grid Privacy Mask tab camera properties The Privacy Mask tab lets you enable and configure privacy masking for the selected camera Among other things you can define if and how selected areas of a camera s view should be masked before distribution For example if a survei
73. central www milestonesys com 86 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 site to be permanently on line with its remote sites for example a retail HQ central site and a number of shops remote sites For other industries like transportation the remote sites are mobile for example busses trains ships and so on and only able to establish network connection randomly Should the network connection fail during a commenced remote recording retrieval the job continues at next given opportunity Note that if an automatic retrieval or request for retrieval from the XProtect Smart Client is received outside the time interval specified on the Remote Retrieval tab it will be accepted but not started until the selected time interval is reached New remote recording retrieval jobs will queue and start when the allowed time interval is reached Pending remote recording retrieval jobs can be viewed from the System Dashboard s Current Tasks see About current task on page 272 After connection failure missing remote recordings are per default retrieved from remote sites Uses remote sites like a recording server uses the edge storage on a camera see Remote recording camera remote system on page 168 Typically remote sites are on line with their central site feeding it a live stream that the central site records Should the network fail for some reason the central site will miss out on recordin
74. click the required recording server to see its device groups Select the relevant hardware under the wanted device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s hardware will be listed Hj Recordng Server 1 ca Axis 271 Cane 10 1089 7p Camera amp fo Input 1 w Output 1 Aus 2100 Camera 10 10 69 41 Selecting hardware under a recording server 2 Select if you want to enable HTTPS on the hardware device This is not enabled by default 3 Enter the port to which the HTTPS connection is connected The port number can be any numeric value between 1 and 65535 4 Make changes as needed www milestonesys com 160 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 5 Click Save HTTPS is enabled for the entire hardware device that is for example a hardware device s camera microphone and speaker Camera Lets you view or edit settings such as default frame rate resolution compression the maximum number of frames between keyframes on screen date time text display etc for a selected camera or for all cameras within a selected device group The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the drivers for the cameras in question and is likely to vary depending on the types of cameras selected Some cameras may support more than one type of stream for example MPEG4 and MJPEG In that Case you can use multi streaming see Stre
75. cluster Descriptions and illustrations might differ from what your see on your screen Installation and change of URL address 1 Install the management server and all its subcomponents see Installation overview on page 29 on the first server in the cluster www milestonesys com 45 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The management server must be installed with a specific user and not as a network service This requires that you use the Custom install option see Install your system Custom option on page 32 Furthermore the specific user must have access to the shared network drive and preferably a non expiry password The service channel and the IIS should both be installed normally with the exact same user and not as cluster services 2 After you have installed the management server and the Management Client on the first server in the cluster open the Management Client Tools select Registered Services a Inthe Add Remove Registered Services window select Log Service in the list click Edit b Inthe Edit Registered Service window change the URL address of the log service to the URL address of the cluster URLs Address External amp Alte MuCluster Seve AF Losenice asm c Repeat steps a and b for all services listed in the Add Remove Registered Services window Click Network d Inthe Network Configuration window change the URL address o
76. com 264 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 o Visible Determines whether information about the selected input s will be visible to users of the XProtect Smart Client as well as users of XProtect Central an add on product for providing complete overview of surveillance system status and alarms Output related rights Available functionality depends on your product version Setting determines whether o Visible the selected output s will be visible in the XProtect Smart Client If visible the output will be selectable on a list in the XProtect Smart Client o Activate output the selected output s can be activated from the XProtect Smart Client Outputs are selected and activated on the XProtect Smart Client s Live tab Both rights thus require that the role has been granted the right to view the XProtect Smart Client s Live tab this right is granted as part of the application security rights Why are some check boxes filled with squares Square filled check boxes can only appear if you are specifying role rights for a device group in which case they indicate that the right in question currently applies for some but not all devices within the device group Live 7 View Recorded ve E Expo Ped E You can still select or clear such square filled check boxes but note that your choice will in that case apply for all devices within the device group Alternatively
77. contain colons Colons however are also used in other types of network addressing syntax For example IPv4 uses a colon to separate IP address and port number when both are used in a URL IPv6 has inherited this principle Therefore in order to avoid confusion square brackets are put around IPv6 addresses when they are used in URLs www milestonesys com 361 IPv6 Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Example of a URL with an IPv6 address nttp 2001 0880 0000 0000 0000 0 80 3F A8 18AB which may of course be shortened to for example http 2001 B80 F80 3FA8 18AB Example of a URL with an IPv6 address and a port number http 2001 0B80 0000 0000 0000 0F80 3FA8 18AB 1234 which may of course be shortened to for example http 2001 B80 F80 3FA8 18AB 1234 For more information about IPv6 see for example www iana org IANA the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority is the organization responsible for the global coordination of IP addressing www milestonesys com 362 IPv6 Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Multi domain with one way trust Setup with one way trust If you run your system in a multi domain environment you can configure this setup with one way trust The system is installed on the trusting domain and users log in from trusting and trusted domains 1 Create a service account in the trusted domain You can name it whatever you want f
78. database path cannot be changed while the failover recording server is taking over from a recording server Changes will be applied when the failover recording server is no longer taking over from a recording server e Enable this failover server Clear to disable the failover recording server by default selected Note that failover recording servers must be disabled to be able to take over from recording servers Group failover recording servers 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 select Servers Failover Servers This opens a list of installed failover recording servers and failover groups 2 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the top node Failover Groups and select Add Group from the menu that appears 3 Specify a name in this example Failover Group 1 and a description optional of your new group Click OK 4 Right click the group Failover Group 1 you just created From the menu that appears select Edit Group Members This opens the Select Group Members window 5 Drag and drop or use the buttons to move the selected failover recording server s from the left side to the right side Select Group Members Failover Group 1 X Avalabi Selec tet Fave Geoupt W Falpvei Server 1 F stove Group 1 Unrasved F alrvtt Servers DJ Falover Server 1 Add bj Remove d ox Cancel Click OK The selected failover recording server s now belongs to the
79. days After this initial period ends all recording servers and cameras on your system will require activation of their individual licenses You must therefore activate your licenses before the initial period ends since all recording servers and cameras for which no licenses have been activated will otherwise stop sending data to the surveillance system a Use the Download Manager see Download Manager download web page on page 38 to make additional components available to users if required What is the Download Manager An application which lets surveillance system administrators manage which system related components e g particular language versions of clients surveillance system users will be able to access from a targeted web page generated by the management server Tip The default configuration of the Download Manager ensures that end users have access to the XProtect Smart Client in language versions matching the language of your system Basically you only have to use the Download Manager if you want to make additional language versions plug ins or similar available to your organization s users www milestonesys com 60 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Log in to the Management Client Access to the Management Client requires certain user rights Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 1 Click the Management Client desktop icon or in Windows Start men
80. defined Event Type a name for the new user defined event and click OK The newly added user defined event will now appear in the list in the Overview pane If the user has rights to do so refer to About roles on page 255 the user defined event can now be manually triggered from XProtect Smart Client Already connected XProtect Smart Client users must log out and log in again before the user defined event will be visible Remember to create one or more rules see Manage rules on page 226 specifying what should take place when the custom event occurs Rename a user defined event 1 3 4 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Rules and Events and select User defined Events In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required user defined event In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 overwrite the existing name In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Already connected XProtect Smart Client users must log out and log in again before the name change will be visible www milestonesys com 244 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Manage analytics events Analytics events are typically data received from an external third party video content analysis VCA providers Using analytics events as basis for alarms is basically a three step process
81. delete the device group itself If you wish to delete IP hardware see About hardware on page 81 such as a camera from your system do so on a recording server level The following examples are based on grouping cameras into device groups but the principle applies for microphones speakers inputs and outputs as well Add a device group 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the item under which you wish to create the new device group 2 Select Add Device Group Devices ez EEJ e i 1B Add Device Group CTRL N 7k 5 5 2 12 1 c aja Refresh FS The Add Device Group dialog will appear www milestonesys com 140 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 In the Add Device Group dialog specify a name and description of the new device group Add Device Group x Name Man Buldng Cameras Descrphion aye yt ins Ga marn budno on 228 High Sheet x concn The description will later appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the device group in the device list Click OK A folder representing the new device group is added to the list You are now able to specify which devices should belong in the device group Tip If required you are able to add device groups as subgroups under other device groups as illustrated here gt Red Sector Cameras LO Recepbon Area S Red Sector Reception C X Red Sector Back Door Cam
82. details in this context Furthermore configurable events are not triggered until they have been added and configured on the Event tab on a hardware or device see Events tab overview on page 168 Predefined events hardware Communication Error Occurs when a connection to a the hardware is lost Hardware Communication Started Occurs when communication with the hardware is successfully Hardware established Communication Stopped Occurs when communication with the hardware is successfully Hardware stopped Configurable events devices These configurable events are unknown until they are automatically imported from device drivers As a result they cannot be documented separately or in details in this context Furthermore configurable www milestonesys com 221 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Administrator s Manual events are not triggered until they have been added and configured on the Event tab on a hardware or device see Events tab overview on page 168 Predefined events devices Bookmark Reference Requested Communication Error Device Communication Started Device Communication Stopped Device Feed Overflow Started Feed Overflow Stopped Live Client Feed Requested Live Client Feed Terminated www milestonesys com Occurs when a bookmark is made in live mode in the XProtect Smart Client Furthermore a requirement for using the Default record on bookmark rule
83. device groups you can quickly move all devices in a group simply by moving the group folder When the required devices are listed in the Selected devices list click OK You have now specified the exact content of the first part of the rule description Next Edit the mule descrption chck an underlined tem Perform an action on Motion Start from Bue Sector Back Door Blue Sector Entrance rance Example only your selections may be different Perform an action in a time interval If you select a time based rule no more information is required on the wizard s first step 4 Click Next to go to the wizard s second step On the wizard s second step you are able to define further conditions for the rule www milestonesys com 231 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 5 Select one or more conditions for example Day of week is lt day gt First Select conditions to apply Within selected lime in lt time profile gt Outside selected time in time profile Within the time period starlime to lt endtine gt 9 Day of week is days xan ple only ur selections mi y DE Jiffere Depending on your selections the lower part of the wizard window lets you edit the rule description Next Edit the rule descnption cbck an underlined item Perform an action on Motion Start from Blue Sector Back Door Blue Sector Entrance day of week is days x
84. drag it to the desired position or click the on screen arrow buttons to move the monitor in the layout The arrow buttons are used for moving all monitors as a group on the XProtect Smart Wall Moving the monitors as a group means that the monitors maintain their relative positions The Size and Aspect ratio properties initially configured in the Manage monitors on page 179 dialog can also here be changed individually for each monitor in the XProtect Smart Wall Manage monitors To add a monitor to the XProtect Smart Wall do the following 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Client and select Smart Wall 2 In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the Smart Walls node 3 Right click the required XProtect Smart Wall and select Add Monitor www milestonesys com 179 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4 Inthe Create Monitor dialog type a name for the monitor and optionally other information 5 Click OK Edit monitor properties on page 180 Edit monitor properties 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Clients and select Smart Wall 2 In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Smart Walls then expand the required XProtect Smart Wall and select the required monitor 3 In the Pro
85. e Remove installation files see Remove system components on page 53 for non required features from the management server This can help save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features Device pack installer must be downloaded The device pack containing device drivers on page 330 included in your original installation is not included on the download web page So if you need to reinstall the device pack make the device pack installer available you must first add publish the latest device pack installer to the Download Manager by doing the following 1 Get the newest device pack from hito www milestonesys com downloads 2 Add publish it see Add publish Download Manager installer components on page 41 to the Download Manager by calling it with the ss registration see About installer commands on page 36 Tip If you do not have a network connection you can reinstall the entire recording server from the Download Manager The install files for the recording server is placed locally on your machine and in this way you automatically also get a reinstall of the device pack Download Manager and virus scanning If you are using virus scanning see Virus scanning information on page 354 software on the management server it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager If allowed in your or
86. even have built in microphones On many devices you can attach external loudspeakers Some devices even have built in speakers On many devices you can attach external units typically external sensors to input ports on the device Input from such external input units can be used for many purposes in the system On many devices you can attach external units to output ports on the device This allows you to activate deactivate lights sirens etc through the system You can either add see Add hardware on page 78 or replace see About hardware on page 81 Cameras Enabling disabling as well as renaming of individual cameras takes place on the recording server hardware management level see About hardware on page 81 www milestonesys com 113 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 For all other configuration and management of cameras expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select Cameras In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 you group your cameras for an easy overview of your cameras Grouping also lets you specify common properties for all cameras within a group in one go and add cameras see About device groups on page 139 to that group Devices CIS S Cameras O Lab Cameras Lab Cam 1 lt P Lab Cam 2 I Lab Cam 3 a9 Lab Cam5 Th Lab Cam 6 3p Lab Cam 7 p Lab Cam 8 P Lab Cam3 7p Lab
87. even though technically you log out of your home site when connecting to another site you will still see the site structure as your former home site sees it This means that any changes you make to a child might not be visible until such changes reaches your home site via scheduled synchronization So changes you make in your hierarchy might not be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane until later For more details refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 305 You cannot refresh via a connection to a child this must take place directly from the home site When do I need to accept link requests Whether as the administrator of a child you must accept a link request or not or the link request is accepted automatically depends on your administrator settings Refer to The administrator role and federated sites see Administrators role and federated sites on page 305 Where is Milestone Federated Architecture configured and managed Setting up and configuring Milestone Federated Architecture takes place in the Management Client www milestonesys com 307 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Do need more than one XProtect Smart Client to work with Milestone Federated Architecture When working with Milestone Federated Architecture all work in the XProtect Smart Client can be handled from one XProtect Smart Client installation i e there is no need for a
88. evidence export and so on when browsing archived recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a cameras regular databases The fact that you are viewing archived recordings are completely transparent Hemember that individual user rights may prevent particular users from viewing recordings from particular cameras just as is the case when browsing recordings from cameras regular databases Back up archived recordings Many organizations want to back up their recordings using tape drives or similar Exactly how you do this is highly individual depending on the backup media used in your organization However the following is worth bearing in mind Back up archives rather than camera databases Always create backups based on the content of archives not based on individual camera databases Creating backups based on the content of individual camera databases may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions www milestonesys com 91 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving times Tip You are able to view each recording server s archiving schedule in each of a recording server s archives on the Storage tab Knowing archive structure lets you target backups When recordings are archived they are stored in a certain sub directory structure within the archive During all regular u
89. expand other items letting you access already expanded items faster When available memory drops to 300 MB the memory indicator numbers turn red When the memory indicator drops to 0 MB you cannot expand any more items and will see a warning dialog asking you to free up memory by refreshing your configuration Click OK to exit this dialog and press F5 on your keyboard or select Refresh in the Action menu Panes overview Available functionality depends on your product version The Management Client contain the following panes The illustration outlines the Management Client window s default layout the window layout can be customized see Customize the Management Client s layout on page 64 and may therefore be different on your computer Menu and tool bars Provide quick access to often used features Site Navigation pane Your main navigation element in the Management Client Name settings and configurations of the site you are logged into are reflected see Manage Milestone Federated Architecture on page 312 here site name is visible at the top of the pane The Management Client s features are grouped into categories reflecting the functionality of the software Tip Right clicking items in the Site Navigation pane gives you quick access to management features Federated Site Hierarchy pane Your navigation element dedicated to displaying Milestone Federated Architecture sites see Milestone Federated Architecture O
90. finish and click Close Your restore is finished Select shared backup folder Before backing up and restoring any system configuration you must set a backup folder for this purpose 1 Right click the notification area s management server service icon and select Select shared backup folder 2 Inthe window that appears browse to the wanted file location 3 Click OK twice 4 f asked if you want to delete files in the current backup folder click Yes or No depending on your needs Manual back up of system configuration Important information e Your system stays online e A backup cannot be used for copying configurations see Move system configuration to new management server on page 326 to other systems e Depending on your system configuration your hardware and on whether your SQL server management server and Management Client are installed on the same machine or not backing up configuration might take some time e Logs including audit logs see Manage logs on page 273 are not part of the configuration backup www milestonesys com 324 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Back up All relevant system configuration files will be combined into one single cnf file which is saved at a specified location Js 2 3 From the Management Client s menu bar select File Backup Configuration Next you are presented with an import
91. for adding XProtect Expert servers as children Furthermore integration is also not possible if your system uses IPv6 see IPv6 vs IPv4 on page 360 When added XProtect Enterprise servers can send data and video to your system You can compare added XProtect Enterprise servers with recording servers and these will likewise be available for viewing in clients Note that roles defined in the Management Client can be given access to data from XProtect Enterprise servers This is done by coupling roles in your system with XProtect Enterprise user rights Furthermore XProtect Enterprise servers added in the Management Client will be listed in the Add Remove XProtect Enterprise Servers dialog which you can open by selecting XProtect Enterprise Servers from the Tools menu XProtect Enterprise s Recording Server service must be running for your system to receive data from the XProtect Enterprise installation Refer to the XProtect Enterprise documentation for more information Limitations when adding XProtect Enterprise servers There are a few limitations to how XProtect Enterprise servers will work when added as slaves to your system They will provide operational status and status details on cameras and XProtect Enterprise servers but not on any other device types Also you cannot define cameras user rights scheduling or other settings for the XProtect Enterprise installation or see previews of the cameras in your system All nece
92. group Failover Group 1 you just created _____ Falover Groups f Failover Group 1 Failover Server 1 f Unused Failover Server 6 Next go to the Sequence tab Click Up and Down to set the internal sequence of the regular failover recordings servers in the group Failover group properties The Info tab www milestonesys com 336 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Name Name as it appears in the Management Client in logs etc e Description Optional description for example a description of the server s physical location The Sequence tab e Specify the failover sequence Use Up and Down to set the wanted sequence of regular failover recording servers within the group Assign failover recording servers On the Failover tab of a recording server you can choose between 3 different types of failover setups a No failover setup b Aprimary secondary failover setup c A hot standby setup If you select b and c you must select the specific server groups With b you must also select a primary and optionally a secondary failover group If the recording server becomes unavailable a failover recording server from the primary failover group will take over If you have also selected a secondary failover group a failover recording server from the secondary group will take over in case all failover recording servers in the primary f
93. half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Smart Client or other relevant clients The following rights are available e Manage o Manage alarms for example change priorities of alarms and re delegate alarms to other users o Acknowledge alarms o Change state for example from New to Assigned of several alarms simultaneously otherwise state must be changed on a per alarm basis e View o View alarms o Print alarms reports MIP rights Through the Milestone Integration Platform Software Development Kit MIP SDK a third party vendor can develop custom plug ins for example integration to external Access Control Systems or similar to your system Custom settings for these plug ins if any can be found on the MIP tab About basic users When working with basic users it is important to understand the difference between basic user and Windows user e amp Basic users are authenticated by a user name password combination and are specific to a Milestone Federated Architecture MFA site see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 Even if basic users have the same name and password a basic user created at one MFA site does not have access to another MFA site e 3 Windows users are authenticated based on their Windows login and are specific to a machine www milestonesys com 269 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator
94. having more than one output unit attached the unit number will typically indicate the number of the output port to which the output is attached For hardware with for example four output ports the numbers will typically range from O to 3 Unit number Fill in properties on the Settings tab Lets you verify or edit key output settings such as active output state output trigger time etc for a selected output or for all outputs within a selected device group However if the device group contains 400 cameras or more the Settings tab will not be available for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the drivers for the cameras in question and is likely to vary depending on the output selected Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max 5 seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information Content is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change the values 1 Select the row with the property you want to change www milestonesys com 153 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 Click the button to the right of the properties column 3 Change the value of the property 4
95. hide 68 Use different PTZ patrolling profiles for day night rule 209 Use higher live frame rate on motion rule 200 Use preset positions from device type 2 132 134 Use rules to trigger e mail notifications 242 Use several instances of an event 171 172 Use specific PTZ patrolling profile during specific part of day rule 204 User settings 298 User defined events external 225 Users and Groups rights 263 V Validate rule s 235 View archived recordings 92 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual View current state of microphones 139 View current state of speakers 145 View effective roles 261 View Group rights 184 185 269 View groups from a client user s perspective 185 View log 274 View menu items 63 View status messages 342 350 351 View the current state of an input 147 View version information 342 350 351 View edit a recording server s properties 96 Virus scanning 356 Virus scanning information 43 356 W What are the requirements 108 What happens while the management server is unavailable 329 What is multicasting 107 What you can cover in a rule 229 Why clients require time synchronization 113 Why servers require time synchronization 112 Why use a public address 110 Windows Task Manager Careful when ending processes 345 Work with Smart Client profiles roles and time profiles 185 186 236 379 I
96. i e when the regular failover recording server should take over from the recording server Starting this service typically takes a couple of seconds but may take longer depending on local security settings etc In a hot standby setup this service is always running allowing the hot standby server to take over faster than the regular failover recording server Illustration Failover process in details www milestonesys com 332 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 This connection is interrupted i e the recording server is not running 3 The failover recording server requests the current configuration of the recording server from the management server The management server sends the requested configuration the failover recording server receives the configuration starts up and starts recording on behalf of the recording server 4 The failover recording server and the relevant camera s exchange video data 5 The failover recording server continually tries to re establish connection to the recording server 6 When the connection to the recording server is re established the failover recording server shuts down and the recording server fetches video data if any recorded during its down time and the video data is merged back in to the recoding servers database Failover steps for hot standby setups 1 To check whether it is runni
97. in Active Directory Such as new members added or old members removed at a later stage are immediately reflected in the system Note that a user can be a member of more than one group at a time www milestonesys com 256 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Add users not using Active Directory While you primarily add users and groups to roles see About roles on page 255 through Active Directory you can also add individual users but not groups without Active Directory If you do not use Active Directory note the following e When you install the management server the user under which the Management Server service runs must be a local PC user on the server e Onthe computer running the management server simple file sharing must be disabled the following way 1 On the computer running management server right click Start and select Explore 2 Inthe window that opens select the Tools menu then select Folder Options 3 Select the View tab 4 Scroll to the bottom of the Advanced settings list and make sure that the Use simple file sharing Recommended check box is cleared 5 Click OK and close the window e You add users to roles through the Management Client almost as when adding users from Active Directory However when adding users you must refer to particular users on particular computers as in this example where the user USERO0O01 on the computer PCOO01 is ad
98. in the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 Host name Non editable field displaying the recording server s host name Non editable field displaying the URL of the recording server s web server The web server is used for example for handling PTZ Web server URL camera control commands and for handling browse and live requests from XProtect Smart Clients The URL will include the port number used for web server communication typically port 7563 Non editable field displaying the time zone in which the recording Time zone server is located Storage tab recording server properties Available functionality depends on your product version On the Storage tab you are able to setup manage and view storage areas for selected recording servers Refer to About storage and archiving on page 88 for at more general introduction to recoding an archiving What is a storage area A storage area is a directory in which database content primarily recordings from the cameras connected to the recording server is stored in at least a recording database and possibly archived in a number of archiving databases A default storage area with a default recording database is automatically created for each recording server when the recording server is installed on the system Unless you specifically define that another storage area should be used for particular cameras recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual ca
99. information on working with alarms in a federated setup Federated sites example scenario Limestone City The following is an example of how several systems can be integrated into an MFA in this case in a City Surveillance scenario Many surveillance integrators want to integrate several independent surveillance entities into a large scale system where each site can still be used and managed locally and users and administrators can be given access to the entire large scale installation www milestonesys com 308 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 In this example several governmental and business installations must be tied together in a large scale system offering the different entities local access and management of the system as well as governmental police etc access in case of crimes and emergencies Downtown Residential City Hall public places Residential area shops A C M E Industries Inc amp branch offices Limestone Transportation Ltd MB Industries Police Headquarters ge Mo pe oS gt I Limestone Center Shopping Mall All entities must be connected to the city s video surveillance so that City Hall officials and police officers can access video from their business or residential area to monitor live video or investigate recorded video in case of break ins thefts vandalism emergencies terror etc In addition to being connected to
100. is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via Common Gateway Interface CGI script commands Also check the system release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the devices and firmware used Enable input When inputs are detected with the Add Hardware on page 78 process they are by default disabled You can activate inputs when needed If a device has several inputs you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the input is placed 3 Right click the required input and select Enabled Specify input properties Each input typically has several properties You can access these properties in two ways e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices and select Inputs In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required inputs folder and select the required input or e Inthe Overview pane select a device group to define settings for all inputs in the group or expand a device group and select the required input The properties of the selected input or the common properties for all inputs in a selected device group
101. is only possible to multicast on one of them Through the Management Client you are able to specify which one to use www milestonesys com 105 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The successful implementation of multicasting also requires that your network equipment switches and so on has been set up to relay multicast data packets to the required group of recipients only If not multicasting may not be different from broadcasting which can significantly slow down network communication Pope y Mulicai bee Conhgur son v Live mutes AGDE range An address hom thes cange i acsgned to new mudcant stream that ace stated on the recording tarvet IP adde Start 22010 End 22010 Post Start 6000 End 7000 Source P sddress lox af mutica sreemt 09000 Pv4 DOOT Use delauk riadaca IPS Use detaut rasdacej Daagam ocbon MTU 1500 TTL 129 o rio E Setters 3 Storage tj Fiber sje Muhicast r Netesci QM What is multicasting In regular network communication each data packet is sent from a single sender to a single recipient a process known as unicasting With multicasting however you can send a single data packet from a server to multiple recipients clients within a group Multicasting can help save bandwidth e When using unicasting the source must transmit one data stream for each recipient e When using multicasting only a single data stream is req
102. link We specify 8 00 days Clicking the days link lets you specify required days of the week gt In this example our rule should only apply on Saturdays so we select Saturday and click OK Select Days x C Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday m Sunday Cea By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Next Edi the rule descnption chck an underlined te Perform an action in a time interval within the time period 100 to 3 00 and day of week is Seturday Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard 6 On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform www milestonesys com 205 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 nd In this example we want to start patrolling according to a specific patrolling profile We therefore select the action Start patrolling on device using profile with PTZ priority priority irst Select actions to perform Start recording on devices Start feed on devices Set live frame rete on devices Set recording frame rate on devices Start patrolling on device using profile with PTZ priority priority Pause patrolling on devices Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window gt In th
103. may of course be different in different locations around the world If time on the servers is not synchronized you may experience that a recording server is ahead of the management server s time When a recording server is ahead of the management server s time it may result in a client s token expiring on the recording server earlier than intended by the management server Under unfortunate circumstances you might even experience that a recording server claims that a client s token has already expired when it receives it effectively preventing the client from viewing recordings from the recording server How to synchronize time on your organization s servers depends on your network configuration internet access use of domain controllers etc Often servers on a domain are already time synchronized against the domain controller If so you should be fine as long as all required servers belong to the domain in question If your servers are not already time synchronized it will be necessary to synchronize the servers time against a time server preferably the same time server The following articles from Microsoft describe what to do in different situations e How to configure an authoritative time server in Windows Server 2003 e Registry entries for the W32Time service If these links do not work for you try searching www microsoft com for time server time service synchronize servers or similar It is also very important that XProt
104. o German o Italian o Japanese o Portuguese o Russian o Simplified Chinese o Spanish o Traditional Chinese 2 The log is displayed in the selected language Next time your open the log it is reset to the default language Search log To search a log use the Search criteria box in the top part of the log pane 1 Specify your search criteria by selecting the required user name location etc from the lists Tip You can combine selections or make no selection in certain lists as required The more search criteria you combine the less search results you will typically get 2 Click Refresh to make the log page reflect your search criteria Tip To clear your search criteria and return to viewing all of the log s content click Clear Export log You are able to export logs and save the exported logs as tab delimited text txt files at a location of your choice Example of an exported log txt file Example of an exported log txt file viewed in Notepad 9 MySystemi egExpert tat Hetegad m x Fe Edt Forms Vew Heb i Timest amp Level Event Type Source Oescription 1 21 4 2007 1 47 26 PM Error communticarton Error casera 14 Device Communication Error 1 4 2007 1 47 33 PM Error Communication Error amera 10 Device Communication Error 1 4 2007 1 47 37 PM Error Comemunicarton Error Camera 12 Device Commun icar on Error 12 4 2007 1 47 39 PM Error Comunication Error Camera 11 Device Communication Error 11 4 2007 2 4
105. of clients 23 Expand collapse 315 Export log 274 277 Express 79 External Event rights 268 282 F Failover group properties 338 Failover recording server properties 337 340 Failover Recording Server service 334 341 Failover recording servers regular hot standby 333 Failover tab recording server properties 105 336 Failover tab properties 106 340 Failover related events 340 Fall owitch from DST to standard time 360 FAQs Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 failover recording servers regular hot standby 335 XProtect Central and Alarms Same Thing e 283 Federated icons 314 Federated sites example scenario Limestone City 310 File menu items 62 Fill in properties on the Events tab 149 Fill in properties on the Info tab 148 153 Fill in properties on the Settings tab 154 Fill in Settings tab properties 149 Find more information 25 Fisheye tab camera properties 118 Flush SQL server transaction log 322 Frequently asked questions about archiving 94 Frequently asked questions to federated sites 309 G General 295 Generic event data source properties 249 250 253 254 Generic event properties 252 Generic event test properties 251 253 Generic events Options settings 250 251 254 300 Generic events external 225 Get additional licenses 71 72 73 Get started 32 58 www milestonesys co
106. of selecting the required notification profile You also get the option of selecting which cameras any recordings to be included in the notification profile s e mail notifications should come from send notification to profite images from recording device Bear in mind that recordings cannot be included in the notification profile s e mail notifications unless something is actually being recorded If still images or AVI video clips are required in the notification profile s e mail notifications you should therefore verify that the rule you are creating or another existing rule specifies that recording should take place The following example is from a rule which includes both a Start recording action and a Send notification to action iex COR the iuie C amp SCIPOON CESK an unogernmneg iem Perform an action on Input Activated from Red Sector Door Sensor start recording 5 seconds before on Red Sector Entrance Car and Send notification to Securty Red Sector Entrance images from Red Sector Entrance Cam Perform action 10 seconds after stop recording immediately For more information about rules in general refer to Manage rules on page 226 Notification profile settings Type a descriptive name for the notification profile The name Name appears later whenever you select the notification profile during the process of creating a rule Type a description of the notification profile The description appears when
107. on page 57 select the required item in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the Events tab www milestonesys com 168 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 For hardware the Events tab will only be available if the selected item supports events Conhgured E vents om 4 Motor Stated HW B General Mohan Stopped Hw Enabled Tow Inchude Ine True Moton Window 82 Prebuller arms pee second 3 Prebuller Second Enabled Adi Deme 2 In the Configured Events list add the wanted event s on each item on your system Which events you may select and add in the Configured events list is determined entirely by the hardware device in question and its configuration For some types of hardware devices the list may be empty In Milestone Interconnect setups some events originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but generic see Manage generic events on page 248 and user defined see Manage user defined events on page 243 events must be added manually To view events added after a Milestone Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 87 Camera In addition to the system s motion detection some cameras can themselves be configured to detect motion If a camera is capable of such detection the camera s detections can be used as events These events can be used w
108. or performance purposes 1 In the Overview pane expand the required recording server right click the hardware device you wish to disable www milestonesys com 83 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 From the menu that appears select Enabled to clear it d Recording Servers Hi DKLT MKM 01 milestone dk p Cameri Collapse op Input X z Q Output G Edst IP Hardware Allerton Str C Delete IP Hardware DELETE 7p Cameri do input 1 m w Vutput Rename IP Hardware Replace Hardware c mg 3 Refresh F5 Rn Enable disable individual devices Cameras are by default enabled Microphones speakers inputs and outputs are by default disabled This means that microphones speakers inputs and outputs must be individually enabled before they can be used on the system The reason for this is that surveillance systems inherently rely on cameras whereas the use of microphones and so on is highly individual depending on organizations needs In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 under the required server enabled disabled devices are indicated the following way examples show indications for an output w Disabled w Enabled The same method for enabling disabling is used for cameras microphones speakers inputs and outputs To enable a camera input or output 1 In the Overview pane expand the required recording server and the required hardwa
109. order not to remove more recordings than necessary excess recordings will be removed in chunks of approximately one hour s worth of recordings What happens if a scheduled archiving fails If a scheduled archiving fails for example because the archive is located on a network drive which is temporarily unavailable the system will retry archiving after one minute If that fails another retry will take place after yet another minute and so forth If the time of the next scheduled archiving is reached between two retries an archiving attempt will be made at the scheduled time if that attempt fails the system will retry archiving after an hour and so forth What happens if archiving is not finished before the next scheduled archiving Your system inserts a compulsory period of archiving free time after each finished archiving job This ensures that archiving jobs do not overlap in time About recording servers Recording servers are used for recording video feeds and for communicating with cameras and other devices A surveillance system will typically contain several recording servers although only a single recording server is required for the system to work Recording servers on your system i e computers with the recording server software installed and configured to communicate with a management server will be listed in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 when you expand the Servers folder in the
110. possibly one secondary failover server group Also from the attached dropdown select a primary failover group and possibly a secondary failover group Hot standby server Select a hot standby setup Also from the dropdown select a hot standby server Advanced failover settings Opens the Advanced Failover Settings window o Full Support Select to get full failover support for the device o Live Only Select to get live failover support for the device o Disabled Select to disable failover support for the device Failover service communication port TCP By default the port number is 11000 This port is used for communication between recording servers and failover recording servers If changed the recording server in question must be running and must be connected to the management server meanwhile Multicasting tab recording server properties Your system supports multicasting of live streams from recording servers In cases when many XProtect Smart Client see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 users want to view live video from the same camera multicasting can help save considerable system resources Multicasting is particularly useful if you use XProtect Smart Clients Matrix functionality where multiple XProtect Smart Clients often require live video from the same camera Multicasting is only possible for live streams not for recorded video audio If a recording server has more than one network interface card it
111. profile see Manage notification profiles on page 239 so an e mail notification is automatically sent to relevant people in your organization Occurs when a failover recording server see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 takes over from a recording server A failover recording server is a spare recording server which can take over if a standard recording server becomes unavailable 225 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Occurs when a recording server becomes available again and is Failover Stopped able to take over from a failover recording server see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 Manage rules Rules are a central element in your system Rules determine highly important settings such as when cameras should record when PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras should patrol when notifications should be sent etc Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 2 start recording 3 seconds before on the device on which event occurred Perform stop action on Motion End from Camera 2 stop recording immediately Example A rule specifying that a particular camera should begin recording when it detects motior You create and manage rules in the Management Client 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the Rules and Events folder then select Rules In the O
112. role is able to see the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in clients e Modify Determines if the selected role is able to make changes to the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in clients e Delete Determines if the selected role is able to delete the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in clients e Create subgroups and views Determines if the selected role is able to create subgroups and views in the selected view group Remote Recording rights Available functionality depends on your product version The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Smart Client or other relevant clients The following rights are available e Retrieve remote recordings Determines if users groups with the selected role should be able to retrieve remote recordings see Remote recording camera remote system on page 168 Servers rights The next item section is only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate Specifying role rights on the Servers tab is only relevant if you have integrated XProtect Enterprise servers into your system refer to Manage XProtect Enterprise servers on page 287 for more information Matrix rights Specifying role rights on the Matrix tab is only relevant i
113. s Manual VMS 2013 Manage Milestone Federated Architecture For conceptual details on Milestone Federated Architecture MFA refer to Milestone Federated Architecture overview on page 302 The Management Client has a Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 dedicated to displaying federated sites and their parent child links From the View menu see Management Client menu overview on page 61 you can show or hide the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane The pane is located on the left side of the Management Client window under the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 Fisdaesihad Sibe Hararey The parent server you are logged in to your home site is always at the top of the site hierarchy You can view all its linked children and downwards through the parent child hierarchy Settings and configurations of your home site is always reflected in the Overview and Properties panes see Panes overview on page 57 and its site name visible at the top of the Site Navigation pane To connect to another site in the hierarchy see Connect to another site in hierarchy on page 315 click the wanted site in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane What if only have one server and don t run MFA Your user interface looks the same but when you view the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane you will only see the one server in your setup Federated icons There are a number of icons in MFA each representing th
114. select required plug ins and on which devices to stop the plug ins This type of action requires that at one or more plug ins are available on your system No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Changes device settings on one or more devices When you select this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select required devices and you will be able to define required settings on the devices you have specified If defining settings for more than one device you will only be able to change settings that are available for all of the specified devices Example You specify that the action should be linked to Device 1 and Device 2 Device 1 has the settings A B and C and Device 2 has the settings B C and D In this case you will only be able to change the settings that are available for both devices namely settings B and C No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Makes video from the selected cameras appear on a computer capable of displaying Matrix see About Matrix recipients on page 187 triggered video i e a computer on which either an XProtect Smart Client or a Matrix Monitor application is
115. selected camera on page 123 Motion see Motion tab camera properties on page The selected camera s motion detection settings 118 Read the camera list s status icons The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 input see Manage input on page 145 and output see Manage output on page 150 events in item lists Item enabled The device is enabled and we retrieve a P a Sp e stream Can be started stopped automatically through a rule a d d Item recording Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default otart Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules 7n 2 A dA When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server for retrieving events setting settings etc as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the R d de w recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible B 39 Item database being repa
116. server all elements in the list are optional The recording server is by default deselected but you can change this if needed Click Continue Choose the type of SQL server database you want see Select SQL type on page 34 If relevant also specify the name of the SQL server Click Continue Select either Create new database or Use existing database and name the database see Select SQL type on page 34 If you choose the latter select to Keep or Overwrite existing data Click Continue Select either This predefined account or This account to select the service account see Select service account on page 35 If needed enter a password and confirm this If you are installing a recording server and a recording server is also already installed on the same machine this dialog is shown twice Click Continue opecify recording server properties see Recording failover recording server install properties on page 34 Click Continue www milestonesys com 32 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 7 f you have more than one available IIS website you can select any of these However if any of your websites have HTTPS binding select one of these Click Continue 8 Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 31 step 4 5 Install failover recording server recording server IMPORTANT During the installation process you are asked to specify a user account un
117. server recording server or failover recording server requires a particular IP version all other servers in your system must communicate using the same IP version Example All of the servers in your system except one can use IPv4 as well as IPv6 The exception is a server which is only capable of using IPv6 This means that all servers must communicate with each other using IPv6 Devices You can use devices cameras inputs outputs microphones speakers with a different IP version than that being used for server communication provided your network equipment and the recording servers in question also support the devices IP version See also the illustration below Clients If your system uses IPv6 users should connect with the XProtect Smart Client The XProtect Smart Client supports IPv6 as well as IPv4 If one or more servers in your system can only use IPv6 XProtect Smart Client users must use IPv6 for their communication with those servers In this context it is important to remember that XProtect omart Clients technically connect to a management server for initial authentication and then to the required recording servers for access to recordings However the XProtect Smart Client users do not have to be on an IPv6 network themselves provided your network equipment supports communication between different IP versions and they have installed the IPv6 protocol on their computers See also illustration www milestonesys com
118. site in the hierarchy Both yes and no Embedded in your home site log in is an automated and seamless log in to its children as well using the same credentials as your home site log in However even though you technically log out of your home site when connecting to one of its children you still see the world as your former home site sees it www milestonesys com 315 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Detach a site from hierarchy Detaching Removing a site from its hierarchy involves two different results depending on where in the MFA you are located If you are within your hierarchy except your home site this will detach the selected site from the rest of the hierarchy You will no longer be able to see the detached site If on the other hand you are located at your home site your home site will be detached from the rest of the hierarchy including any sites located under your home site Your home site becomes the new top site Detach child from hierarchy Location Any site Prerequisites The site you are detaching is any site except your home site To detach child from a hierarchy 1 In the Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the site you want to detach except the home site select Detach Site from Hierarchy 2 Click Yes 3 The detached site is removed and the Federated Sites Hierarchy
119. sounds of the file type wav but only if these are encoded in Pulse Code Modulation PCM Although the default sounds are standard Windows sound files local Windows settings might cause these to sound different on different machines Some users might also have deleted one or more of these sound files and will therefore be unable to play them To ensure an identical sound all over you should import and use your own wav files encoded in PCM Lets you add sounds Browse to the sound to upload one or several wav files Remove a selected sound from the list of manually added sounds Default sounds cannot be removed Test the sound In the list select the sound The sound plays once XProtect Enterprise Manage XProtect Enterprise servers This section is only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate www milestonesys com 287 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 If your organization has XProtect Enterprise installations you can integrate XProtect Enterprise servers into your system You do this by adding the XProtect Enterprise servers through the Management Client Integration only works with XProtect Enterprise servers running XProtect Expert version 6 0 and up Integration is however not possible with XProtect Expert 2013 and future versions For the 2013 version of XProtect Expert use Milestone Federated Architecture see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302
120. system lets you use public addresses and port forwarding This will allow clients from outside the firewall to connect to recording servers without using VPN Virtual Private Network Each recording server and failover recording server can be mapped to a specific port and the port can be forwarded through the firewall to the server s internal address Enable public access To enable public access select the Network tab s Enable public access box Define public address and port When public access is enabled you can define the recording server s public address and public port number in the Public address and Public port fields respectively As public address use the address of the firewall or NAT router which clients accessing the surveillance system from the internet must go through in order to reach recording servers opecifying a public port number is compulsory it is always a good idea that port numbers used on the firewall or NAT router are different from the ones used locally When using public access the firewall or NAT router used must be configured so requests sent to the public address and port are forwarded to the local address and port of relevant recording servers Local IP ranges There are cases when the recording server s public address should not be used When clients connect from the local network the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers www milestonesys com 109 Management Client
121. te 49 Alternative upgrade for workgroup e eeeeeee eee ieeeee nnne e nenne nnn nhan nn nnn nns 49 INSTALLATION TROUBLESHOOTING icon co iuea tco uu suu em disau5 ca d cea uua dicen ut co deuu a tdas 50 Issue Recording server startup fails due to port conflict 50 Issue Manual installation of IIS if needed sss 51 Issue Changes to SQL server location prevents database access 52 Issue Insufficient continuous virtual memory fails installation 52 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Issue Multi domain environments one way trusts not working 52 REMOVE SYSTEM COMPONENTS 5 incuiae sone a one Sisa S EG cu Esa ORA aS RR E CR C UCR SCR SR EUR 53 Remove recording SO 0 i HE RR m 53 MANAGEMENT CLIEN Wl geacczceseeesccacesweceestocewtacescesevenotecteseestccveeennates 94 MANAGEMENT CLIENT OVERVIEW nennen nnn nnnnunnhm hann a eaae a auae a ansa naa nan 54 Management Client s elements 1 eeec eee i Leeeeeeeern n eene enne nennen ann nana nnn n nnn 54 Site Navigation pane and Federated Hierarchy pane 55 Monu DaF cece ae et ener ose se ne see T E RRUPPENS 56 Ir get c
122. the input is listed in the system and clients Does not have to be unique To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in Name the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well Description of the input Optional Will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the item s name in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Recephon Area op Apd Sector Back Door Input op ale ector Entrance Input Description Input by the back door bo red sector To specify a description type the description and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 Name of the hardware with which the input unit is connected The field is non editable from here but can be changed by clicking Go To next to it This takes you to hardware information where the name is editable Hardware name www milestonesys com 147 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Non editable field displaying the unit on which the input can be found on the hardware For hardware capable of having more than one input unit attached the unit number will typically indicate the number of the input po
123. the management server or any other recording server since these go through the management server e Recording servers will temporarily store log data locally They will automatically send log data to the management server when the it becomes available again o Clients will not be able to log in Client access is authorized through the management server Without the management server clients will not be able to log in o Already logged in clients can remain logged in for up to an hour When clients log in they are authorized by the management server and can communicate with recording servers for up to one hour If you can get the new management server up and running within an hour many of your users will not be affected o No ability to configure the system Without the management server you will not be able to change system configuration Even though some users might not experience loss of contact we recommend that you inform your users about the risk of losing contact with the surveillance system while the management server is down Copy log server database Handle the SurveillanceLogServer database using the same method as when handling system configuration described earlier in this topic The SurveillanceLogServer database name may be different if you renamed the system configuration database contains all your system logs including errors reported by recording servers and cameras The database is located where the Log Server Serv
124. the time interval specified on the Remote Retrieval tab it will be accepted but not started until the selected time interval is reached New remote recording retrieval jobs will queue and start when the allowed time interval is reached Pending remote recording retrieval jobs can be viewed from the System Dashboard s Current Tasks see About current task on page 272 Status icons overview The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 input see Manage input on page 145 and output see Manage output on page 150 events in item lists www milestonesys com 173 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Item enabled The device is enabled and we retrieve a y A Q Sp e stream Can be started stopped automatically through a rule a d 2j Item recording Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules 7n 2 A da When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server for retrieving events setting setti
125. the window that opens fill in the relevant information see Axis One Click Camera connection properties on page 77 3 If you chose to use credentials when you installed the Axis One Click Connection Component make sure to select the Use credentials check box and fill in exactly the same user name and password as used for the Axis One Click Connection Component 4 Click OK Remove STSs 1 To remove an ST server right click it select Remove Axis Secure Tunnel Server 2 Click Yes Register new Axis One click camera 1 Toregister a camera under an ST server right click it select Register Axis One click Camera 2 Inthe window that opens fill in the relevant information see Axis One Click Camera connection properties on page 77 3 Click OK 4 The camera will now appear under the relevant ST server The color coding of the camera is either www milestonesys com 76 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Red Yellow Green Administrator s Manual Initial state registered but not connected to the ST server Registered connected to the ST server but not added as hardware Added as hardware may or may not be connected to the ST server When added status will always be green The connection status see Read server service icons management recording and failover on page 350 is then as normal reflected by Devices on Recording Servers in the Overview pane see P
126. through the speaker in question Some users may not have a microphone attached some users may not have the rights required to talk through speakers etc only relevant for camera Users of the XProtect Smart Client can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera In the Management Client each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Shortcut field A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and cannot be longer than four digits Shortcut Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 1234 gt Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 12345 It is highly recommended that you use a unique camera shortcut number for each camera Tip Find more information about keyboard shortcuts from an XProtect Smart Client user s perspective in the separate XProtect omart Client documentation available on the software DVD as well as from http www milestonesys com downloads Tip Find more information about audio and keyboard shortcuts from an XProtect Smart Client user s perspective in the separate XProtect Smart Client documentation available on the software DVD as well as from http www milestonesys com downloads Fisheye tab camera properties Use of the fisheye technology requires a dedicated fisheye camera The Fisheye tab lets you co
127. use on a particular day of the week We therefore select Within the time period start time to end time and Day of week is day First Select conditions to apply within selected time in lime profile Outside selected lime in lime profile v Within the time period starte to endlime v Day of week is days www milestonesys com 204 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half of the wizard window Next Edit the rule descnption chck an underlined tem Perform an action in a time interval within the time period starttime to emdtime and day of week is days Tip If we had previously created a suitable time profile covering the required period of time we could have just selected the time condition within selected time in lt time profile gt then pointed to the time profile in question Read more about time profiles under Manage time profiles on page 235 5 Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content start time Clicking the start time link lets you specify required start time gt In this example we want the start time to be one o clock in the afternoon so we specify 1 00 and click OK Time of Day x Select ime 100 ok Cancel end time The end time link works just like the start time
128. used Generates a small message which logs events on selected devices The text of SNMP traps are auto generated and cannot be customized It will typically contain the source type and name of the device on which the event occurred To configure who receives SNMP trap messages refer to SNMP support see About SNMP support on page 356 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Retrieves and stores remote recordings from selected devices that support edge recording in a specified period before and after the triggering event Note that this rule is independent of the Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connection is restored setting see Remote recording camera remote system on page 168 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Retrieves and stores remote recordings in a specified period from selected devices that support edge recording Note that this rule is independent of the Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connection is restored setting see Remote recording camera remote system on page 168 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action althoug
129. will be completely shut down for the duration of the restore which might take some time e Abackup can only be restored on the system installation where it was created Furthermore make sure that the setup is as similar as possible to when the backup was made Otherwise the restore might fail e lf restoring fails during the validation phase it will be possible to start the old configuration again since no change have been committed If restoring fails elsewhere in the process rolling back to the old configuration is impossible As long as the backup file is not corrupted it will however be possible to do another restore www milestonesys com 323 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Restoring replaces the current configuration This means that any configurational changes since last backup is lost e No logs including audit logs see Manage logs on page 273 are restored e Once restoring has started it cannot be canceled Restoring 1 Right click the notification area s Management Server service icon and select Restore Configuration 2 Next you are presented with an important note Read the contents of the note Click Restore 3 Inthe file open dialog browse to the location of the configuration backup file select it and click Open 4 The Restore Configuration window will now run showing progress and status information Wait for it to
130. with PTZ priority lt priority gt irst Select acbons to perform Start recording on lt devices gt Start feed on lt devices gt Set live frame rate on devices Set recording frame rate on lt devices gt Start patrolling on device using profile with PTZ prionty lt priority gt Pause patrolling on lt devices gt Move device to preset position with PTZ priority priority Move to default preset on lt devices gt with PTZ pnonty lt prority gt Set device output to state w Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window gt In this example Based on our selections Pause patrolling on lt devices gt and Move lt device gt to lt preset gt position with PTZ priority lt priority gt the wizard automatically suggests an extension to the existing rule description axt Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor ause patrolling on devices and Move device to position preset immediately with PTZ priority priorit 6 Click the underlined items in the extension of the rule description in order to specify its exact content devices Clicking the devices link lets you select the devices on which patrolling should be paused Only PTZ cameras will be selectable www milestonesys com 215 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator
131. with the R A e do W recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible B 3g Item database being repaired T A ca vh Item requires attention Ls Pp q co v Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this cp a g example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is 9 recording since a recording item is also an enabled item www milestonesys com 154 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Define in and output related rules To be able to automatically e activate an output or trigger an event activated by an output you must after you have enabled an output e trigger an action activated by an input you must after you have enabled the input and created an event based on the input include it in a rule refer to Manage Output on page 150 or Manage Input on page 145 for more information For example you may create a rule specifying that e asiren should sound if motion is detected on a particular camera or you may create a rule specifying that a camera should start recording if a siren sounds output e acamera should record if a particular input is activated input For the following examples to be useful you should have general knowledge about managing rules see Manage rules on page 226 Also refer to Create Typical Rules see Create typical rules on
132. within your new storage area see Create an archive within an existing storage area on page 100 Create an archive within an existing storage area A storage area has no default archive when it is created 1 Tocreate an archive select the wanted storage area by clicking it in the Recording and archiving configuration list 2 Next click the button located below the Recording and archiving configuration list 3 This opens the Archive Settings dialog where you must specify the required settings see Storage and Recording settings on page 100 Click OK Storage and Recording settings In the Archive settings specify the following Name Rename the storage area if needed Names must be unique www milestonesys com 100 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Path Retention time Maximum size www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Type or use the browser link next to the field to specify the path to the directory in which to save the storage area The storage area does not necessarily have to be located on the recording server computer itself If the directory you plan to use does not already exist you can create it using the browser dialog Network drives must be specified using UNC Universal Naming Convention format example Wservervolume directory Select a number of units and select either Days or Hours to specify how long recordings should stay in the archive before bein
133. you have not used the Software Registration Service Center before click the New to the system link and follow the instructions for registering yourself as a user then log in to the Software Registration Service Center using your registered user name and password 3 Inthe Software Registration Service Center click the Add SLC link 4 Type your SLC When asked whether you want to add the SLC to your account click OK 5 Once your SLC has been added click the main menu link 6 Click the Logout link to log out of the Software Registration Service Center Tip If you have the possibility of online activation of licenses and plan to use it make sure you use the same user name e mail address and password for the activation as you did when registering the SLC Change Software License Code Often you run your installation on a trial Software License Code SLC during the first period When the trial period is over and it is time to change the trial SLC to the permanent SLC you can do this without any un or reinstall action IMPORTANT This must be done locally on the management server in question you cannot do this from the Management Client 1 Onthe management server go to the notification area of the taskbar a k a Systray fe m sp ge i Wo www milestonesys com 74 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 Right click the Management Server icon select Change License
134. 1 Camera 1 should start recording action immediately then stop recording stop action after 10 seconds However even though an event based rule is activated by an event on one device you can specify that actions should take place on one or more other devices Example 7 Rule Involving Several Devices When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 Camera 2 should start recording action immediately and the siren connected to Output 3 should sound action immediately then after 60 seconds Camera 2 should stop recording stop action and the siren connected to Output 3 should stop sounding stop action You can of course also combine events and scheduled times in a rule Example 4 Rule Combining Time Events and Devices When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 and the day of the week is Saturday or Sunday time condition Camera 1 and Camera 2 should start recording action immediately and a notification should be sent to the security manager action then 5 seconds after motion is no longer detected on Camera 1 or Camera 2 the 2 cameras should stop recording stop action The required complexity of rules will vary from organization to organization Some may require only a number of simple rules some may require a mix of simple and complex rules Create many simple or a few complex rules Depending on your organization s requirements it is often a good idea to create many simple rules rather than
135. 1 PTZ camera Otherwise the Speed slider is grayed out You can customize the transitions between each of the preset positions in a patrolling profile You are able to customize the following e The estimated transition time e The speed with which the camera will move during a transition e Which plug ins to disable during transition To customize transitions between preset positions in a patrolling profile do the following 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Select the Customize transitions check box v Customize transitions This will add transition indications to the list of preset positions for the selected patrolling profile 3 Inthe list select the required transition C Initial Transition et Canned Foods Section C Canned Foods Section gt Pie Dairy Products Section Obaman Frozen C Frozen Foods Secon gt 4 Specify the estimated transition time in number of seconds in the Expected time secs field Expected time secs if 5 Use the Speed slider to specify the required transition soeed When the slider is in its rightmost position the camera will move with its default soeed The more you move the slider to the left the slower the camera will move during the selected transition www milestonesys com 129 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tip A number indicating the exact speed is displayed near
136. 13 9 Log out of the management server connect to the parent management server and refer to Manage Milestone Federated Architecture on page 312 for details on how to proceed with MFA Alternative 2 Connect sites from different domains To make it possible to connect sites across domains it is very important that these domains are trusted by each other Setting up domains to trust each other has nothing to do with MFA but is entirely a matter of Microsoft Windows Domain configuration For further information on how to set up trusted domains see Microsoft website 1 When the domains on which the sites you want to connect to each other in an MFA are trusted correctly follow the same instructions as if only one domain was present see Alternative 1 Alternative 3 Connect sites in workgroup s When you connect sites inside workgroups it is an important prerequisite for MFA to work correctly that the same administrator account is present on all computers you want connected in the MFA This must be in place before installing the system 1 Login to Windows using a common administrator account 2 Start the management server installation see Installation overview on page 29 and click Custom 3 Select to install the Management Server service using a common administrator account 4 Finish the installation 5 Repeat steps 1 4 to install any other systems you want to connect They must all be installed using a commo
137. 2 a www milestonesys com 65 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Dragging a pane to the right outer layout element ever Aata Fa Cw ew c a wee Rowen 70 4 Riez Result The pane is docked to the right Move a pane to a docked inner position If you drag the pane to one of the inner layout elements the pane will be positioned along one side of one of the other panes 1 Drag the pane to one of the inner layout elements Tip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position Dragging a pane to the right inner layout element of the Overview pane lead w Lo gt one gt Canem Doo 13 A Low e Result The pane is docked to the right of the Overview pane Move a pane to a shared position www milestonesys com 66 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 You can move a pane into another pane s position so two or more panes share the same position 1 Drag the pane to the center layout element of the pane which position you want to share d E The center layout element Tip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position Tip To view the content of the panes click the tabs on the bottom of the shared position
138. 2013 In order to use PTZ cameras features including the ability to pan tilt and zoom operators must have a role which gives them the necessary rights Refer to About roles on page 255 for more information including step by step descriptions of how to assign users to roles and how to specify the rights of roles ire Poke U ame w 4233 hen Dem Lom e botes ae Jt Lared cock Sector Canned Foes Sm z Cars Pest war CO Dar odas Se Fersen First Some or CB Fio Ponds gt need Gonti Sm t pected tree nca t C Honto Goods l Pady Sector eet T 0000 O Pandey Sects Soit De lt gt Sot Dore ector QV Sok Debs Schon Prngre to drati b xr ft nd Pool bohont wviechonf on X gt C Comey ip Q 0 9 2c Pots Fy Proba Fondi Au Patrolling tab displaying a patrolling profile with customized transitions Add a patrolling profile 1 Click New This will open the Add Profile dialog 2 Inthe Add Profile dialog specify a name for the patrolling profile Tip Use a descriptive name the name may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about the item e g when using it in a rule 3 Click OK The new patrolling profile will be added to the Patrolling tab s Profile list You are now able to specify required preset positions and other settings for the patrolling profile Specify preset positions for use in a patrolling profile 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list
139. 2013 Occurs when an attempt is made to change settings on a device Settings Changed Error and the attempt is unsuccessful Predefined events external Activated when start recordings are requested via the MIP SDK Through the Milestone Integration Software Development Kit MIP Request Start Recording SDK a third party vendor can develop custom plug ins for example integration to external Access Control Systems or similar for your system Activated when stop recordings are requested via the MIP SDK Through the Milestone Integration Software Development Kit MIP Request Stop Recording SDK a third party vendor can develop custom plug ins for example integration to external Access Control Systems or similar for your system Generic events external Generic events allow you to trigger actions in the event server by sending simple strings via the IP network to the system The aim of generic events see Manage generic events on page 248 is to allow as many external sources as possible to interact with the system User defined events external A number of events custom made to suit your system may also be selectable Such user defined events can be used for e Making it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in the XProtect Smart Client e Countless other purposes For example you may create user defined events which will occur if a particular type of data is received from a devi
140. 22 PACTIVG DIECON t 22 CHENTS OVERVIEW e P 23 lens uper ttc a aaa a M 23 Install XProtect Smart CHEN ios cucurrerunt nive tue mau t tme valeriw utu ou nica Uu nu oui wdo crue a 25 Navigate the built in help system online cessere 27 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL eee 29 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ccsceccecucnececucnececueeececuenececusnececuenececueneceeueneceeueneseeueneses 29 Install your system preconditions eeeeeeeeee e eeeeeeeee ee nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 30 Install your system Single Server option ee eeeeeeee er eeeeee nn 31 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Install your system Distributed option cccccsssessseeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeseoeesseeeseoeesseesseoenes 32 Install your system Custom option 11 11 lleeeeeee e eer rieeee nennen nnn nana nnn annt 32 Install failover recording server recording server 33 Install other components such as Milestone Mobile server 33 More about Installifig ccce s caicieie iain coach a Eaa DEUS RUE ERU E AES 34 Install your system on virtual servers
141. 255 255 255 You must select at least one network range before you can continue Remember to select the Include check box for each required range Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator shows the detection process If you successfully detect hardware on a specified network range a Success message appears in the Status column If you fail to add a network range you can click the Failed error message to see why Once detection is complete click Next 5 Wait while device specific information is collected for each hardware device A status indicator shows the detection process If collecting hardware information for a device is unsuccessful click the Failed error message to see why the collection of information has failed Once collection is complete click Next 6 Choose to enable or disable successfully detected hardware and cameras Detected hardware such as hardware device camera microphone and speaker is listed individually This allows you to for example add a hardware device s camera without enabling its speaker if needed 7 Select a default group for all device types The devices are listed according to type for example camera microphone and speaker Click Finish Tip The list of drivers that appears when you scan for drives is typically very long and all drivers are selected by default With Select All and Clear All you can avoid having to select clear all check boxes manually Furthermore when hardware is
142. 57 s roles list select the Administrators role 3 Inthe Properties pane s role settings list check that the required user is listed 4 fno add the required user to the Administrators role by clicking Add Also refer to Work with users groups and roles on page 260 www milestonesys com 352 Services administration Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Manage ment Server service icon Recording Server service icon www milestonesys com Failover Recording Server service icon Recording Server service only Administrator s Manual Description Must be authorized by administrator Appears when the Recording Server service is loaded for the first time Administrators authorize the recording server through the Management Client In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand the Servers list select the Recording Server node then in the Overview pane right click the required recording server and select Authorize Recording Server 353 Services administration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Virus scanning Virus scanning information In some cases Milestone recommends that you avoid virus scanning if this is allowed in your organization If you use virus scanning software on e recording data in databases on recording servers e data being archived in archiving see About storage and archiving on page 88 locations It most uses a considerabl
143. 8 Click Finish This will add your new rule to the list of rules iy 53 5 Rules Default Start Feed Rule My Other Rule E Creating the Second Rule Patrolling During Nighttime Tip You do not have to create the second rule from scratch you can make a copy of the first rule then change it To copy a rule select the rule in the Rules list right click and select Copy Rule This will open Manage Rule which will display an editable copy of the rule 1 Copy the first rule then make the following changes to the rule o Change the rule name so it better describes the new rule for example to PTZ Camera Nighttime Patrolling www milestonesys com 212 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 On the time conditions selection step select that the rule should apply not within but outside the time profile v Within s ime j profile Outside se in lime profile lt staithme gt to endhme First Select conditions to apply Within selected time in time profe v Outside selected time in time profile _ Within the time period startlime to endlime Day of week is days In the rule description click the link in the sentence Start patrolling on and select a patrolling profile matching your nighttime requirements rather than your daytime requirements Select a Profile ES Setect a Profite X I
144. 8 24 PM Error Comunication Error Cantera 1B Device Comunication Error 1 4 2007 1 48 40 PN Error romunicat ion Error Camera 18 Device Communication Error n 4 2007 1 49 13 PM Error communication Error Casera 18 Device Communtcation error 11 4 2007 1 49 41 PM Error ommun icat ion Error amera 1B Device Communication Error 1 4 2007 1 49 52 PM Error Comsuntcatton Error camera 18 pevice communication error wi You are able to target the exported log content by specifying which log which log elements and which time range to include in the export For example you are able to specify that only the System Log s www milestonesys com 276 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 error related log messages from between January 2nd 2007 08 00 00 and January 4th 2007 07 59 59 should be included in your export To export a log do the following 1 Expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select the required log 2 If you want to target the exported log s content select the required criteria in the Search criteria section above the log For example you may select that your export should only contain log messages at a particular level such as errors or warnings Remember to click Refresh to make the log page reflect your selected criteria 3 In the Management Client s menu bar select Action gt Export Log This w
145. Advanced VMS 2013 Sender e mail address Outgoing mail SMTP server name Administrator s Manual Type the e mail address you want to appear as the sender of e mail notifications for all notification profiles Example sender organization org Type the name of the SMTP mail server which will be used for sending e mail notifications for all notification profiles Example mailserver organization org AVI compression settings When you set up AVI compression settings specify the following Compressor Compression quality Keyframe every Data rate www milestonesys com Select the required codec compression decompression technology Indeo 5 10 if available generally provides a good compromise between quality and file size You can configure some but not all codecs Not available for all codecs Use the slider to select the required degree of compression 0 100 to be performed by the codec 0 means no compression generally resulting in high image quality and large file size 100 means maximum compression generally resulting in low image quality and small file size If the slider is not available compression quality is determined entirely by the selected codec Not available for all codecs If you want to use keyframes select the check box and specify the required number of seconds between keyframes in the neighboring field A keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals The keyframe
146. CTi TCM TCD I O senes 10 100 64 33 Camera 34 Indicates the default storage that is the storage area in which database content is automatically stored unless you specifically Default define other storage areas for particular cameras Only one storage at the time can be default www milestonesys com 99 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Recording and archiving configuration list content 1 Database name 2 Maximum size of the database and usage also represented graphically by a proportional filling of the database 3 Database location 4 Archiving schedule for archiving to the next archive in the list Note that the number of retention days stated for an archive includes all retention stated earlier in the process Tip If you pause the mouse pointer over a database it shows detailed database information Add a storage area A storage area is always created with a predefined recording database named Recording which you cannot rename Apart from a recording database a storage area can contain a number of archives see Create an archive within an existing storage area on page 100 1 To add an extra storage area to a selected recording server click the l button located below the Storage configuration list 2 This opens the Storage and Recording Settings dialog Specify the relevant settings to continue 3 Click OK If needed you are now ready to create archive s
147. Copy a role If you have a role with complicated settings and or rights and need a similar or almost similar role it might be easier to copy the already existing role and make minor adjustments to the copy than to creating a new role from scratch 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security click Roles right click the required role in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select Copy Role 2 Inthe dialog that opens give the copied role a new unique name and description 3 Click OK Delete a role Before deleting a role see About roles on page 255 bear in mind that you are able to delete a role even when users and or groups have been assigned to the role It is therefore often a good idea to verify if any users groups are assigned to the role before deleting it Verify if any users groups are assigned to a role e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security and right click Roles e Select the required role in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select the Users and Groups tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Any users and or groups assigned to the role will be listed on the Users and Groups tab Delete a role 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Security and right click Roles www milestonesys com 259 Management Client Mi
148. Enable and configure output see Manage output on page 150 if any O 0O O O O Create rules see Manage rules on page 226 What is a rule Rules are a central element in your system The behavior of the system is to a very large extent determined by rules Rules determine highly important settings such as when cameras should record when PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras should patrol when notifications should be sent and so on Tip When creating rules you may also want to use time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 235 for quickly making rules apply within or outside predefined periods of time or notification profiles see Manage notification profiles on page 239 for quickly making rules send preconfigured e mails with video clips if required to selected recipients Add roles see Manage roles on page 257 What is a role Roles determine which system features users and groups are able to use In other words roles determine rights L Add users and or groups of users see Manage users and groups on page 255 Tip If you have a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller on your network the system lets you quickly add users and or groups from Active Directory L Activate licenses see About licenses on page 71 Why must licenses be activated When installing the system you used a single temporary license The temporary license is only valid for a certain number of
149. Entrance Cam Red Sector Cameras Retad Area PTZ Cameras Once you have placed your cameras in groups configuration can begin Configure individual cameras You configure individual cameras by selecting the required camera in the list then specifying the camera s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Info see Info tab overview The selected camera s name etc on page 156 Settings see Settings tab overview on page 160 The selected camera s general settings Streams see Streams tab camera properties on page The selected camera s video streams 135 Record see Record tab The selected camera s recording database and archiving storage overview on page 164 settings Presets see PTZ tab video The selected camera s preset positions only available if the encoders on page 171 selected camera is a PTZ camera Patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 The selected camera s patrolling profiles only available if the selected camera is a PTZ camera Events see Events tab overview on page 168 Events Client see Client tab camera properties on page 116 Information which will affect client s use of the selected camera www milestonesys com 114 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Privacy Mask see Privacy Mask tab camera properties Privacy masking for the
150. Federated Sites Hierarchy pane Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 305 Synchronization of Hierarchy Connect to another site in hierarchy You can connect to all sites in your MFA if your administrator settings are correct Prerequisites To connect from one site in your hierarchy to another one of the following two scenarios must be true e The management server is installed as a network service Both computers involved must be added as users to each other s XProtect system administrator role Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles e The management server is installed as a user account This user account must be a member of the administrator group of the server being linked to Refer to Administrator role and federated sites section see Administrators role and federated sites on page 305 Connect to another site in hierarchy Click the wanted site in the Federated Site Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 A brief dialog informs you that you are being connected to the new site When connection is complete your view in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane will change to reflect that you are connected to a different site In this example the user was logged into the home site Rome Server and next connects to the child Paris Server H j Rome Serer US Rome Serve W London Serve E London Serve W Paris Server gt Pars Sener Do I log out of my home site when I connect to another
151. GB ti te wot opm n t gtst Al Fiss ir hen Record tab example from camera Camera Lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected camera What does recording mean In IP video surveillance systems the term recording means saving video from a camera in the camera s database on the surveillance system In many IP video surveillance systems all of the video received from cameras is not necessarily saved Instead saving of video in a camera s database i e recording is started only when there is a reason to do so For www milestonesys com 164 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 example when motion is detected when an event occurs or when a specific period of time begins Recording is then stopped after a specified amount of time when motion is no longer detected when an event occurs when a time period ends or similar The term recording originates from the analog video era when video was taped only when the record button was pressed Microphone Lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected microphone Microphones recording and storage settings are completely independent of cameras and speakers Speaker Lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected speaker Playback remote system Playback settings are only visible if the selected hardware is part of a Milestone Interconnect remote system see About Milestone
152. GEMENT SERVER 326 Copy system configuration from old server step 1 327 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 What happens while the management server is unavailable 327 Copy log server database oss esee eR xe Cx URINE URN RUE TUUS IUEK REL UNE DUMURIN KAMR NR NNIKMS CERNI CERE uS 328 Install new management server on new server step 2 328 Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 328 DEVICE DRIVERS xdv ene rect ine aE isass ira sud rU DES 330 MANAGE VIDEO DEVICE DRIVERS esee e nennen n nnnm n ann n nhanh nsn uua ean naar ans 330 REMOVE VIDEO DEVICE DRIVERS 4 eere enne nnn nn nnn nean narra nennen 330 FAILOVER RECORDING SERVERS REGULAR HOT STANDBY331 ABOUT FAILOVER RECORDING SERVERS REGULAR AND HOT STANDBY 331 Illustration Failover process in details eese 332 FAQs failover recording servers regular hot standby 333 Install failover recording servers eeee e eeeeee eec reeeeee ener 334 Setup and enable failover recording servers
153. IMPORTANT The oldest data in a database is always auto archived or deleted if no next archive is defined when less than 5GB of space is free If less than 1GB space is free data is deleted A database always requires 250MB of free space If this limit is reached if data is not deleted fast enough no more data will be written to the database until enough space has been freed The actual maximum size of your database will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 5GB 101 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Click the Schedule icon next to the Schedule field to specify an archiving schedule that is the intervals with which the archiving Schedule process should start If required you can make archiving take place very frequently in principle every hour all year round or very infrequently for example every first Monday of every 36 months Select the Reduce frame rate check box and set a frame per second FPS in order to reduce FPS when archiving Reducing frame rates by a selected number of FPS s will make your recordings take up less space in the archive On the other hand it also reduces quality since a number of frames are erased leaving only FPS corresponding to the number of FPS selected in the dialog MPEG H 264 will be reduced to minimum key frames Reduce frame rate Tip The ideal interval to use between each archiving process depends entirely upon your organiz
154. IPv type selector see earlier this property might be disabled Allowed IPv6 addresses Select between allowed addresses Depending on you selection in the IPv type selector see earlier this property might be disabled Tip Ranges can be specified in each of the four positions like 100 105 110 120 As an example all addresses on the 10 10 network can be allowed by 10 10 0 254 0 254 or by 10 10 255 255 www milestonesys com 254 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Security About security In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 you can work with the following under Security e Roles see About roles on page 255 Roles determine which of your system s features users and groups see Manage users and groups on page 255 can use In other words roles determine rights and handles security within the application e Basic Users see About basic users on page 269 Basic users are much like Windows users but specific to a Milestone Federated Architecture MFA site see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 About roles Available functionality depends on your product version When you work with roles you must first create the role then add some users groups perhaps an XProtect Smart Client profile see About Smart Client profiles on page 184 and if relevant a time profile see Manage time profiles
155. Install failover recording servers For information about installing failover recording servers refer to Install failover recording server see Install failover recording server recording server on page 33 Setup and enable failover recording servers If you have disabled the failover recording server you must enable it before it can take over from standard recording servers Do the following to enable a failover recording server and edit its basic properties 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 select Servers Failover Servers This opens a list of installed failover recording servers and failover groups 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required failover recording server www milestonesys com 334 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Right click and select Enabled The failover recording server is now enabled E gs peur Groups B oue M a test53 stone dk2 Tip You can tell a failover recording server s status from its icon The server in the example above has a green tick mark indicating is either waiting or watching Furthermore by hovering over it a tooltip appears containing the text entered in the Description field of the failover recording server You may want to use this to indicate which recording server the failover recording server is configured to take over from
156. Interconnect on page 85 To enable viewing of playback directly from remote sites select Play back recordings from remote system see Enable playback directly from remote site camera on page 88 Selecting this option disables the rest of the Recording settings options on the Record tab see Record tab overview on page 164 Recording Recording is by default enabled To enable disable recording for the selected item select clear the Record tab s Recording check box Recording must be enabled for the item before you are able to record i e save video or audio from the camera A rule see Manage rules on page 226 specifying that an item should record under particular circumstances will not work if recording is disabled for the item in question Recording frame rate camera Specifying recording frame rate is only possible for MJPEG a video codec technology for compressing and decompressing data with which each frame is separately compressed into a JPEG image 1 Select or type the required recording frame rate in FPS Frames Per Second in the Recording frame rate MJPEG box 2 Clicking the Recording frame rate MJPEG box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of 1 FPS Tip If you click inside the Recording frame rate box two decimals will be added to the value By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of 1 unit This way y
157. Inthe toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the gray information box below the settings table Read the output list s status icons The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 input see Manage input on page 145 and output see Manage output on page 150 events in item lists Item enabled The device is enabled and we retrieve a a A Sp e stream Can be started stopped automatically through a rule a d d Item recording Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default otart Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules E A A da Q When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server for retrieving events setting settings etc as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate
158. It is possible to chose between analytics events system events and relevant plug in related events Based on your selection above the last drop down lets you select the specific event message to be used PULE i LS 1 mLUldLut d Iz a Archive Failure Enterprise Archive Move Fadure Entermnse Camera Not Responding Camera Responding Disabled Extemal Event Mabon Detected Mation daleded 5 storage area Running Out of Disk Space Server Not Responding Server Responding List of selectable triggering events the highlighted one is created and customized using analytics events o Sources Lets you select which cameras and or other devices including plug in defined sources VCA MIP etc the event should originate from in order to trigger the alarm Your options depend upon which type of event you have selected 3 Next for alarm activation choose between Time profile and Event based o Time profile If you select Time profile you must select when the alarm should be enabled for triggering If you have not defined time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 235 you will only be able to select Always If you have defined one or more time profiles they will be selectable from this list o Event based If you select Event based you must select which events should start and stop the alarm Events available for selection are hardware events defined on cameras video servers and input see Events overview on page 221
159. Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Vista Business 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework IMPORTANT When you format the hard disk of a recording failover recording server device you must change its Allocation unit size setting from 4 to 64 kilobytes This is to significantly improve recording performance of the hard disk You can read more about allocating unit sizes and find help at http support microsoft com kb 140365 en us Computer running Management Client CPU RAM Network Graphics Adapter Hard Disk Space www milestonesys com Intel Core2TM Duo minimum 2 0 GHz Minimum 1 GB Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 recommended 16 bit color Minimum 100 MB free 17 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Microsoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit
160. Milestone Systems XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 milestone The Open Platform Company Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Contents INTRODUCTIONS armenan E 12 PRODUCT OVERVIEW esa cons secs seteee recenedenedeussewecene danedens deus a E 12 A typical SVSICIN SelUD ioiii a aN 12 PTO UNE CS ai cect ete ca ean emcee tea D E 13 MANAGEIMGIIT SONY Cl e 13 PECONGINIG SOM RE EE D Lo TER 14 Management COTA qe E 14 Download Manager sic E ER 14 PRC COS SC CIN f n 14 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT 6 sai ccuctesec ees 15 Computer running management server eeeee e eseeeee nee e nennen anna nnn nnn nnns 15 Computer running recording server or failover recording server 16 Computer running Management Client e ecce eeeeeeeeeeer eee ee enne nnn nnn 17 Computer running event server e eieeeeeee iieeee enne n nenne enn n nanus nnmnnn nnmnnn 18 Computer running log server 111 leiieeeeeee cree eeee eene nn nene nnn nana nn sena anna assa nnn nnns 19 Computer running service channel eee ieeeeee ee eeeeee eren nennen enhn nnns 20 Computer running XProtect Smart Client 11 1 lceeeeeee cec cceeeeeeee ern
161. Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The slider for the Z axis allowing you to zoom in and out is located immediately above the preview image The camera will zoom in when you move the slider towards Tele and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide How to use the iris slider Iris settings are only available for some cameras Iris settings control the amount of light in images The higher the iris setting the lighter images will appear Click inside the slider to move the slider s red handle to the required position How to use the focus slider Focus settings are only available for some cameras Click inside the slider to move the slider s red handle to the required position Use preset positions from device type 2 As an alternative to specifying preset positions in the system preset positions may for some PTZ cameras also be defined on the camera device itself typically by accessing a device specific configuration web page Such device defined presets can subsequently be imported into the system by selecting Use presets from device If importing presets from the camera device any presets you have previously defined for the camera in will be removed this will affect any patrolling profiles in which these presets are used as well as any rules in which the affected patrolling profiles are used If you later wish to edit such device defined presets editing should take place on the came
162. One level at the time A parent knows about all its children children s children etc but only controls them one level down Furthermore a child only knows about and answers to its parent one level up Synchronization of hierarchy A parent always contains an updated list of all its currently attached children children s children etc But when distant communication is needed it takes place level by level each level forwarding and returning communication until it reaches the server requesting the information Depending on the number of levels that must be updated changes to a hierarchy might take a little time to become visible in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 refer to Refresh site hierarchy on page 317 The federated hierarchy has a regularly scheduled synchronization between sites as well as management triggered synchronization every time a site is added or removed This synchronization only contains site configuration data and each time will send less than 1MB In addition to the data sent during synchronization video or configuration data will be sent when a user or administrator views live or recorded video or configures the system The amount of data in this case depends on what and how much is being viewed It is not possible to schedule your own synchronizations Principles for setting up federated sites When working with MFA the link between management servers is established from the managemen
163. Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the wanted device 3 In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 click the Record tab In the upper part of the Storage area click Select 4 n the Select Storage dialog that follows select the wanted database 5 Click OK 6 In the Recordings Action dialog that follows select whether already existing but non archived recordings should be moved along to the new storage or deleted 7 After selecting click OK oee also Record tab overview on page 164 About upgrading Some information in this section may not be relevant due to differences in software versions If you are running XProtect Corporate and your system is upgraded to XProtect Corporate version 4 0 or future versions you might experience that you end up with a lot more storages than before upgrade This is due to the fact that from version 4 0 and forwards database structure is somewhat different than it used to be and during the update process the system creates a number of extra databases However since your original naming convention is respected you can reconstruct your former database structure with only little moving about of devices and deletion of obsolete storages or databases www milestonesys com 103 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Failover tab recording server properties Available functionality depends on your prod
164. QR Delete Device Group DELETE Rename Device Group F2 et Go To Hardware m Refresh FS Action menu items Depending on context www milestonesys com 61 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Refresh Expand or Collapse A number of context specific items Administrator s Manual Is always available and reloads the requested information from the management server description here Is available when working with Federated architecture Servers Devices Client Rules and Events and System Dashboard If relevant Be aware of the following when working with the Action menu concerning Milestone Federated Architecture see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 To be able to delete a site without being connected to it see Manage Milestone Federated Architecture on page 312 right clicking a site does not select it but offers a context menu Because of this some context menu items may be disabled if you are not connected to the site and some are only available on the home site i e the site you are logged in to Edit menu items Undo File menu items Save Logoff Exit Help menu items Help Contents Search About www milestonesys com Cancel your latest action Save your current configuration Log out of the Management Client and log in with another user account if necessary Close down and exit the Management Client Access
165. QUE PEE E FEEUNFEEE 355 SNMP M NNEENEEENNENEEEEEEENNNNMMMMNMAGNINMNMMWMWNWMWNNMWNWMWM 356 ABOUT SNMP SUPPORT e eren renun hu unn hus RR RR RRRRSRSERRRRERORSRRA 356 Install SNMP service eere nennen nnn nnn nnn nhe ennenen nnmnnn ennnen nnmnnn 356 Conidure SNMP SOR VCS aui Ed euaod cu eau cad iua Eai 356 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME eee eee 358 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME s enne nnn u nena nhu hm una RR SR SRRORSRRRRR RR REA RR RRrua 358 Spring Switch from standard time to DST eeeeeeeee ess 358 Fall Switch from DST to standard time eeeerer ee rennen nnne nnn 358 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 IPVO e 360 Tea VS cg ae nn raid ton Era Det prO 360 Important information if using the system with IPVG eseeeeeeeeeenrententn 360 How to write IPv6 addresses nennen nennen tnn nnn tnnt tn nsn tnn sno sna senno si 361 MULTI DOMAIN WITH ONE WAY TRUST 363 SETUP WITH ONE WAY TRUST 1 1 eieeeee ere isse nene nene nns annee nnn nha s nnne nana ane 363 APPENDIX m 365 PORTS USED BY THE SYSTEM uiii aiia eia ica did o8 diva dE nECIDMU UU CUN ME UN GNSA MK UUE 365 INDE X
166. RL s for this parent and indicates whether they are external or not e Version Version number of the site management server www milestonesys com 318 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Service account The service account under which the management server is running e Time for last synchronization Last synchronization date e Status for last synchronization Status of last synchronization It can be either Successful or Failed If failed further information is offered Due to synchronization issues any changes made to remote children might take some time to be reflected in the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 305 www milestonesys com 319 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Backup restore and move system configuration Scheduled backup and restore of system configuration Regularly backing up your system database is always recommended especially if you have a larger system setup Having a scheduled regular backup provides you with an always up to date backup In case of a disaster recovery scenario regular backups limit your loss of data to what was changed since last backup Furthermore it offers you the ability to quickly restore your system configuration However regularly backing up also has the added benefit that it flush
167. Recording Server service is already running with the correct configuration and only has to start its cameras to deliver feeds During the start up period it will not be possible to store recordings neither will it be possible to view live video from affected cameras What happens when a recording server becomes available again It will automatically take over from the failover or hot standby recording server and recordings stored by the failover or hot standby recording server will automatically be merged into the standard recording server s databases How long the merging process takes depends on the amount of recordings on network capacity etc During the merging process it will not be possible to browse recordings from the period during which the failover or hot standby recording server took over What if a failover recording server must take over from another recording server during the merging process In a regular failover recording server setup it will postpone the merging process with recording server A and take over from recording server B When recording server B becomes available again the regular failover recording server will take up the merging process with recording server A after which it will begin merging with recording server B In a hot standby setup a hot standby server cannot take over for another recording server because it can only be hot standby for a single recording server But if that recording server fails again t
168. Smart Wall related rights should be granted to a role see About roles on page 255 do the following 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Management Client overview on page 54 expand Security and right click Roles Then select the relevant role in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 2 In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 specify relevant rights on the Smart Wall tab Specify rights for the XProtect Smart Wall feature in general for individual XProtect Smart Walls for individual monitors under individual XProtect Smart Walls and for individual presets under individual XProtect Smart Walls Individual XProtect Smart Walls Determines whether users groups with the selected role can view Visible the selected XProtect Smart Wall Monitors under individual XProtect Smart Walls Determines whether users groups with the selected role can view Visible the selected monitor Determines whether users groups with the selected role can apply Apply layout layouts on the selected monitor Presets under individual XProtect Smart Walls Determines whether users groups with the selected role can view Visible the selected preset Determines whether users groups with the selected role can Activate activate the selected preset www milestonesys com 182 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Manage rules with XProtect Smart Wa
169. To edit failover recording server properties see Failover recording server properties on page 335 go to the Info tab Falower server information Harma Description Takes aver fom recording server 2 A Host nanma 1e5t55 stone dk UDF part E Database locaton D WMediaD atabase W Enable this falos serves Info tab of a failover recording server 5 When done go to the Network tab Here you can define the failover recording server s public IP address etc This is relevant especially if using NAT Network Address Translation and port forwarding Refer to the standard recording server s Network tab see Network tab recording server properties on page 109 for more information Failover recording server properties Name Name as it appears in the Management Client in logs etc Description Optional description for example which recording server it is taking over from or a description of the server s physical location Host name Non editable field displaying the network address of the failover recording server UDP port The port number used for communication between failover recording servers By default port 8844 is used Database location Specify the path to the database used by the failover recording server for storing recordings www milestonesys com 335 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The
170. VMS 2013 Index 3 360 Lens tab camera properties 136 A A typical system setup 12 About basic users 256 261 270 About clients 176 About clients and which one to choose 23 About configuration report 268 271 273 About current task 88 175 271 273 About Data Collector Server service 272 About device groups 115 138 140 144 146 152 162 About devices 96 114 About failover recording servers regular and hot standby 59 105 110 169 226 227 333 339 354 About hardware 73 82 114 141 157 About installer commands 36 43 About licenses 60 72 83 306 About maps 41 343 About Matrix recipients 176 188 198 228 269 About Milestone Interconnect 72 80 81 85 165 166 170 174 About multi streaming 137 About recording servers 95 About remote connect services 75 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual About roles 39 128 132 140 183 239 245 256 258 260 261 271 290 About rules 227 About rules and events 92 190 About security 256 About Smart Client profiles 176 185 236 256 About SNMP support 198 358 About storage and archiving 59 89 99 102 225 226 265 356 About system dashboard 271 About system monitor 271 About the service channel 113 293 349 About updates 13 About upgrading 104 About view groups 184 About XProtect Smart Wall 176 312 About XProtect Smart Wall contr
171. When doing so make sure to select the scenario in step 2 c Updating log server SQL address 1 If your management server and log server are located a together on the same machine go to the machine where your management server is installed b on different machines go to the machine where your management server is installed and copy the directory ProgramFiles Milestone XProtect Management Server Tools ChangeSqlAdaress with content to temporary directory on the event server o a go to the notification area of the taskbar a k a Systray Right click the Management Server icon select Update SQL address o b paste the directory you copied to a temporary place on the machine where the log server is installed and run the included file VideoOS Server ChangeSqlAdaress exe 3 The Update SQL Server Address dialog appears Select Log Server and click Next 4 See steps 4 5 and 6 above www milestonesys com 346 SQL database administration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Services administration About the service channel The service channel enables automatic and transparent configuration communication between servers and clients in your system For example it is the service channel that enables the fact that if a shared view is changed on one client the change is immediately reflected on other clients using the shared view in question The service channel also facilitates configuration rel
172. a few complex rules Even though this will lead to you having more rules it generally makes it much easier for you to maintain an overview of what your rules do www milestonesys com 228 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Keeping your rules simple also means that you have much more flexibility when it comes to deactivating activating individual rule elements with simple rules you can deactivate activate entire rules when required Default rules Your system comes with a number of default rules on page 218 ensuring that basic features work without any user intervention being required Add a rule When you create rules you are guided by the wizard Manage Rule which provides a highly intuitive approach It helps you stay focused by listing only relevant options It ensures that a rule will not contain missing elements And finally based on your rule s content it automatically suggests suitable stop actions i e what should take place when the rule no longer applies ensuring that you do not unintentionally create a never ending rule 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the Rules item and select Add Rule CTRL N Validate All Rules gu Refresh FS www milestonesys com 229 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 This will open the wizard Manage Rule Manageme SC Hire Hea Flu
173. ach external loudspeakers some devices even have built in speakers Devices speakers are automatically detected when you add the devices to your system through the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 78 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use Speakers do not require separate licenses you can use as many speakers as required on your system You can use speakers completely independently of cameras Who is able to talk through speakers Users of the XProtect Smart Client can provided speakers are available and the users have the rights to use them click a button to talk through speakers Roles determine users right to talk through speakers You cannot talk through speakers from the Management Client What happens if two users want to speak at the same time Roles determine users right to talk through speakers As part of the roles definition you are able to specify a speaker priority from very high to very low If two users want to speak at the same time the user whose role has the highest priority will win the ability to speak If two users with the same role want to speak at the same time the first come first served principle applies Tip Your system comes with a default rule which ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the system Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required You have two entry points
174. administrator settings require this If the management server is installed as a network service Computers involved must not be added as users to each other s XProtect system administrator role but should be added as another non administrator role Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles If the management server is installed as a user account This user account must not be a member of the administrator role of the server being linked to Otherwise inclusion will take place automatically Also refer to Administrator role and federated sites see Administrators role and federated sites on page 305 Prerequisites The potential child must have received a link request from the potential parent As a result the child has the awaiting acceptance Uf icon www milestonesys com 314 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Accept inclusion in hierarchy 1 In the Management Client window of the potential child in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the relevant site right click and click Accept Inclusion in Hierarchy 2 Click Yes 3 The new parent child link is established and the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane pane is updated with the normal site icon for the selected site Due to synchronization issues any changes made to children located far from your home site might take some time to be reflected in the
175. ages will concern live streams shown in green text If you want recording stream information instead shown in red text in the Management Client s menu select View Show Recording Streams Toggle the Preview pane on and off in the View menu To resize the Preview pane drag its borders The larger the Preview pane the larger preview images and state information will appear Performance can be affected if the Preview pane displays preview images from many cameras at a high frame rate To control the number of preview images and their frame rate in the Tools menu select Options gt General Basics Get started Here the tasks typically involved in setting up the system are listed Note that although information is presented as a checklist a completed checklist does not in itself guarantee that the system will match the exact requirements of your organization To make the system match the needs of your organization it is highly recommended that you monitor and adjust the system once it is running For example it is often a good idea to spend time on testing and adjusting the motion detection sensitivity settings of individual cameras under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather and so on once the system is running The setup of rules which determine most of the actions performed by the system including when to record video is another example of configuration which to a very large extent depends on your org
176. ailover group are busy This way you only risk not having a failover solution in the rare case when all failover recording servers in the primary as well as in the secondary failover group are busy 1 In the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 select Servers Recording Servers This opens a list of recording servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the wanted recording server go to the Failover tab 3 To choose failover setup type see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 select either None Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group or Hot standby server If relevant select the needed server or groups from the dropdowns You cannot select the same failover group as both primary and secondary failover group Also regular failover servers already part of a failover group cannot be selected as hot standby servers Tip From the Primary Secondary failover server group dropdowns select Add new to create new failover groups and add failover recording servers 4 Next click Advanced failover settings this opens the Advanced Failover Settings window listing all devices attached to the selected recording server Tip Even if you selected None Advanced failover settings will be available Any selections are kept for later failover setups 5 To specify the level of failover support select Full Support Live Only or Disabled f
177. al VMS 2013 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone Federated Architecture Overview This section is only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate Milestone Federated Architecture MFA allows multiple individual standard systems also known as sites to interconnect in a parent child hierarchy of sites MFA works with XProtect Corporate and XProtect Expert 2013 servers or newer Furthermore XProtect Expert 2013 servers can only be added to MFA as children not as parents For integrating XProtect Enterprise 6 0 and up into your system refer to Manage XProtect Enterprise servers on page 287 IMPORTANT Federated hierarchy is only possible with version 4 0 or newer of XProtect Corporate Before installing the system refer to Important prerequisites when running federated sites on page 303 In this text the term parent refers to a parent site and child to a child site Through MFA client users based on their user rights have seamless access to video audio and other resources across individual sites In addition through a single login administrators can centrally manage all sites within the federated hierarchy again based on administration rights for the individual sites As it provides unlimited scalability flexibility and accessibility to video surveillance across multiple sites and has no limit to the number of sites you can add MFA is well suited for large installations covering multiple buildings campuses o
178. al alarm priority Lets you select a priority High Medium or Low for the alarm Priorities can be used for sorting purposes and workflow control in the XProtect Smart Client Initial Alarm Category Lets you select an alarm category for the alarm This could be for example False alarm or Needs investigation Event triggered by alarm Lets you define an event to be triggered by the alarm in the XProtect Smart Client if needed Auto close alarm Lets you select if the alarm should automatically be closed upon a particular event This is possible for alarms triggered by some but not all events Tip If you want to disable the new alarm from the beginning clear the Enable check box in the upper right corner before saving 6 In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Edit an alarm Click an existing alarm to edit it Alarm Data Settings When you configure alarm data settings specify the following Alarm Data Levels tab Priorities table Level Name Sound Add new priorities with level numbers of your choosing or use edit the default priority levels numbers 1 2 or 3 These priority levels are used to configure the Initial alarm priority setting see Alarm definitions on page 282 Type a name for the entity You can create as many as you like Select the sound to be associated with the alarm Use one if the default sounds or add more in Sound Settings on page 287 States tabl
179. ame Name of the profile Description Description of the profile optional GPS coordinates indicating the physical location of the camera s GPS coordinates assigned to the profile c nHseofiset Number of minutes by which activation of the profile is offset by sunrise Sunset offset Number of minutes by which deactivation of the profile is offset by sunset Time zone Time zone indicating the physical location of the camera s Manage notification profiles With notification profiles you can set up ready made e mail notifications which can automatically be triggered by a rule see Manage rules on page 226 for example when a particular event occurs You can even include still images and AVI video clips in the email notifications Note that when using the SMTP Service with NET 4 0 it is not possible to send attachments over 3 MB However two hotfixes must be installed on the management server in the listed order from Microsoft can be found at http connect microsoft com VisualStudio Downloads DownloadDetails aspx DownloadlD 230226 http connect microsoft com VisualStudio Downloads DownloadDetails aspx DownloadID 31723 TLS Transport Layer Security and its predecessor SSL Secure Socket Layer is not supported if the sender belongs on a server that requires TLS or SSL e mail notifications will not work properly Also you may be required to disable any e mail scanners that could prevent the application sending
180. ample onh Click the underlined items in bold italics to specify their exact content For example clicking the days link in our example would let you select one or more days of the week on which the rule should apply 6 Having specified your exact conditions click Next to move to the next step of the wizard and select which actions should be covered by the rule Depending on the content and complexity of your rule further wizard steps may let you define further information such as stop events and stop actions For example if a rule specifies that a device should perform a particular action during a time interval for example Thursday between 08 00 and 10 30 the wizard may ask you to specify what should happen when that time interval ends 7 Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box Name My Third Rule Description M Active v Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 8 Click Finish To view step by step descriptions of how to create typically required rules refer to Create typical rules see Create typical rules online on page 198 Edit copy and rename a rule 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the required rule 2 Select either Edit Rule www milestonesys com 232 Management Client
181. ams tab camera properties on page 135 If you change a camera s settings you can quickly verify the effect of your change if you have the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 enabled Note however that you cannot use the Preview pane to judge the effect of frame rate changes as a special frame rate for the Preview pane s thumbnail images is used defined in the Options dialog see Options on page 293 Changing the settings for Max frames between keyframes and Max frames between keyframes mode may lower performance of a number of functionality in the XProtect Smart Client Microphone and speaker Lets you verify or edit settings for selected microphones and speakers or for all microphones or speakers within a selected device group Content of the Settings tab may vary depending on the types of microphones or speakers selected Hardware Lets you verify or edit settings for the hardware selected under a recording server The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the hardware in question and may vary depending on the type of hardware selected For some types of hardware the Settings tab may display no content at all or read only content Specify common settings for all items in a device group cameras microphones and speakers If using Device Groups see About device groups on page 139 you are able to quickly specify common settings for all devices within a given device group 1 Inthe list of
182. anagement Client if a license is activated too late About licenses When you purchase the system you also purchase a certain number of licenses for device channels Device channels are typically cameras but could also be dedicated input output boxes At first when you have installed the various system components configured the system and added recording servers and cameras through the Management Client the surveillance system runs on temporary licenses which need to be activated before a certain period ends This is the so called grace day period When the new surveillance system is working we recommend that you activate your licenses see Activate licenses online on page 69 before you make the final adjustments The reason is that you must activate your licenses before the grace day period expires since all recording servers and cameras for which no licenses have been activated will not be able to send data to the surveillance system if the grace day period is expired www milestonesys com 71 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Devices which require a license You need licenses for the number of device channels you want to run on the system Device channels are typically cameras but could also be dedicated input out boxes One device channel license enables you to run one camera or one dedicated input output box You can use and define an unlimited number of recording servers micro
183. andard for sending e mail messages between servers Default is port 25 You can change this if you need to SMTP server port Port number to be used when the recording server listens for FTP FTP server port information some devices use FTP for sending event messages Default is port 21 You can change this if you need to Read server service icons management recording and failover The following notification area icons represent the possible states of the Management Server service Recording Server and Failover Recording Server services They are all visible on the machines where the service is installed not in the Management Client see Management Client overview on page 54 Running La f bal Reg failover recording server it is enabled and started and able to take over from standard recording servers www milestonesys com 350 Services administration Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Recording Server e service only www milestonesys com B Management and Recording Server service only Recording Server service only Administrator s Manual Stopped Reg failover recording server it is stopped and no longer taking over from standard recording servers Starting Appears when a server service is in the process of starting Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Running Stopping Appears when a server service is in the process of stopping Under normal circu
184. andby Available functionality depends on your product version A failover recording server is a spare recording server which takes over from a normal recording server in case this becomes unavailable In the following the term failover recording server is used as an umbrella term for both regular failover recording servers and hot standby servers You can configure a failover recording server in two ways as a regular failover recording server or as a hot standby server see Assign failover recording servers on page 104 In a regular failover setup a failover recording server can be grouped with other failover recording servers ina failover group The entire failover group is dedicated to taking over from any of several preselected recording servers should one of these become unavailable A failover recording server in a hot standby setup is dedicated to take over from one recording server only Because of this they can be kept in a standby mode which means that they are already started with the correct current configuration of their recording server and are ready to take over more quickly than a regular failover recording server As mentioned hot standby servers are assigned to one recording server only and therefore cannot be grouped Likewise regular failover servers already part of a failover group cannot be selected as hot standby servers A failover group can contain one or more regular failover recording servers Grouping see Gro
185. anes overview on page 57 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 you may group your cameras for an easier Overview If you choose not to register your camera at the Axis dispatch service at this point you can do so later from the right click menu select Edit Axis One click Camera Unregister Axis One click Camera 1 Tounregister a camera under an ST server right click it select Unregister Axis One click Camera 2 n the dialog that appears make sure the check mark is selected and click Yes 3 he camera will disappear from under the relevant ST server Axis One Click Camera connection properties Camera password Camera user Description External address Internal address Name Owner authentication key Passwords for Dispatch Server www milestonesys com Enter Edit Provided with your camera at purchase For further details see your camera s manual or www axis com http www axis com See details for Camera password Enter Edit a description of the item Not compulsory Enter Edit the http address of the ST server where the camera s connect Tip Remember http in front of the address Enter Edit the http address of the ST server where the recording server connects Tip Remember http in front of the address If needed edit the name of the item See Camera password Enter password Must be identical to the one received from your system provider 77 Manageme
186. anization s needs www milestonesys com 58 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Install see Installation overview on page 29 the various components of your system Authorize use see Authorize a recording server on page 94 of your system s recording servers Why must I authorize recording servers In a surveillance system recording servers point to management servers not the other way round In theory recording servers which you do not want to include in your surveillance system could thus be configured to connect to your management servers By authorizing recording servers before they can be used surveillance system administrators have full control over which recording servers are able to send information to which management servers T Log in see Log in to the Management Client on page 61 to the Management Client E Detect the hardware devices see Add hardware on page 78 for example cameras and video encoders which should be added to each recording server What is the Add Hardware wizard Add Hardware helps you detect IP hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders on your network and add them to your system The wizard offers you two ways of detecting and adding hardware devices With automatic hardware detection the system automatically scans for available hardware within one or more specified IP address ranges With assisted hardware detection you manually s
187. ant note Read the contents of the note Click Backup In the file save dialog browse to the location where you want to store the configuration backup Specify a suitable file name and click Save Let the Backup Configuration window finish Click Close Your backup is finished Restore system configuration from manual back up Important information Both the user installing and the user doing the restore must be local administrator on the management server and on the SQL server Except for your recording servers your system will be completely shut down for the duration of the restore which might take some time A backup can only be restored on the system installation where it was created Furthermore make sure that the setup is as similar as possible to when the backup was made Otherwise the restore might fail If restoring fails during the validation phase it will be possible to start the old configuration again since no change have been committed If restoring fails elsewhere in the process rolling back to the old configuration is impossible As long as the backup file is not corrupted it will however be possible to do another restore Restoring replaces the current configuration This means that any configurational changes since last backup is lost No logs including audit logs see Manage logs on page 273 are restored Once restoring has started it cannot be canceled Restoring 1 Right click the notif
188. ardware on page 81 e Microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 www milestonesys com 156 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 Properties T Device ebomyxxn Norme Red Sect Reception Can Deccmhon Lanes mounted on wal cina reception desk Covers reception aea echuding doo to olose supple store Neaest telephone ext 4321 Hodese nane Aois 2410 Video Server 10 10 50 23 Goto Urd number Specify hardware and device info properties Name of the item Not compulsory but highly recommended Used whenever the item is listed in the system and clients Does not have to be unique To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in Name the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well Description of the item Optional Will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the item s name in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 cp c xeculve UCE NN py Receptio Description T N gt Stairs Camera covering reception area To specify a description type the description and click Save in the toolbar see Managemen
189. are archived when they have sifted down into the green area of the database cylinder or in other words when they are old enough to be archived The retention time and size setting for archives define how long the recordings remain in the archive recordings remain in the archive for the time specified or until the archive has reached the specified size limit When these settings are met the system begins to overwrite old recordings in the archive The archiving schedule defines how often and at what times archiving takes place Encryption and FPS determine the size of the data in the databases To have recordings archived all these parameters must be set up in accordance with each other This means that the retention period of a next coming archive must always be longer than the retention period of a current archive or recording database This is due to the fact that the number of retention days stated for an archive includes all retention stated earlier in the process Furthermore archiving must always take place more frequently than the retention period is set to otherwise you risk losing data If you have a retention time of 24 hours any data older than 24 hours will be deleted Therefore to get your data safely moved to the next archive it is important to run archiving more often than every 24 hours Example These storage areas image to the left have a retention time of 4 days and the following archive image to the right a retentio
190. are moving the management server from one physical server to another it is vital that you make sure that your new management server also gets access to this database The system configuration database can be stored in two different ways e Network SQL Server If you are storing your system configuration in a database on an existing SQL 2005 or 2008 Server on your network you can point to the database s location on that SQL Server when installing the management server software on your new management server In that case only the following paragraph about management server hostname and IP address applies and you should ignore the rest of this topic Management server hostname and IP address When you move the management server from one physical server to another physical server it is by far the easiest to give the new server the same hostname and IP address as the old one This is due to the fact that the recording server will connect to the hostname and IP address of the old management server In case the new management server has been given a new hostname and or IP address the recording server will not be able to find the management server Manually stop each recording server in your system change their management server URL and when done restart them e SQL Server Express Edition If you are storing your system configuration in a SQL Server Express Edition database on the management server itself it is important that you back up the existing
191. art Client or other relevant clients Hemember to repeat for each required device device group You can also select a device group and specify role rights for the entire device group in one go Camera related rights Available functionality depends on your product version Setting determines whether o AUX Commands it will be possible to use auxiliary commands from the XProtect Smart Client What are AUX Commands AUX is short for Auxiliary Such commands offer the user control of for example wipers on a camera connected via a video server Camera associated devices connected via auxiliary connections are controlled from the XProtect omart Client o Add it will be possible to add bookmarks in recorded video from the XProtect Smart Client o Delete it will be possible to delete bookmarks in recorded video from the XProtect Smart Client o Edit it will be possible to edit bookmarks in recorded video from the XProtect Smart Client o View it will be possible to view bookmarks in recorded video from the XProtect Smart Client o View live within time profile live viewing of video from the selected camera s will be possible in access clients o Export video the database export feature can be used when browsing recorded video from selected camera s in the XProtect Smart Client Furthermore the AVI JPEG and export features can be used in similar way in all access clients o Get sequences the Sequen
192. ase you move the network cable from the old camera to the new one without changing any settings in the Management Client and then activate the license If replacing a camera see Replace hardware device on page 82 with a different model you must use the Management Client s Replace Hardware wizard to map all relevant databases of cameras microphones inputs outputs and so on When done remember to activate the license There is no limit to the number of cameras you can replace www milestonesys com 73 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Licenses and Milestone Federated Architecture Refer to Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 Manage Software License Codes When you purchase your system you receive a Software License Code SLC which is used when installing your system Registering Your Software License Code SLC The Software License Code SLC is printed on the product license sheet enclosed with the software DVD as well as on your order confirmation You should also register your SLC before activating your system s licenses see Activate licenses online on page 69 The SLC registration process is brief and easy 1 Goto the Milestone Systems A S website at www milestonesys com and click the Software registration link in the menu 2 Log in to the Software Registration Service Center with your user name e mail address and password Tip If
193. at share the same port number and password 2 In the Management Client add the Smart Client in question as a Matrix recipient 3 You may include the Matrix recipient in a rule see Define rules sending video to Matrix recipients on page 188 Rules and events About rules and events In your system events are central elements when using the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 226 In the wizard events are primarily used for triggering actions Example You create a rule which specifies that in the event of detected motion the surveillance system should take the action of starting recording of video from a particular camera In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 you can work with the following under Rules and Events e Rules see Manage rules on page 226 Rules are a central element in the system The behavior of your surveillance system is to a very large extent determined by rules When creating a rule you can work with all types of events e Time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 235 Time profiles are periods of time defined in the Management Client They can be used when creating rules in the Management Client for example to create a rule which specifies that a certain action should take place within a certain time profile e Notification profiles see Manage notification profiles on page 239 Notification profiles can be used for setting up ready
194. ate you added the camera Therefore the end date of the grace period displayed on the License information page is for the first added but not activated camera Get additional licenses What if you want to add or if you already have added more device channels cameras or dedicated input output boxes than you currently have licenses for In that case you must buy additional licenses before the cameras will be able to send data to your system To get additional licenses for your system contact your XProtect product vendor In the short period until you get the additional licenses you can disable some less important cameras see About hardware on page 81 to allow some of the new cameras to run instead When you have received an updated license file ic with the new licenses you must activate your licenses see Activate licenses online on page 69 Licenses and camera replacement You can replace a camera licensed in your system with a new camera and have the new camera activated and licensed instead The total number of purchased device channels corresponds to the total number of cameras that are able to run on the surveillance system simultaneously If you remove a camera from a recording server you also free a license If you replace a camera with a similar camera manufacturer brand and model and give the new camera the same IP address as the old one you will maintain full access to all the camera s databases In this c
195. ated actions on a recording server placed in New York will be carried out when the local time is 08 30 to 09 30 in New York while the same actions on a recording server placed in Los Angeles will be carried out some hours later when the local time is 08 30 to 09 30 in Los Angeles You create and manage time profiles in the Management Client by expanding the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 s Rules and Events folder then selecting Time Profiles A Time Profiles list will appear in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Time Profiles 1955 fime profiles Weekdays Closed Weekdays Working Hours 4 Weekends www milestonesys com 235 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Specify a time profile 1 Inthe Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add Time Profile This will open the Time Profile window gt men vro ttem A MA 8 9 10 1 12 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 wu Time and date format may be different on your system 2 Inthe Time Profile window type a name for the new time profile in the Name field Optionally type a description of the new time profile in the Description field 3 In the Time Profile window s calendar select either Day View Week View or Month View then right click inside the calendar and select either Add Single Time or Add Recurrence Ti
196. ated communication between servers and clients in cases where you use various plug ins or add on products with your system The service channel is typically installed as part of the management server installation see Installation overview on page 29 It typically resides on the management server computer but if required you may just as well install it on another server in your surveillance system Once installed the service channel can register itself automatically with your system meaning that it automatically becomes listed by the registered services see Manage registered services on page 291 feature in the Management Client Its location is known by the system and clients logging into the system can automatically benefit from it If you later change the IP address or hostname of the server running the service channel service you must manually edit the information under Tool Registered Services in the Management Client Also if you later need to change the user under which the service channel service was installed you must remove the Service Channel service and afterwards install it again under the new user It is important that XProtect Smart Clients are time synchronized with the computer running the service Channel service see Servers and clients require time synchronization on page 111 If an XProtect Smart Client is not time synchronized with the management server and the computer running the Service Channel service t
197. ation s needs Consider your system s recording settings make an estimate of the amount of data you expect to record within for example a day a week or a month then decide on a suitable interval Bear in mind that your organization s needs may change over time It is a good idea to regularly monitor your archiving settings and adjust them if required Tip The effect of your selections is summed up in the lower part of the dialog Use the summary to verify that your selections reflect your intentions Tip If required you can always adjust the archive s settings including its scheduling once the archive has been created Tip It is possible to reduce frame rates to less than 1 FPS for example as low as 0 1 FPS which means 1 frame every 10 seconds Delete an archive from within an existing storage 1 To delete an archive select the wanted archive from the Recording and archiving configuration list by clicking it A selected archive is marked by a dark frame lt is only possible to delete the last archive in the list The archive does not have to empty 2 Click the E button located below the Recording and archiving configuration list 3 Click Yes Delete an entire storage area The storage area you want to delete must not be set as default storage area Furthermore it cannot be used by any devices to hold recordings This means that you must possibly move devices and their not yet archived recordings to another storage area se
198. atrolling profiles must be defined To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Select the required PTZ camera from the list and select the Presets tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 For details of how to define preset positions on the Presets tab refer to Preset Positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 www milestonesys com 208 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Once you have defined the required preset positions patrolling profiles for the PTZ camera are defined on the neighboring Patrolling tab For details of how to define patrolling profiles on the Patrolling tab refer to Patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 Creating the First Rule Patrolling During Daytime 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane expand Rules and Events gt Rules gt Add New Rule 2 Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field In this example the rule will cover a specific camera and how it should patrol during daytime We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name Name PTZ Camera Daytime Patrolir Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rul
199. avigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand System Dashboard and click System Monitor This brings up the System Monitor using embedded browser technology www milestonesys com 270 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 If you access the system monitor from a server operating system you might experience a message regarding Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration Follow instructions in the message in order to add the System Monitor page to the Trusted sites zone before proceeding A Data Collector Server service is dedicated to collect performance counter values on servers and cameras to be be used in the System Monitor functionality About Data Collector Server service The Data Collector Server service is automatically installed on the same machines as the management recording log and event server s Normally the Data Collector Server service requires no maintenance However if the service does Stops it will result in missing live feed to the System Monitor clearly indicated in the system monitor by error texts On the machine where the Data Collector Server service is installed do the following to restart it 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and then o If using Category view find the System and Security category and click Administrative Tools o If using Small icons or Large icons click Administrative Tools 2 Double click Services
200. be added using the Address range scanning on page 79 or Manual on page 80 options in the Add Hardware wizard When adding the remote site you must specify an account on the remote site This account can be either a basic user local Windows user or domain user It is possible to reuse an existing user or create a new one for usage with Milestone Interconnect However a new user must be created on the remote system before creating the Milestone Interconnect setup Depending on the user rights for the selected user on the remote site the central site will get access to all cameras and functions or a sub set of them Three possible Milestone Interconnect setups There are many possible ways to run Milestone Interconnect In the following the three most likely scenarios are described How to run your setup depends on your network connection whether you request playback and whether you retrieve remote recordings and to what degree What is remote recording Remote recording also known as edge recording is both a physical camera supporting edge storage and a remote recording system in a Milestone Interconnect setup To minimize loss if a network breaks down some physical cameras are able to store recordings on their own local storage Either on request or automatically depending on settings recordings can be retrieved from remote storages to the surveillance system when the network is re established To save bandwidth it is possible to set u
201. because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting Values may be changeable or read only When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table 121 D General Baghtress 50 Colonevel 50 Compression 50 RPesoluion 129091024 Riotahon 0 3 JPEG streamed Fiennes pes second 30 Settings tab example from camera Red arrow indicates allowed range in this example the value used to specify compression must be a number between 0 and 100 Content of Settings tab varies depending on selected device type and selected device Tip Some organizations may be required to establish a secure HTTPS connection using SSL Secure Sockets Layer between a hardware device and the Matrix and or XProtect Smart Client To establish such a connection you must upload a certificate to the hardware device to enable HTTPS support on the hardware device Certificates are generated differently by camera vendors Consult your camera vendor to find out how to get a certificate for your hardware device 1 In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right
202. being detected select the Show hardware running on other recording servers check box to see if detected hardware is running on other recording servers Note also that you can only specify IPv4 addresses when using Address Range Scanning Manual The Manual option lets you specify details about each hardware device and Milestone Interconnect remote systems see About Milestone Interconnect on page 85 separately This can be a good choice if you only want to add a few hardware devices and you know their IP addresses required user names and passwords and so on 1 Select Manual and click Next 2 Specify user names and passwords if your hardware devices are not using the factory default user name and password You can add as many user names and passwords as required by www milestonesys com 80 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 clicking Add Remember to select the Include check box for each required device You must choose to add and include at least one user name and password in order for the wizard to proceed When ready click Next 3 Now select which drivers to use when scanning By default the system will use all known drivers If your organization only uses certain hardware devices and or models you can achieve faster scanning by selecting only the drivers required for those hardware devices When ready click Next 4 Specify information for the hardware you want to add You ca
203. bile server Once you have installed the Milestone Mobile server you can use Milestone Mobile a smartphone and tablet compatible client and XProtect Web Client with your system To reduce the overall use of system resources on the computer running the management server install the Milestone Mobile server on a separate computer For more information about how to do this refer to Milestone Mobile Administrator s Manual http clouddownload milestonesys com XProtect9620Mobile262020a Manuals MilestoneXProtectMobil e Administrators Manual en US pdf More about installing Recording failover recording server install properties Fill out the following properties when you install a standard recording server see Install your system Custom option on page 32 or a failover recording server see Install failover recording server recording server on page 33 Recording server A name for the server in question If required you can later change the name name The IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the management server to which the server should be connected If required you can later change the management server IP address host name as part of the basic administration on the Recording server service Failover Server service Management server address The path to the media database The media database is the recording server failover recording server s Media database default storage area that i
204. ble for selection are hardware events defined on cameras video servers and input see Events overview on page 221 Also global manual event definitions see Manage user defined events on page 243 can be used Note that when selecting Event based it is not possible to define alarms based on outputs only on inputs 4 Choose the time limit for when operator action is required and what event to trigger when the time limit is reached O Time limit Select a time limit for when operator action is required Default is 1 minute The time limit is not active before an event is attached Events triggered Lets you select which event to trigger when the time limit has been reached 5 Choose additional settings O O Related cameras Lets you select a maximum of 15 cameras for inclusion in the alarm definition even though they are not themselves triggering the alarm This can be relevant for example if you have selected an external event message such as a door being opened as the source of your alarm By defining one or more cameras near the door you could attach the cameras recordings of the incident to the alarm Related map Lets you assign a map to the alarm when it is listed in the XProtect Smart Client s Alarm Manager Initial alarm owner Lets you select a default user responsible for the alarm www milestonesys com 285 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Initi
205. box for each required device When ready click Next 3 Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator will show the detection process Once detection is complete click Next 4 Wait while device specific information is collected for each hardware device A status indicator shows the detection process If collecting hardware information for a device is unsuccessful click the Failed error message to see why Once collection is complete click Next 5 Choose to enable or disable successfully detected hardware and cameras Detected hardware such as hardware device camera microphone and speaker is listed individually allowing you to for example add a hardware device s camera without enabling its speaker if needed 6 Select a default group for all device types or group the devices individually The devices are listed according to type for example camera microphone speaker Click Finish Tip Select the Show hardware running on other recording servers check box to see if detected hardware is running on other recording servers Address Range Scanning The Address Range Scanning option scans your network for relevant hardware devices and Milestone Interconnect remote systems see About Milestone Interconnect on page 85 based on your specifications regarding required IP ranges drivers and device user names and passwords 1 Select Address Range Scanning and click Next 2 Specify user names and passwords if your hardwa
206. camera between a number of preset positions When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify the devices on which patrolling should be paused This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one patrolling profile has been defined for the device s You define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions 193 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Move lt device gt to lt preset gt position with PTZ priority lt priority gt Move to default preset on lt devices gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt Set device output to lt state gt www milestonesys com In one of the following steps the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Resume patrolling Without this stop action patrolling would potentially pause indefinitely You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Moves a particular camera to a particular preset position however always according to priority When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select a preset position Only one preset position on one camera can be selected it is not possib
207. ccur This setting lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected PTZ camera s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from 1 to 32 000 where 1 is the lowest priority Default PTZ priority is 3000 Example You specify that the role Security Manager should have very high priority when using a PTZ camera whereas the role Security Assistant should have low priority when using the PTZ camera Now if a user with the role Security Manager and a user with the role Security Assistant want to control the PTZ camera at the same time the user with the role Security Manager will win the ability to control the camera If your system is upgraded from an older version of the system the old values Very Low Low Medium High and Very High have been translated as follows o Very Low 1000 o Low 2000 o Medium 3000 o High 4000 o Very High 5000 Users of the XProtect Smart Client are able to stop resume a patrolling PTZ camera s patrolling through a context menu in the XProtect Smart Client view This PTZ feature is not regulated by PTZ priority e Allow activation of PTZ presets Determines if the selected role is able to move the selected PTZ camera s to preset positions o False Users groups with the selected role will not be able to move the selected PTZ camera s to preset positions o True Users groups with the selected role will be able to move the selected PTZ camera s to p
208. ce For information about how to define user defined events in the Management Client refer to Manage user defined events on page 243 Recording servers Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on Archive Available page 88 for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable see Archive Unavailable next www milestonesys com 224 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Archive Unavailable Archive Not Finished Database Disk Full Database Full Auto Archive Database Repair Database Storage Area Available Database Storage Area Unavailable Failover Started www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on page 88 for a recording server becomes unavailable for example if the connection to an archive located on a network drive is lost When this is the case it will not be possible to archive recordings You can use the event to for example trigger a notification profile so an e mail notification is automatically sent to relevant people in your organization Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on page 88 for a recording server is not finished with the last archiving round when the next is scheduled to start Occurs when a database disk is full A database disk is considered to be full when there is less than 5GB of space is left on the disk The oldest data in a databas
209. ced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Map About maps Some information in this section may not be relevant due to differences in software versions IMPORTANT This feature will not work if you do not have the XProtect event server installed Except from installing the Event Server service which is a prerequisite for viewing and operating maps in the XProtect Smart Client all user interaction with maps including adding and maintenance takes place in the XProtect Smart Client With maps you get a physical overview of your surveillance system Which cameras are placed where and in what direction are they pointing Maps can be used for navigation from large perspectives to small perspectives and vice versa and a state map can have hot zones pointing to more detailed maps of cities neighborhoods streets floor plans etc For detailed information see the XProtect Smart Client documentation Can access maps from the old XProtect map server If you run XProtect Corporate maps located on your old XProtect map server is automatically accessible from your new event server where maps are located from XProtect Corporate version 4 0 and forward As indicated the Event Server service must be installed on your system to handle maps in XProtect Smart Client The event server is installed as part of the management server installation when the management server is installed with the Typical option The service does not necessarily have to b
210. ces feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in access clients o Playback Video playing back of recorded video from the selected camera s will be possible in access clients o Smart Search the Smart Search feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in the XProtect Smart Client o Visible the selected camera s will be visible in access clients www milestonesys com 263 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The View live right also requires that the role has been granted the right to view the access clients Live tab This right is granted as part of the application rights The Export Video and Playback Video rights also require that the role has been granted the right to view the access clients Browse tab This right is granted as part of the application rights Microphone related rights Available functionality depends on your product version Setting determines whether o Visible the selected microphone s will be visible in the XProtect Smart Client o Listen to live audio listening to live audio from the selected microphone s will be possible in the XProtect Smart Client o Browse audio browsing of recorded audio from the selected microphone s will be possible in the XProtect Smart Client o Export audio the export feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selec
211. ch components users can download and install you cannot use it as a users rights management tool Such rights are determined by roles see About roles on page 255 defined in the Management Client You access the Download Manager on the server running the management server software From Windows Start menu select All Programs Milestone XProtect Download Manager Download Manager s default configuration As indicated the Download Manager has a default configuration This ensures that your organization s users can access standard components right from the start www milestonesys com 39 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Administrator s Manual The default configuration provides administrators a default setup with access to downloading extra or optional components Even though the web page in most cases opens automatically on the management server computer you will often want to install key components on other servers than the management server itself This is no problem since the web page can easily be accessed from other computers The Download Manager s configuration is represented in a tree structure Downlead Manager Select each manam uem cam omo fom Pee eam s m wi Dent e tuae ve Owe Tioira v Coec o Osh o FDh iFern amp I Geman lar laparet K ocean 7 o 9 Poke v Pacman e Sepibet Oe Ie Spares v Sendo V Ame e E
212. ch should not be regarded as motion Pixels in which motion is detected are highlighted in green in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted Highlighted motion in the preview image Tip Your exact sensitivity slider setting is indicated by a number from 0 300 in the right side of the slider This way you are able to compare the exact sensitivity slider setting between cameras Tip If you find the concept of motion detection sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the highest possible sensitivity 0 position The more you drag the slider towards the highest possible sensitivity position the more of the preview image becomes highlighted in green This is because with a very high sensitivity level even the slightest change in each pixel will be regarded as motion Motion slider Determines how many pixels in the camera s images image must change before it is regarded as motion The selected motion level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion indication bar above the sliders The black vertical line in the motion indication serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection Motion indication bar deflection changes color from green to red when above the threshold indicating a positive motion detection Tip Your exa
213. chnical installation at the remote site www milestonesys com 85 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 More about Milestone Interconnect Each remote site runs independently and may perform any normal surveillance tasks Depending on network connections and appropriate user rights Milestone Interconnect offers direct live viewing of remote site cameras and play back of remote site recordings from the central site It also offers transfer of remote site recordings to the central site based on either events see Events overview on page 221 rules schedules see Manage rules on page 226 or manual requests by XProtect Smart Client users It also allows central site users to employ events originally triggered on remote sites see Events tab overview on page 168 on the central site Which XProtect product can act as central site and which can act as remote sites depends on the specific setup Furthermore it differs from setup to setup which versions how many cameras and how devices and events originating from the remote site are handled if at all by the central site For further details on how specific XProtect products interact in a Milestone Interconnect setup go to Milestone Interconnect website Remote sites are added to the central site in the same way as multi channel video encoders by use of the Add Hardware wizard see Add hardware on page 78 However remote sites can only
214. cify a file name and a location for the license request rq file 3 Open an internet browser and go to Milestone s www milestonesys com from the top menu find Register your software Log in with your e mail and password if you have used the software registration system before otherwise click New to the System to create a new user account 4 Select the SLC under Current SLCs 5 Inthe menu for SLC properties use the Upload LRQ function to upload the generated LRQ file How long does this process take Immediately after uploading the LRQ file you receive an e mail with the updated license file 6 When you have received the updated license file ic save it at a location accessible from the Management Client 7 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Basics right click License Information select Activate License Offline gt Import Activated License and select the ic file to import it 8 Click Finish to end the activation process Activate licenses after grace day period If the grace day period is exceeded before activation all cameras which are not activated within the given period will become unavailable and will not be able to send data to the surveillance system If you exceed the grace day period before you activate a license the license is not lost You can activate the license as usual Configuration added cameras defined recording servers and other settings will not be removed from the M
215. ck an underlined item erform an action in a time interval ithin the time period 1 00 to 3 00 and day of week is Saturday tart patrolling on Retail Area PTZ using Retail Area Saturday Afternoon with PTZ priority 500 srform an action when time interval ends too patrollina immediateh This is just what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g 60 seconds Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window N Retail Area P De Active v www milestonesys com 207 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 9 Click Finish This will add your new rule to the list of rules Rules ic i Rules 1 My First Rule My Second Rule Retail Area PTZ Saturday Afternoon Use different PTZ patrolling profiles for day night rule In this example daytime is defined by a time profile covering the period between 08 00 and 20 00 on all days of the week and nights are defined as periods not covered by the daytime time profile This requires two near identical rules one for each patrolling profile When you have created the first rule you can make a co
216. click Add Remove Windows Components This opens the Windows Components wizard 3 In the wizard select the check box next to Management and Monitoring Tools then click Details to open the Management and Monitoring Tools dialog 4 In the Management and Monitoring Tools dialog select the check box next to Simple Network Management Protocol then click OK 5 Backin the Windows Components wizard click Next and follow the wizard s further steps Configure SNMP service 1 Onthe required recording servers select Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services Double click the SNMP Service Select the Traps tab Specify a community name and click Add to list Select the Destinations tab 9 db cue Bes dw Click Add and specify the IP address or host name of the server running your third party SNMP management station software www milestonesys com 356 SNMP Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 7 Click OK www milestonesys com 357 SNMP Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Daylight saving time Daylight saving time Daylight saving time DST also known as summer time is the practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more daylight and mornings to have less Typically clocks are adjusted forward one hour sometime during the spring season and adjusted backward sometime during the fall season therefore the saying spring forwar
217. com 52 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Remove system components The following procedure describes standard system component removal in recent Windows versions the procedure may be slightly different in older Windows versions 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and then o If using Category view find the Programs category and click Uninstall a program o If using Small icons or Large icons view select Programs and Features 2 Inthe list of currently installed programs right click the required Milestone program or service 3 Select Uninstall if you wish to uninstall all components Select Change if you only wish to uninstall some components 4 Follow the removal instructions Remove recording server To remove a recording server installed on another machine than the management server use the following procedure on the computer on which the recording server is installed 1 Stop the Recording Server service by right clicking the recording server icon in the computer s notification area also known as the system tray then select Stop Recording Server service EN o Er 10 33 AM SS n 2 To remove follow the general removal procedure see Remove system components on page 53 3 Right click the Recording Server in step 2 of the general removal process What happens to the recording server s recordings During the removal process you are asked w
218. contains the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames contain only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of files If the check box is not available or not selected every frame contains the entire view of the camera Not available for all codecs If you want to use a particular data rate select the check box and specify the required number of kilobytes per second in the neighboring field If the check box is not available or not selected date rate is determined entirely by the selected codec 300 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Manage local IP address ranges When a client such as an XProtect Smart Client see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers When clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers e When clients connect from the internet the surveillance system should reply with the recording servers public addresses see Netw
219. crosoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit To run clustering failover management servers you also need a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 2008 2012 Enterprise or Data Center edition Microsoft NET 3 5 SP1 and NET 4 0 and Internet Information Services IIS 5 1 or newer Computer running recording server or failover recording server CPU RAM Network Graphics Adapter Hard Disk Type Hard Disk Space www milestonesys com Dual Core Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Quad Core recommended Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Onboard GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit color E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 100 GB free depends on number of cameras and recording settings 16 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Operating System Software gt gt Administrator s Manual Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit
220. ct Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Installation troubleshooting The following issues may occur during or upon installation of the management server or recording servers For each issue one or more solutions are available Issue Recording server startup fails due to port conflict This is an issue if the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP service is running lt uses port 25 If port 25 is already in use it may not be possible to start the Recording Server service It is important that port number 25 is available for the recording server s SMTP service since many cameras are only capable of communicating via this port SMTP Service Verification and solutions To verify whether SMTP Service is installed do the following 1 2 3 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel In the Control Panel double click Add or Remove Programs In the left side of the Add or Remove Programs window click Add Remove Windows Components In the Windows Components wizard select Internet Information Services IIS and click Details In the Internet Information Services IIS window verify whether the SMTP Service check box is selected If so SMTP Service is installed If SMTP Service is installed select one of the following solutions Solution 1 Disable SMTP Service or set it to manual startup This solution lets you start the recording server without having to stop the SMTP Service every time 1 From Windows
221. ct motion slider setting is indicated by a number from 0 10 000 in the right side of the slider This way you are able to compare the exact motion slider setting between cameras www milestonesys com 120 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Keyframe settings Determines if motion detection should be done on keyframes only or on the entire video stream Select Keyframes only to do motion detection on keyframes only Image processing interval Lets you select how often motion detection analysis should be carried out on video from the camera From the Process image every msec list select the required interval every 100 milliseconds i e once every tenth of a second every 250 milliseconds every 500 milliseconds every 750 milliseconds or every 1000 milliseconds i e once every second Default is every 500 milliseconds The interval is applied regardless of the camera s frame rate settings Detection method Lets you optimize motion detection performance by analyzing only a selected percentage of the image for example 25 By analyzing 25 only every fourth pixel in the image is analyzed instead of all pixels Using optimized detection will reduce the amount of processing power used to carry out the analysis but will also mean a less accurate motion detection In the Detection method drop down box select the wanted detection method Exclude regions Lets you disable motion dete
222. ction in specific areas of a camera s images Parts of images in which motion should be ignored this way are called exclude regions Disabling motion detection in specific areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background When exclude regions are used with PTZ cameras and you pan tilt zoom the camera the excluded area will not move accordingly This might mean that objects originally excluded will be included This is due to the fact that the exclude region is locked according to the camera s view not the excluded region Consequently it is not recommended to use exclude regions with PTZ cameras To use exclude regions select the Use exclude regions check box When done the preview image will be divided into selectable sections by a grid To define exclude regions drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image Pressing down the left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section You are able to define as many exclude regions as you require Excluded regions are shown in blue n LM rr Ty ELI FARRE v 7 rif HE 4 4 LI j AT a ARENS NANEEE F a raninne dafinan dp tha rrt n SAL MImelear In thie nr tha Arid ic VI ih e regions defined in the preview window In this case the grid is visible www milestonesys c
223. d fall back Note that use of DST varies between countries regions V 12 S e a e S l When you work with a surveillance system which is inherently time sensitive it is important that you know how the system handles DST Spring Switch from standard time to DST The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward Typically the clock jumps forward from 02 00 standard time to 03 00 DST and so the day has 23 hours In that case there is no data between 02 00 and 03 00 in the morning since that hour for that day did not exist Fall Switch from DST to standard time When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall you jump one hour back Typically the clock jumps backward from 02 00 DST to 01 00 standard time repeating that hour and so the day has 25 hours Server side handling Your system uses Coordinated Universal Time UTC which is the official world reference for time UTC is not adjusted to reflect switches either to or from DST Since the system uses UTC no recordings are ever stored with the same timestamp twice not even during the DST change hour www milestonesys com 358 Daylight saving time Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Client side handling The client application used for viewing recordings from the system the XProtect Smart Client also uses UTC when displaying recordings The client takes local time settings time zo
224. d a role and manage its XProtect Smart Client and time profiles 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security and right click Roles 2 Select Add Role This will open the Add Role dialog 3 Type a name and description of the new role Milestone XProtect Management Client m Name Building A Securty Staff Description Security Staff in Building A on 224 High St mum m m 4 Click OK www milestonesys com 258 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 5 The new role is added to the Roles list in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 By default a new role does not have any users groups associated with it but it does have the default profile Default Smart Client Profile and the default time profile Always associated 6 To change the default Smart Client or time profiles in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 click the wanted drop down dialog Role Settings Roles infoemabon Name Building A Secunty Staff Description Securty Staff in Building A on 224 H gh St Smort Chent profile Default Smart Client Profile Default Time profile Always hd 7 You are now able to assign users groups to the role and to specify which of the system s features they should be able to access Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from a role and Specify rights of a role on page 262
225. d by the codec 0 means no compression generally resulting in high image quality Compression quality and large file size 100 means maximum compression generally resulting in low image quality and small file size If the slider is not available compression quality is determined entirely by the selected codec Not available for all codecs If you want to use keyframes select the check box and specify the required number of seconds between keyframes in the neighboring field A keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals The Keyframe every keyframe contains the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames contain only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of files If the check box is not available or not selected every frame contains the entire view of the camera Not available for all codecs If you want to use a particular data rate select the check box and specify the required number of Data rate kilobytes per second in the neighboring field If the check box is not available or not selected date rate is determined entirely by the selected codec Network The Options see Options on page 293 Network tab lets you specify local IP address ranges Refer to Manage local IP address ranges on page 301 for more information Bookmarks The Options see Options on page 293 Bookmarks tab lets you specify settings for how bookmarks should be ID ed and function in the XProt
226. d is the only property you will always see for microphones Determines whether video should be sent from the camera to the system when the event occurs Select True if video is required select False if video is not required Many cameras capable of detecting motion can be configured with different motion detection settings for different parts the camera s images For example if a camera covers a 2 lane road different motion detection settings may have been defined for the right lane and left lane area of the camera s images Such areas are generally known as motion windows Provided one or more motion windows have been defined on the camera device the Motion Window setting lets you specify which motion window to use for the event When the camera detects motion within the specified motion window the event will occur When specifying use of a motion window make sure you type the name of the motion window exactly as it has been specified on the camera You can only specify one motion window in the field However you are able to add more than one instance of an event see Use several instances of an event on page 170 Determines the frame rate to be used for prebuffered video See also the next description of Prebuffered Seconds setting Determines the number of seconds for which video from the camera should be stored for possible later use What does prebuffer mean Prebuffering is essentially the ability to store video from be
227. d it from http www milestonesys com downloads e The management server stores your system s configuration in a database The system configuration database can be stored in two different ways 1 In a SQL Server Express Edition database on the management server itself 2 Inadatabase on an existing SQL Server on your network If using 2 Administrator rights on the SQL Server are required whenever you want to create move or upgrade the management server s system configuration database on the SQL Server Once you are done creating moving or updating being the database owner of the management server s system configuration database on the SQL Server is sufficient Alternative upgrade for workgroup If you do not use a domain setup but a workgroup setup you must do the following when upgrading 1 Onthe recording server create a local Windows user 2 From the Windows Control Panel find the Milestone XProtect Data Collector service Right click it select Properties and select the Log on tab Set the Data Collector service to run as the local windows user you just created on the recording server 3 Onthe management server create the same local Windows user with the same user name and password 4 Inthe Management Client add this local Windows user to the Administrator s group For installing with workgroups see Install your system preconditions on page 30 www milestonesys com 49 Installation and removal Milestone XProte
228. d not to clear the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box unless you specifically need to view recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour www milestonesys com 359 Daylight saving time Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 IPv6 IPv6 vs IPv4 Your system supports IPv6 as well as IPv4 So does the XProtect Smart Client see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 IPv6 is the latest version of the Internet Protocol IP The Internet protocol determines the format and use of IP addresses IPv6 coexists with the still much more widely used IP version IPv4 IPv6 was developed in order to solve the address exhaustion of IPv4 IPv6 addresses are 128 bit long whereas IPv4 addresses are only 32 bit long IPv6 offers more than ten billion billion billion times as many addresses as IPv4 More and more organizations are implementing IPv6 on their networks For example all US federal agency infrastructures are required to be IPv6 compliant Examples and illustrations in this Doc Type reflect use of IPv4 since this is still the most widely used IP version IPv6 will work equally well with the system provided you note the following Important information if using the system with IPv6 The following conditions apply when using the system with IPv6 Servers servers are often capable of using IPv4 as well as IPv6 However if just one server in your system i e a management
229. ded Sebeched uberes amd gauge azi ga pi Select Users or Groups ax 8 MI BA M S elect this obiect Type Users orc Groups D amp yect Tapes From tine kacabion PCOO1 Locais Ema the obeci namas bo pilect 1500 Check Mames mr Advanced Cancel When users added this way log in to the system the user must not specify any server name PC name or IP address as part of their user names Example of a correctly specified user name USERO001 Example of an incorrectly specified user name PCOOT USEROO0 1 The users should of course still specify their passwords etc Manage roles Roles determine which of your systems s features users and groups see Manage users and groups on page 255 are able to use In other words roles determine rights and handles security within the application You define roles first then you add users groups and an XProtect Smart Client profile and a time profile to each role Added roles automatically also become view groups One role is predefined in the system and cannot be deleted the Administrators Role www milestonesys com 257 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 In addition to the Administrators role you are able to add as many roles as required in your organization To manage roles in the system expand the Security folder in the Management Client s Site Navi
230. der which the Failover Server service should run This user account must have administrator rights in the system Note also that if you run workgroups you should ignore the normal installation guidelines for installing recording servers and use the alternative installation method for workgroups see Install your system preconditions on page 30 Once you have installed the management server using the common installer you can download the separate recording server installer from the management server s web page see Download Manager download web page on page 38 controlled by the Download Manager As part of this installer you can specify whether the installer should result in a standard recording server or a failover recording server 1 Goto the Management server s download web page and select the Recording Server installer suitable for your needs Save the installer somewhere appropriate and run it from here or run it directly from the web page 2 Select the Language you want to use during the installation this does not affect the language of your system choose this later in the process Click Continue 3 From a selection list of e Typical which installs a standard recording server with default settings e Failover which installs a recording server as a failover recording server e Custom which installs a standard recording server and offers configuration options for example letting you install more than one recording server
231. device in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the required device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s items i e cameras microphones or speakers will be listed www milestonesys com 161 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 You are now able to verify or change both common settings and settings for individual item types within the device group Praperter Vea J B Gener Deteut Steon B Mec Frames pes second Misc GB seno ED info Recod D Archiving Example are from camera From the menu above the settings list select the required type of item nl v Al Asat ZIDA Network Corne Ais 211 Network Camers G Plot 212 PTZ Network Camera 6 fuas 225 Network Carrere Ass 232 Network Camers Asat 2400 Valeo Server A 2410 Video Server General info Record 3 fiche e 0 B Example are from camera www milestonesys com 162 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4 Make changes as needed fons 211 Netwod Camera dy B Gener Enghtres 55 Colori 54 Compres 9n 54 Contrast 50 Del mit Shean MPEG Include Date Yes Inckade Tene Yes Flesolubon 320x240 Flotation 0 B JPEG steamed Frames per second 20 HB MPEG Bu rate control mode Vamable Ot rate B3 rate Control pnonty Nore v General a Settings O iro Recod
232. devices on your system e You are able to specify common properties for all devices within a device group in one go e When dealing with roles see About roles on page 255 you are able to specify common security settings for all devices within a device group in one go e When dealing with rules see Manage rules on page 226 you are able to apply a rule for all devices within a device group in one go www milestonesys com 139 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 You can add as many device groups as required you are completely free to decide which devices to include The only restriction is that you cannot mix different types of devices for example cameras and speakers in a device group Devices DII E Lab Cameras expanding A 5 Red Sector Cameras h Red Sector Back Door Ca Sp Red Sector Entrance Cam Red Sector Reception Car Retail amp rea PTZ Cameras PT Camera 1 If a device group contains 400 devices or more the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing For camera groups the Streams tab is also unavailable for editing and viewing if the group contains 400 cameras or more When you click the plus sign next to the device folder your system will load the contents of the device folder which may take a few seconds While expanding the text expanding is displayed next to the folder name Note that if you delete a device group you only
233. disclaimer Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Introductions Product overview This system is a fully distributed solution designed for large multi site and multiple server installations requiring 24 7 surveillance with support for devices from different vendors The solution offers centralized management of all devices servers and users and empowers an extremely flexible rule system driven by schedules and events Your system consists of the following main elements e he management server the center of your installation e One or more recording servers e One or more Management Clients which are unlicensed and can be downloaded and installed for free as many times as needed e A Download Manager e One or more XProtect Smart Clients which are unlicensed and can be downloaded and installed for free as many times as needed Possibly also one or more XProtect Web Clients and or Milestone Mobile clients which are also free of charge Your system also includes fully integrated Matrix functionality for distributed viewing of video from any camera on your surveillance system to any computer with XProtect Smart Client installed The system also offers the possibility of including the standalone XProtect Smart Client Player when you export video evidence from the XProtect Smart Client XProtect Smart Client Player allows recipients of video evidence such as police officers internal or exte
234. down an operating system properly may take several minutes Windows Task Manager Careful when ending processes When working in Windows Task Manager be careful not to end any processes which affect the surveillance system If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the Windows Task Manager the process in question will not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is terminated This may in turn lead to corrupt camera databases Windows Task Manager will typically display a warning if you attempt to end a process Unless you are absolutely sure that ending the process will not affect the surveillance system make sure you click No when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process Hard disk failure Protect your drives Hard disk drives are mechanical devices and as such they are vulnerable to external factors The following are examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt camera databases e Vibration make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are stable e Strong heat make sure the server has adequate ventilation e Strong magnetic fields avoid www milestonesys com 343 Database corruption Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Power outages make sure you use a UPS see Power outages Use a UPS on page 343 e Static electricity make sure you ground yourself if you are goin
235. ds tant Smart Mall indinatad in qnraan vith faiir manitnre mma ic hinhlinghtad in rad and nna in valle Tha mnanitnre dicenlay ect Smart Wall indicated in greei 1 WI th four monitors one is highlighted in red and one in yelow ine monitors display rom different cameras and in different views Also refer to Manage XProtect Smart Walls on page 176 or Manage monitors on page 179 And to learn how to work with XProtect Smart Wall and roles and rules refer to Roles and rules www milestonesys com 175 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 XProtect Smart Wall installation 1 Download the SmartWall_ Setup exe file from the internet location specified at purchase and save it on your management server on page 13 Run the SmartWall Setup exe file from the location you saved it to Tip If you are installing from a DVD the XProtect Smart Wall installation window opens automatically If not run the SmartWall Setup exe file from the DVD Follow the installation wizard Read and accept the License Terms included in the wizard m bem oom j When the XProtect Smart Wall is installed click Finish Activate your XProtect Smart Wall license in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Basics right click License Information and select your activation method of choice Follow the on screen license activation guide see Activate l
236. e Level In addition to the default state levels numbers 1 4 9 and 11 which can not be edited or reused add new states with level numbers of your choosing These state levels are only visible in the XProtect Smart Client s Alarm List Categories table Level Name Add new categories with level numbers of your choosing These category levels are used to configure the Initial alarm category setting see Alarm definitions on page 282 Type a name for the entity You can create as many as you like www milestonesys com 286 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Alarm List Configuration tab Available columns Reasons for Closing tab Enable Reason Sound Settings Administrator s Manual Use gt to select which columns should be available in the XProtect Smart Client s Alarm List Use to clear selection When done Selected columns should contain the items to be included Select to enable that all alarms must be assigned a reason for closing before they can be closed Add reasons for closing that the user can choose between when closing alarms Examples could be Solved Trespasser or False Alarm You can create as many as you like When you configure sound settings specify the following Sounds Add Remove Test Select the sound to be associated with the alarm The list of sounds contain a number of default Windows sounds These cannot be edited However you can add new
237. e Move non archived recordings from one storage to another on page 103 before you are allowed to delete the storage area 1 Select the wanted storage area by clicking it Storage configuration Device Usage Default Local Default 28 v 2 Click the button located below the Storage configuration list www milestonesys com 102 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Click Yes Edit settings for a selected storage area or archive 1 In the Recording and archiving configuration list to edit a storage area select its recording database To edit an archive select the archive database Tip A selected database is marked by a dark frame 2 Click the umen located below the Recording and archiving configuration list 3 Either editing a recording database see Add a storage area on page 100 or editing an archive see Create an archive within an existing storage area on page 100 If you change the maximum size of a database recordings that exceed the new limit are auto archived to the next archive or deleted depending on archiving settings Move non archived recordings from one storage to another 1 Moving of contents from one recording database to another is done from the Record tab of the device in question 2 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices select the wanted device type In the
238. e consecutive numbers only might be confusing if you have many servers What is a home site Your home site is the site to which you are logged in Since you may be logged in far down in the hierarchy this is not necessarily the same as your top site but it may be You are only able to see children from the point at which you are logged in and downwards Can a site be both a parent and a child at the same time Yes a parent with children attached can easily be child to another site and vice versa This is because the parent child concept is relative and used only in respect to other specified servers oee the federated sites illustration see Illustration of Milestone Federated Architecture on page 311 where site 7 is the parent of site 8 but the child of site 6 What is the difference between logging into and connecting to a site To work with Milestone Federated Architecture you must always be logged in to a site via the Management Client You can log in to any site if you have administrator rights to that particular site This is called your home site When logged in to your home site you can see all its children if user rights permit From your home site you can also connect to its children if user rights permit Embedded in the connection process is an automated and seamless log in using the same credentials as your home site log in Connecting to a child allows you to see and work with that site if user rights permit However
239. e installed on the management server in fact you can often achieve better performance by installing the Event Server service on another server Administrators get the Event Server service through the web page generated by the Download Manager see Download Manager download web page on page 38 This fact lets you install the Event Server service anywhere Once installed the Event Server service can register itself automatically with your system that is it automatically becomes listed by the registered services see Manage registered services on page 291 feature in the Management Client The location of the Event Server service is known by your system and clients logging into the system can automatically benefit from the Event Server service as well www milestonesys com 341 Map Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 However if you later change the IP address or hostname of the server running the Event Server service you must manually edit the information under Tools gt Registered Services in the Management Client Also if you later need to change the user under which the Event Server service was installed you must remove the Event Server service and afterwards install it again under the new user Note that removing the Event Server service will not in itself remove the map configuration made through the XProtect Smart Client www milestonesys com 342 Map Milestone XProtect Advanced Admin
240. e see Panes overview on page 57 then select the Info tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Pyopetwz iL Narre Racording Server 1 Descsphon Covers Sector 1 Phencaly located m room G553 For hardware Quenet contact Aeneid iot edt 1234 Hott name MM01232 Web server URI hire Mew 232 TS63 Time zone GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madnd Pari g Settings o into 3 Storage Info tab properties www milestonesys com 97 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Name of the recording server The name will be used whenever the recording server is listed in the system and clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique Name To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well Description of the recording server The description will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the recording Description server s name in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 5 A description is not compulsory To specify a description type the description and click Save
241. e amount of system resources on scanning This may affect system performance negatively notably scanning of data in databases containing recordings Some virus scanning software may also temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively Virus scanning may even corrupt recording databases and render your surveillance system recordings useless Therefore e Do not use virus scanning on recording server directories containing recording databases by default C MediaDatabase and all folders under that location but note that your organization may have specified different recording paths e Do not use virus scanning on archiving locations e Do not use virus scanning on files with the following file extensions which are all surveillance system related o blk o idx o pic o pqz o Sts o tS e Do not use virus scanning on the management server Your organization may have strict guidelines regarding virus scanning but it is important that the mentioned locations and files are exempt from virus scanning If allowed you should disable any virus scanning of recording servers databases of any archiving locations as well as on the management server Consult your organization s IT system administrator if in doubt www milestonesys com 354 Virus scanning Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tray icon The following issues are relevant to tasks accessible f
242. e at regular intervals Depending on your requirements you are able to configure one or more archives for each of your databases Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself or at another location which can be reached by the system for example on a network drive By setting up your archiving in an effective way you can prune and groom your database storage area usage significantly if needed Often it is desired to make archived recordings take up as little space as possible especially on a long term basis where it is perhaps even possible to slacken image and sound quality a bit Effective pruning and grooming can help ensure this and can be handled from the Storage tab see Storage tab recording server properties on page 98 of a recording server by adjusting several interdependent settings such as e Recording database retention www milestonesys com 89 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Recording database size e Archive retention e Archive size e Archive schedule e Encryption e Frames Per Second FPS The size fields define the size of the camera s database exemplified by the cylinder and its archive s respectively By means of retention time and size setting for the recording database exemplified by the white area in the cylinder you define how old recordings must be before they are archived In our illustrated example recordings
243. e different states a site can be in e Top site in the entire hierarchy is operational Uu e Top site in the entire hierarchy is still operational but one or more issues need attention amp will be shown on top of the top site icon e Normal site not top site is operational V amp e Normal site not top site is still operational but one or more issues need attention 4 will be shown on top of the normal site icon e Site awaiting acceptance of inclusion in the hierarchy Uu e Site being attaching but not yet operating Y www milestonesys com 312 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Expand collapse You can expand and collapse a site in the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 to see its children if any Site Navigation pane The name settings and configurations of the highlighted site red arrow are reflected in the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 BteMavigehon g gt Right click does not select Because you must be able to delete a site without being connected to it right clicking a site does not select it but offers a context menu which differs depending on where in the hierarchy you are Refer to Action menu see Management Client menu overview on page 61 Context menu From the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 a context menu lets you add s
244. e interpreted Each generic event type pairs up with a data source and makes up a language used for communication with a specific piece of hard or software If you are writing your own third party program do not worry about data sources just write your code to fit one of the two default data sources available refer to Generic event data source properties on page 253 Their IP configuration can be found from the Generic Events tab of the Options menu see Options on page 293 Working with data sources requires general knowledge of IP networking and specific knowledge of the individual hard or software you want to interface from There are many parameters you can use and no ready made solution on how to do this Basically your system provides the tools but not the solution Unlike user defined events see Manage user defined events on page 243 generic events has no authentication This makes them easier to trigger but to avoid jeopardizing security only events from local host are accepted You can however allow other client IP addresses from the Generic Events tab of the Options menu see Options on page 293 String to send as generic An event string to be tested from within the system by the event event server as a generic event www milestonesys com 248 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 sas ae KOSS OUI See Generic event data source properties on page 253 Echo from ev
245. e kept for Default is 30 days www milestonesys com 278 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Excess log content will be deleted if the log reaches its maximum allowed size see Maximum number of entries before the specified number of days is reached Maximum number of entries Lets you specify the maximum size of the log Default is 50 000 entries Excess log content will be deleted if it reaches its maximum allowed age see Days to keep log entries before the specified number of entries is reached For the Audit Log you will also see O Enable user access logging Lets you include detailed information about specific user actions in the audit log e g about users viewing of live video and associated audio PTZ actions activation of output and events export playback of video and audio use of playback features any denied access to features etc Playback sequence logging length Lets you specify how long a playback sequence may last and still be considered and logged as one sequence Example If you select 60 seconds you may view 60 consecutive seconds of playback video but still only leave one log entry in the Audit Log Specifying a high number of seconds may help limit the number of viewed sequences logged and in this way reduce the size of the audit log Records seen before logging Lets you specify the number of records to be viewed before logging the sequence 4
246. e list click Auto Detect wait for this process to be successful marked by a s to the far left click Next 2 This step is designed to help you map devices and their databases depending on the number of individual cameras microphones inputs outputs etc attached to the old hardware device and the new respectively It is important to consider how to map databases from the old hardware device to databases of the new hardware device You do the actual mapping of individual cameras microphones inputs outputs etc by selecting a corresponding camera microphone input output or None in the right side column IMPORTANT Make sure to map all cameras microphones inputs outputs etc Contents stored in databases belonging to cameras microphones inputs outputs etc mapped to None will be lost Click Next 3 You are presented with a list of hardware to be added replaced or removed Click Confirm 4 Final step is a summary of added replaced and inherited devices and their settings Click Copy to Clipboard to copy contents to an external source for for example reporting purposes or and Close to end the wizard Disable enable hardware device Added hardware device is by default enabled In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 under the required recording server enabled disabled hardware devices are indicated this way EA Enabled tw Disabled To disable added hardware device for example for licensing
247. e the token authentication of clients for added XProtect Enterprise servers In the Management Client you must add all XProtect Enterprise servers you would like to receive data from The XProtect Enterprise system s internal master slave setup cannot be reused by your system XProtect Enterprise server network configuration With the network configuration settings you specify the management server s server address so that the management server can handle the token authentication of clients for added XProtect Enterprise servers From the Management Client s Tools menu select XProtect Enterprise Servers 1 In the Add Remove Registered Services window click Network 2 Specify the LAN and or WAN IP address of the management server www milestonesys com 290 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 If all involved servers both the management server and the trusted servers or the required XProtect Enterprise are on your local network you can simply specify the LAN address If one or more involved servers access the system through an internet connection you must also specify the WAN address AARETE LTI Uu EAIA Network Configuration M Server Sethegs Server address LAN HO 10 48 191 Server address WAN 3 Click OK Edit XProtect Enterprise servers From the Management Client s Tools menu select XProtect Enterprise Servers 1 Select an XProtect Enterprise server f
248. e title bar of the pane to dock the pane Reset to default layout If you have moved resized and auto hidden panes and now want to reset the entire layout of the panes in the Management Client to their default settings do the following 1 From the Management Client s View menu select Reset Application Layout 2 Restart the application Toggle Preview pane on and off You can close the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 when working with recorders and devices by clicking Close in the right side of the Preview pane s title bar To reopen the Preview pane select Preview Window from the Management Client s View menu Tip If the Preview pane displays images from many cameras at a high frame rate it may slow down performance To specify the number of preview images you want in your Preview pane as well as their frame rate select Options General from the Tools menu www milestonesys com 68 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tip When the Preview pane is closed it uses no resources and improves therefore the computer s performance Activate licenses online You can activate your licenses in two ways online or offline Tip If the computer running the Management Client has Internet access use online activation for a quick and convenient activation procedure Online activation In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57
249. e will always be auto archived or deleted if no next archive is defined when less than 5GB of space is free If less than 1GB space is free data will be deleted A database always requires 250MB of free space if this limit is reached if data is not deleted fast enough no more data will be written to the database until enough space has been freed The actual maximum size of your database will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 5GB Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on page 88 for a recording server is full and needs to auto archive toto an archive in the hierarchy Occurs if a database becomes corrupted in which case the system will automatically attempt two different database repair methods a fast repair and a thorough repair Occurs when a storage area see About storage and archiving on page 88 for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable see Database Storage Area Unavailable next You can for example use the event to start recording if it has been stopped by a Database Storage Area Unavailable event see next Occurs when a storage area see About storage and archiving on page 88 for a recording server becomes unavailable for example if the connection to a storage area located on a network drive is lost When this is the case it will not be possible to store recordings You can use the event to for example stop recording and trigger a notification
250. ecify hardware and device info properties 82 158 opecify input properties 147 Specify IP address range 109 Specify manual PTZ session timeout 131 Specify output properties 152 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual opecify preset positions for use in a patrolling profile e 128 Specify rights of a role 187 244 256 259 260 263 298 Specify which devices to include in a device group 142 opeech rights 267 Spring Switch from standard time to DST 360 SQL database administration 347 Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service 341 Start the server service 350 Status icons overview 175 Stop the server service 350 Storage and Recording settings 101 Storage area 168 Storage tab recording server properties 90 99 Storage tab properties 100 Streams tab camera properties 115 136 162 oystem dashboard 271 System requirements 15 26 30 48 T Test a generic event 250 Test a preset position 135 Testing an Analytics Event 246 247 378 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Three possible Milestone Interconnect setups 87 Toggle Preview pane on and off 69 Toolbar 56 Tools menu items 63 Tray icon 357 U Unregister Axis One click Camera 77 Update remote site hardware 88 170 171 Update SQL server address 52 347 357 Upgrade from previous version 30 31 48 95 Upgrade in a cluster 47 Use auto
251. eck box to see if detected hardware is running on other recording servers Remote connect hardware Remote Connect hardware automatically scans for hardware connected via a remotely connected server 1 Select Remote Connect hardware and click Next 2 Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator will show you how far you are in the detection process 3 Once detection has completed select which hardware you want to add and click Next About hardware What is the difference between hardware devices and hardware Technically you do not add cameras or microphones to the system rather you add hardware devices This is because hardware devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based the system primarily identifies www milestonesys com 81 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 units based on their IP addresses or host names Even though each hardware device has its own IP address or host name several cameras microphones and so on can be attached to a single hardware device and share the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video encoder devices You can of course configure and use each camera microphone and so on individually even when several of them are attached to a single hardware device Hardware on the other hand is a general term for cameras microphones and so on For each recording server on your syst
252. ecording server icon From the menu that appears select Authorize Recording Server After a short moment the recording server will be authorized and ready for further configuration Ongoing database repair Appears when databases have become corrupted and the recording server is repairing them The repair process may take considerable time if the databases are large IMPORTANT During the database repair it is not possible to record video from cameras connected to the recording server in question Live video viewing will still be EJ possible How can databases become corrupted Databases typically become corrupted if the recording server is shut down abruptly for example due to a power failure or similar Refer to Protect Databases from Corruption see Protect recording databases from corruption on page 343 for useful information about how to avoid corrupt databases www milestonesys com 110 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Change verify a recording server s basic configuration If you have installed several recording servers on your surveillance system the recording servers should automatically be listed in the Management Client If your Management Client does not list all the recording servers you have installed the most likely reason is that the missing recording servers have not been correctly configured to connect to a management server in your system recording servers p
253. ect Smart Client Refer to Specify rights of a role on page 262 Device rights on page 263 and the XProtect Smart Client documentation User settings The Options see Options on page 293 User Settings tab lets you specify settings for user preference such as whether a message should be shown when edge recording is enabled Refer to Record tab overview on page 164 for more information www milestonesys com 296 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Analytics events settings The Options see Options on page 293 Analytics Events Settings tab lets you specify settings for analytics events Specify whether this feature should be enabled or not As default Enable the service is disabled Specify the port used by this service The default port is 9090 Port Make sure that relevant VCA tool providers also use this port number If you change the port number remember to make sure that these providers also change their port number Specify whether in principle events from all IP All network addresses or addresses hostnames are accepted or only events from IP Specified network addresses addresses hostnames specified in a list see the following are allowed opecify a list of trusted IP addresses hostnames that you want this service to recognize The list is used to filter and allow incoming data so that only events from certain IP addresses hostnames are allowed Both
254. ect Smart Client s are time synchronized with the management server Why clients require time synchronization Because configuration communication is facilitated by the service channel see About the service channel on page 347 it is advantageous that XProtect Smart Client s are also time synchronized with the management server and the computer running the service channel service A time difference of five minutes between XProtect Smart Client and servers is tolerated If an XProtect Smart Client is not time synchronized with the management server and the computer running the service channel service the XProtect Smart Client is not updated with information about configuration changes made by other users in XProtect Smart Client in Setup mode This means that users risk overwriting each other s configuration changes www milestonesys com 112 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Devices About devices Administrator s Manual You can either add see Add hardware on page 78 or replace see About hardware on page 81 devices In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 you are able to work with the following under Devices Cameras Microphones Speakers Inputs Outputs Manage cameras on page 113 Manage cameras Here you can handle the majority of camera configuration and management On many devices you can attach external microphones Some devices
255. ect Smart Client silently 26 Install XProtect Smart Client 25 29 106 117 131 189 244 302 362 Install your system Custom option 32 34 35 46 Install your system Distributed option 32 34 Install your system preconditions 30 33 49 Install your system Single Server option 13 31 32 33 Install your system on virtual servers 30 37 Installation and removal 29 Installation overview 29 37 46 48 54 59 305 306 349 Installation troubleshooting 50 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Introductions 12 IPv6 109 362 IPv6 vs IPv4 12 25 289 299 362 Issue Changes to SQL server location prevents database access 52 Insufficient continuous virtual memory fails installation 52 Manual installation of IIS if needed 51 Multi domain environments 52 Recording server startup fails due to port conflict 50 L Layout tab XProtect Smart Wall properties 178 180 License information 72 88 Licenses and camera replacement 74 Licenses and Milestone Federated Architecture 74 Licensing of Milestone Federated Architecture e 306 Limitations when adding XProtect Enterprise servers 290 Local IP ranges 110 Log in to the Management Client 59 61 Mail server 296 Manage Alarms 186 281 Manage analytics events 191 246 Manage basic users 271 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Manage cameras 60
256. ected PTZ camera does not support preset positions In order to use PTZ cameras features including the ability to pan tilt and zoom operators must have a role which gives them the necessary rights Refer to About roles on page 255 for more information including step by step descriptions of how to assign users to roles and how to specify the rights of roles F Une cements ferm drece hee Ads terre ie Caen Foods Seckor ie Dany Product Sector zal Im Poduce Sector ae 1e frarm f sock Secten kem sle Mourehoid Goode Sector Ie Pady Sector v1 Set Certs Sanct wm v Delak prese Q Sarre gww Read of Pon i Cr Pus R F wra SF Miton Tir Presets tab with eight preset positions defined Add a preset position type 1 As an alternative to defining preset positions in the system preset positions may for some PTZ cameras also be defined on the camera device itself typically by accessing a device specific configuration web page and imported into the system by selecting Use presets from device see Use preset positions from device type 2 on page 133 To add a preset position for the camera in the system do the following 1 Click Add This will open the Add Preset window www milestonesys com 131 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 he Add Preset window displays a preview image from the camera use the navigation buttons and or sliders to move t
257. ee Panes overview on page 57 expand Client click Smart Client Profiles right click the required profile in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select Copy Smart Client Profile 2 Inthe dialog that opens give the copied profile a new unique name and description 3 Click OK 4 Inthe Overview pane click the profile you just created to configure it This is done by adjusting settings see Adjust settings on a Smart Client profile on page 186 on one more or all of the available tabs 5 Click OK Work with Smart Client profiles roles and time profiles When working with Smart Client profiles it is important to understand the interaction between Smart Client profiles roles see Manage roles on page 257 and time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 235 e Smart Client profiles deal with user right settings in XProtect Smart Client e Roles deal with security settings in XProtect Smart Client e Time profiles deal with time aspects of the two profiles types Together these three features provide unique control and customizing possibilities with regards to XProtect Smart Client user rights Note that the time profiles mentioned here are general time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 235 To learn about the time profiles used in Alarms refer to Manage Alarms on page 279 Example Let s say you need a user in your XProtect Smart Client setup who should only be allowed to view live vid
258. eeded user name and password for Axis Dispatch Services Make sure your camera s support Axis Video Hosting System htto www axis com products avhs http www axis com products avhs If needed update your Axis cameras with the newest firmware htto www axis com techsup firmware php http www axis com techsup firmware php On each camera s homepage go to Basic Setup TCP IP and select Enable AVHS and Always www milestonesys com 75 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 5 From your management server s download web page see Download Manager download web page on page 38 controlled by the Download Manager install the Axis One Click Connection Component to setup a suitable Axis secure tunnel framework 6 From Services search for services msc on your machine start the Axis One Click service Edit Axis Dispatch Service properties 1 The Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 displays relevant dispatch information on the Axis Dispatch Service tab 2 Edit properties see Axis One Click Camera connection properties on page 77 3 Inthe toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Add edit STSs 1 Do one of the following a To add an ST servers right click the Axis Secure Tunnel Servers top node select Add Axis Secure Tunnel Server Or b To edit an ST server right click it select Edit Axis Secure Tunnel Server 2 n
259. elect stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started gt In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would set the frame rate for the camera to 25 FPS indefinitely upon motion detection Based on the elements in our rule description the wizard therefore automatically suggests the stop criterion Perform stop action on lt event gt First Select stop crtena Pesfom stop action on evenb Perform stop action after a time Note that the stop criterion No actions performed on rule end is not available a stop criterion must be defined for this type of rule In the rule description the wizard furthermore automatically suggests that the stop action is performed when motion is no longer detected on Camera 1 Next t t the rule descupbon chick an undGerimed tem Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set live frame rate on the device on which event occurred to 25 frames per second Perform stop action on Motion End from Camera 1 This is just what we want we do not need to change any of the wizard s suggestions However we still need to define exactly which kind of stop action should take place when motion ends on Camera 1 8 Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard In this step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions www
260. em you have several options for managing added IP hardware Most configuration and management of individual camera settings see Manage cameras on page 113 such as a camera s recording settings input settings see Manage input on page 145 and output settings see Manage output on page 150 takes place on a more detailed level camera input or output level IMPORTANT When you delete one or all hardware devices on a recording server all its recordings are deleted permanently If you need to add the hardware device to a recording server again select the required recording server and use the Add Hardware on page 78 wizard Edit basic hardware device settings You are able to edit basic settings such as IP address host name for added hardware 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server right click the hardware device you wish to edit 2 From the menu that appears select Edit IP Hardware This opens the Edit Hardware window where you can edit relevant properties see Specify hardware and device info properties on page 157 3 Click OK Replace hardware device When you replace a physical camera hardware device on your network with another hardware device you must know the IP address port user name and password of the new hardware device Furthermore when replacing hardware devices note that your system might be affected by license limitations see About
261. en installing the other management servers in the MFA setup 3 Finish the installation 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to install any other systems you want to connect in the MFA 5 Refer to Add site to hierarchy on page 313 for details on how to proceed with the MFA Typical Installation set up network service on all servers 1 Start the management server installation see Installation overview on page 29 and select Typical let it run till it finishes This will install the management server as a network service 2 Repeat step 1 to install any other systems you want to connect with the MFA 3 Using a Management Client connect to the management server you want to have as your parent site 4 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security click Roles and in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 click Administrator 5 Add the child computer to this parent server s Administrator role Refer to Assign remove users and groups to from roles for details 6 Log out of the parent management server and connect to the management server that you just added as a child 7 Once again in the Overview pane click Administrator 8 Add the parent computer to this servers Administrator role Refer to Assign remove users and groups to from roles for details www milestonesys com 303 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 20
262. ent server and A window displaying the echo of the string from the event server in the following default format X Y Z Name of generic event X request number Y number of characters local error message Z number of matches with a generic event Name of generic event name entered in the Name field If no generic events are defined or if no data sources are enabled an information message is displayed instead Other echo formats can be selected see Generic events Options settings on page 298 Add a generic event 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Rules and Events right click Generic Events and select Add New Fill in the needed information and properties Optional In the Check if expression matches event string field enter the expression you would like to validate Optional Below the Check if expression matches event string field you will see either Match or No match as indication of whether your string can be validated against the expression entered in the Expression field or not If not change the string and or relevant settings and try again Click Yes Test a generic event 1 www milestonesys com 249 a o w D In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Rules and Events select Generic Events In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the to
263. ent window typically contains only the menu bar the Site Navigation and Federated Sites Hierarchy Pane see Panes overview on page 57 and an overview area marked in gray jas PE ees n OR Ee He Ee o e o i S Mimes bere EH Site Navigation pane and Federated Hierarchy pane The Management Client is the feature rich administration client used for configuration and day to day administration of your system The Management Client software is typically installed on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar Site Navigation pane Your main navigation element in the Management Client Name settings and configurations of the site you are logged into are reflected see Manage Milestone Federated Architecture on page 312 here site name is visible at the top of the pane The Management Client s features are grouped into categories reflecting the functionality of the software Tip Right clicking items in the Site Navigation pane gives you quick access to management features www milestonesys com 55 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Federated Site Hierarchy pane Your navigation element dedicated to displaying Milestone Federated Architecture sites see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 and their parent child links The parent server you are logged in to your home site is always at the top and adopting its poin
264. eo no playback from selected cameras and only during normal working hours 8 00 to 16 00 One way of setting this up could be as follows 1 Create a Smart Client profile or use an existing if you have a suitable one Let s call it Live only 2 Specify the needed live playback settings on Live only 3 Create a time profile see Manage time profiles on page 235 or use an existing if you have a suitable one Lets call it Daytime only www milestonesys com 185 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4 Specify the needed time period on Daytime only 5 Create a new role see Add a role and manage its XProtect Smart Client and time profiles on page 258 or use an existing if you have a suitable one Let s call it Guard Selected cameras 6 Specify which cameras see Specify rights of a role on page 262 Guard Selected cameras is allowed to work with see Specify rights of a role on page 262 7 Finally assign the Live only Smart Client profile and the Daytime only time profile to the Guard Selected cameras role to connect the three elements You now have a mix of the three features creating the wanted result and allowing you room for easy fine tuning and adjustments Note also that it is possible to do the setup in a different order for example creating the role first and then the Smart Client and the time profile or any other order preferred Adjust settings o
265. er Hense Barkin escrip amp on Cerra eee nari Pere E giia ed fe Ela ids bha Tis ba C Tila ba pah bem inci The name of the XProtect Smart Wall Displayed in the XProtect Name Smart Client as the XProtect Smart Wall view group name A description of the XProtect Smart Wall for example Smart Wall Description located in Bloomington Only used as internally in the Management Client If selected camera and system status information is displayed Status text ded across view items If selected all XProtect Smart Wall view items are displayed without No title bar title bars in the XProtect Smart Client If selected all XProtect Smart Wall view items are displayed with Title bar title bars in the XProtect Smart Client When selected all XProtect Smart Wall view items title bars display Title bar with live indicator MN indicators General view item properties are set up individually for each XProtect Smart Wall allowing you to configure different settings for different XProtect Smart Walls www milestonesys com 177 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Presets tab XProtect Smart Wall properties Propet Permit Er Anma Fenky H mari Ghaat am phos P cath Ceska mehena Sou CA L d ina d Phara Hd Lact The Presets tab lets you add virtual presets to the XProtect Smart Wall and edit names descriptions of ex
266. er ID on the new recording server a Make sure that the Recording Server service is stopped see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 and disabled on the old recording server It is very important that you do not start two recording servers with identical IDs at the same time www milestonesys com 96 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 b On the new recording server open an explorer and go to C ProgramData Milestone XProtect Recording Server or the path where your recording server is located C Open the file RecorderConfig xml d Delete the ID stated in between the tags id and id lt recorderconfig gt erecorderz cido2ff bsder afi ew eit Hel AMP d gt e Paste the copied recording server ID in between the tags id and lt id gt Save the RecorderConfig xml file f Restart the Recording Server service When the new Recording Server service starts up the recording server has inherited all settings on the old recording server Tip This procedure also applies if you re install Windows on the computer running the recording server even if you do not replace the computer running the recording server Info tab recording server properties You are able to verify or edit the name and description of a selected recording server on the Info tab To access the Info tab select the required recording server in the Overview pan
267. er addaress port installation admin where management server address is the IP address or host name of the management server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the management www milestonesys com 38 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 server If not accessing the web page on the management server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the management server e One targeted at end users providing them access to client applications with default configuration The content is displayed when the web page is accessed by entering the URL nttp management server address port installation where management server address is the IP address or host name of the management server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the management Server The two web page s automatically has some default content so they can be used straight away after the installation process As administrator however by using the Download Manager you can customize what should be displayed on the web page s You are also able to move components between the two versions of the web page i e between the one targeted at system administrators and the one targeted at end users To move a component right click it and select the web page version you want to move the component to Even though the Download Manager lets you control whi
268. er outages Use a UPS 345 346 Prebuffer 167 Predefined events devices 157 223 Predefined events external 225 Predefined events hardware 222 Prerequisites 49 240 256 322 Prerequisites for access roles for XProtect Enterprise servers 290 Prerequisites for clustering 45 Presets tab monitor properties 181 182 192 Presets tab XProtect Smart Wall properties 178 179 182 Preview 119 Principles for setting up federated sites 307 Privacy Mask tab camera properties 89 116 124 127 Privacy masking in Milestone Interconnect 127 Privacy masking settings 125 Product overview 12 Protect recording databases from corruption 111 345 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties 115 127 132 174 193 194 205 210 215 PTZ Presets tab camera properties 127 131 174 195 204 209 215 220 PTZ rights 266 PTZ tab video encoders 115 173 R Read and copy logs 274 Read failover recording server status icons 340 Read microphone list s status icons 139 Read recording server icons 111 Head server service icons management recording and failover 77 350 352 Read speaker list s status icons 145 Read the camera list s status icons 116 Read the input list s status icons 150 Read the output list s status icons 155 Record tab overview 104 115 137 139 145 165 166 192 193 220
269. er via e mail SMTP is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers Port 80 While not directly used by the system but by management servers port 80 is typically used by the Internet Information Services IIS Default Web Site for running the Management Server Service Port 443 Used by the basic user authentication process where both management server and the service channel must keep this port open at all times Port 554 Used by recording servers for RTSP traffic which is used for controlling streaming from cameras Port 1024 and above outbound only except ports listed in the following Used by recording servers for HTTP traffic between cameras and servers Port 5210 Used for communication between recording servers and failover recording servers when databases are merged after a failover recording server has been running Port 5432 Used by recording servers to listen for Transmission Control Protocol TCP information some devices use TCP for sending event messages Port 7563 Used by recording servers and XProtect Smart Client The main entry to the recording server where the ImageServer interface is implemented Also used for handling PTZ camera control commands and for retrieving image stream from clients etc Port 7609 Used by the report server to communicate with the Data Collector Server service and must always be keep open on the machine running the Data Collector Port 8080 Used for communication between i
270. era supports only one of the enabled live streams is able to record video at a time To change which stream to use for recording use the Record box About multi streaming on page 135 Add a new stream see Add a stream on page 136 About multi streaming You manage multi streaming on the Streams tab The tab is only available when the selected camera or device group supports multi streaming Viewing of live video and playing back of recorded video does not necessarily require the same settings to achieve the best result To handle this your system and some cameras support multi streaming with which you can establish as many independent streams as the camera supports to the www milestonesys com 135 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 recording server Either one stream for live viewing and another stream for playback purposes or two separate live streams with different resolution encoding and frame rate Example 1 live and recorded video e For viewing live video your organization may prefer MPEG4 at a high frame rate e For playing back recorded video your organization may prefer MJPEG at a lower frame rate because this will help preserve disk space Example 2 two live videos e For viewing live video from a local operating point your organization may prefer MPEG4 at a high frame rate to have the highest quality of video available e For viewing live video from a
271. ers start recording 3 seconds before on the device on which event occurred Perform action 30 seconds after stop recording immediately Default record on motion rule Ensures that as long as motion is detected in video from cameras the video is recorded provided recording is enabled see Record tab overview on page 164 for the cameras in question recording is by default enabled IMPORTANT While the default rule specifies recording based on detected motion it does not guarantee that video will be recorded as individual cameras recording may have been disabled for one or more cameras Even when recording is enabled bear in mind that the quality of recordings may be affected by individual camera s recording settings In case you accidentally delete the default record on motion rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action on Motion Started from All Cameras start recording 3 seconds before on the device on which event occurred Perform stop action on Motion Stopped from All Cameras stop recording 3 seconds after www milestonesys com 219 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Default record on request rule Ensures that video is recorded automatically when an external request occurs provided recording is enabled see Record tab overview on page 164 for the cameras in question recording is by default enabled IMPORTANT The request is always triggered b
272. ers you several ways of detecting and adding hardware devices The system scans automatically for available hardware on the recording server s local network Tip If you are new to the system then use the Express hardware Express Recommended detection as it will guide you through each of the steps involved in detecting and adding your IP devices Cannot be used for adding remote systems in Milestone Interconnect setups The system scans defined network IP address ranges and detects Address range scanning hardware models Manual Specify the IP address and port for each device www milestonesys com 78 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Add hardware connected via a remotely connected server All options offer the possibility of automatically detecting the correct Remote connect hardware hardware drivers Cannot be used for adding remote systems in Milestone Interconnect setups It is strongly advised that you only add a physical hardware device to one recording server at the time Express The Express recommended option automatically discovers hardware models on the recording server s local network 1 Select Express recommended and click Next 2 Specify user names and passwords if your hardware devices are not using the factory default user name and password You can add as many user names and passwords as required by clicking Add Remember to select the Include check
273. erties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Expand the required recording server to see which devices are connected to the recording server While the Management Client loads information about the recording server the text expanding is displayed next to that recording server Recording Server Recording Servers i3 My Recording Server expanding Add hardware to a recording server You add IP hardware such as cameras video encoders etc to recording servers in your system through the Add Hardware wizard The wizard helps you scan your network for relevant hardware Refer to the wizard Add hardware on page 78 for more information Manage hardware on a recording server You have several options for managing hardware such as cameras video encoders and so on on recording servers in your system refer to About devices on page 113 www milestonesys com 95 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Remove a recording server IMPORTANT Removing a recording server will remove all configuration specified for the recording server through the Management Client including all of the recording server s associated hardware Cameras input devices and so on 1 Expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select the Recording Servers node 2 Right click the no longer required recording server in the Over
274. erver service see Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service on page 339 2 Right click the notification area s Failover Recording Server service icon again 3 From the menu that appears select Change Settings The Failover Recording Server Settings window appears You are able to change the following setting o Management server hostname IP address Lets you specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the management server with which the failover recording server should be able to communicate www milestonesys com 339 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 View status messages 1 Right click the notification area s Milestone Failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Show Status Messages The Failover Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages View version information Knowing the exact version of your Failover Recording Server service is an advantage if you need to contact product support 1 Right click the notification area s Milestone Failover Recording Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select About 3 A small dialog opens The dialog will show the exact version of your Failover Recording Server service www milestonesys com 340 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advan
275. es you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type gt In this example we want to base the rule on a time period Therefore we select Perform an action in a time interval First Select the nde type to generate O Perform an action on event Peaform an action m a time interval Click Next to go to step 2 of the wizard 4 Onstep 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply gt In this example we want the rule to apply within a specific time profile so we select the time condition Within selected time in lt time profile gt First Select conditions to apply Within selected lime in time profe Outside selected time in time profile Within the time period startlime to endlime Day of week is days Based on our selection the wizard prompts us to specify the required time profile in the rule description Next Edit the rule descnption click an underlined tem Perform an action in a time interval pes selected time in t me profife Click the underlined item to specify the exact content of the rule description www milestonesys com 209 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 nd In this example we click the time profile link select the time profile Daytime and click OK
276. es your Microsoft SQL Server s transaction log If you have a smaller setup and do not feel the need for regular scheduled backup refer to Manual backup and restore of system configuration on page 323 The management server stores your system s configuration in a database When backing up restoring management server s make sure that this database is included in the backup restore Flush SQL server transaction log What is the SQL server transaction log and why does it need to be flushed Each time a change in the system s data occurs the SQL Server will log this change in its transaction log regardless whether it is a SQL Server on your network or a SQL Server Express edition The transaction log is essentially a security feature that makes it possible to roll back and undo changes to the SQL Server database The SQL Server by default stores its transaction log indefinitely and therefore the transaction log will over time build up more and more entries The SQL Server s transaction log is by default located on the system drive and if the transaction log just grows and grows it may in the end prevent Windows from running properly Flushing the SQL Serve s transaction log from time to time is a good idea However flushing it does not in itself make the transaction log file smaller but it prevents it from growing out of control Your system does not however automatically flush the SQL Server s transaction log at specific intervals You ca
277. ess Afterwards you may be prompted to restart your computer Do so and after restart depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear Accept these and the installation continues When done your XProtect installation completes and you can get started with see Get started on page 58 your surveillance system Install your system Distributed option 5 Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 31 steps 1 2 Select Distributed A non editable list of components to be installed appears Click Continue Choose the type of SQL server database you want see Select SQL type on page 34 Also specify the name of the SQL server Click Continue Select either Create new database or Use existing database and name the database see Select SQL type on page 34 If you choose the latter select to Keep or Overwrite existing data Click Continue Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 31 step 4 5 Install your system Custom option Note that with this option you can select or clear all of the components to install except the management server The management server is by default selected in the component list and will always be installed If one is already installed it will be updated 1 2 Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 31 steps 1 2 Select Custom A list of components to be installed appears Apart from the management
278. et up to use on the management server When you are connected to the surveillance system server you will see a welcome page b Onthe welcome page click the required language link for the XProtect Smart Client Installing from software DVD alternative method Insert the surveillance system software DVD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install Milestone XProtect Smart Client link Tip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button names depend on your browser version 2 he XProtect Smart Client Setup wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions install the XProtect Smart Client silently For surveillance system administrators it is possible to deploy XProtect Smart Client or to users computers using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server SMS Such tools let administrators build up databases of hardware and software on local networks The databases can then among other things be used for distributing and installing software applications such as XProtect Smart Client over local networks 1 Locate the Smart Client installation program exe file MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe or Miles
279. ething different so we select Perform stop action after lt time gt First Select stop crtena C Petom stop action on event Perform stop action after a time In the rule description the wizard now prompts us to specify the required time ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor 3use patrolling on PTZ Camera and Move PTZ Camera to position PTZ Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 50 rform action time We click the time link specify 15 seconds and click OK Relative Time E3 Select tine secs 154 www milestonesys com 217 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The rule description now indicates the 15 seconds selected ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item rform an action on input Activated from Back Door Sensor 3use patrolling on PTZ Camera and Move PTZ Camera to position PTZ Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 50 rform action 15 seconds after Based on the start action pause patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action resume patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is resumed immediately after the 15 second pause ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor ause patrolling on PTZ Camera and Mo
280. everal events Priority When the system receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered If a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority for example two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered Check if expression matches An event string to be tested against the expression entered in the event string Expression field Generic event test properties String to send as generic An event string to be tested from within the system by the event event server as a generic event Data source to send event string to See Generic event data source properties on page 253 www milestonesys com 252 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Echo from event server and local error message Administrator s Manual A window displaying the echo of the string from the event server in the following default format X Y Z Name of generic event X request number Y number of characters Z number of matches with a generic event Name of generic event name entered in the Name field If no generic events are defined or if no data sources are enabled an information message is displayed instead Other echo formats can be
281. evice on the Record tab see Record tab overview on page 164 Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions In one of the following steps the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop recording Without this stop action recording would potentially continue indefinitely You also have the option of specifying further stop actions Begin data feed from devices to the system When the feed from a device is started data will be transferred from the device to the system in which case live viewing and recording is possible depending on the data type IMPORTANT While this type of action enables access to selected devices data feeds it does not guarantee that data is recorded as recording settings must be specified separately When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify on which devices feeds should be started Tip Your system has a default rule ensuring that feeds are always started on all cameras Note however that the default rule may have been manually deactivated or modified Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions In one of the following steps the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop feed You also have the option of specifying further stop actions Note that using the compulsory stop action Stop feed to stop the feed from a device means that data will no
282. expand Basics right click License Information and select Activate Licenses Online 1 Activate Online opens o If you are an existing user enter your user name and password to log into the Software Registration Service Center o Ifyou are a new user click the Create new user link to set up a new user account in the ooftware Registration Service Center and then follow the registration procedure If you have not yet registered your Software License Code SLC you must do so 2 f you select Save password the password is saved on the computer and can be accessed by other users of the computer 3 Click Next and follow the wizard s remaining steps to activate your licenses When your licenses have been activated you see a confirmation 4 Click Finish to end the activation Under rare circumstances you may receive an error message during online activation Often such error messages inform you that you forgot to include account details Should you receive an error message which refers to a slightly more complicated problem the following list of selected error messages help you identify the problem and find out what to do gt Could not acquire a new license Could not acquire a new license An error occurred on the activation server Please try later gt Could not acquire a new license Access was denied gt Could not acquire a new license The format of the activation request was invalid Could not acquire a ne
283. f the devices chosen is currently moving to another location Database is active and running and moving data from one or more selected devices from one location to another Data for the device is currently moving to another Database is active and running and moving data from the selected device is currently moving from one location to another location Status information about the database cannot be collected when Information unavailable in database is in failover mode For more information see Manage failover mode failover recording servers see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 www milestonesys com 167 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Further down in the Storage area you can see which archive s are associated with the selected database their individual status OK or Old Storage location and how much space they each use In the Total used space field the total soaced used for the entire storage Is indicated Remote recording camera remote system The remote recording option is only available if the selected camera supports remote storage or is a camera under a Milestone Interconnect remote site What is remote recording Remote recording also known as edge recording is both a physical camera supporting edge storage and a remote recording system in a Milestone Interconnect setup To minimize loss if a network breaks down s
284. f the parent child setup Refer to Manage Milestone Federated Architecture on page 312 for details on how to work with MFA www milestonesys com 302 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Important prerequisites when running federated sites The easiest way to make MFA work correctly is to prepare your system for this feature during installation There are certain important prerequisites that you must ensure already at the time of installing your management server This can be done in different ways choose between the procedures in alternative 1 3 Alternative 1 Connect sites from the same domain with common domain user and customize the installation of the management server to MFA Before installation of the management server a common domain user should be created and used as the administrator on all computers involved in the MFA Depending on whether you select Custom or Typical during installation of the management server make sure to select the appropriate procedure Note that a typical installation requires more configuration on all sites before MFA will work properly Custom installation 1 Start the management server installation see Installation overview on page 29 and select Custom 2 Select to install the Management Server service using a user account The selected user account must be the administrator on all management servers and must also be used wh
285. f the server to the URL address of the cluster This step only applies to the first server in the cluster Click OK Network Configuration X Server Settings Server address LAN hte IM uClustern Server ackkess WANI Cancel 3 Inthe Add Remove Registered Services window click Close Exit the Management Client 4 Stop the management server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 and the IIS Read about how to stop the IIS at Microsoft s homepage 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for all subsequent servers in the cluster this time pointing to the existing SQL database However for the last server in the cluster on which you install the management server do not stop the Management Server service Next in order to take effect the Management Server service must be configured as a generic service in the failover cluster www milestonesys com 46 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 1 On the last server on which you have installed the management server go to Start Administrative Tools open Windows Failover Cluster Management In the Failover Cluster Management window expand your cluster right click Services and Applications and select Configure a Service or Application SS Failover Cluster Management File Action View Help re gt ic L JE S Failover Cluster Management S My Cluster More Achi
286. f you have configured Matrix recipients see About Matrix recipients on page 187 on your system From the XProtect Smart Client it is possible to send video to selected Matrix recipients The Matrix tab lets you specify which Matrix recipients should be selectable for this purpose in the XProtect Smart Client The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Smart Client or other relevant clients www milestonesys com 268 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The following rights are available e Visible Determines whether users groups with the selected role will be able to select and send video to the Matrix recipient from the XProtect Smart Client Alarms rights Specifying role rights on the Alarms tab is only relevant if your use alarms in your system setup to provide central overview and control of your federated installation including any other XProtect servers Refer to Alarms on page 279 The Alarms tab lets you specify which alarm rights i e how alarms can be handled in the XProtect Smart Client refer to Alarms on page 279 users groups with the selected role should have The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower
287. f your system is upgraded from an older version of the system the old values Very Low Low Medium High and Very High have been translated as follows o Very Low 1000 o Low 2000 o Medium 3000 o High 4000 o Very High 5000 If your system is upgraded to version 4 0 or future versions rule priority settings is a new feature Existing rules created without priority automatically get priority 1 It is strongly recommended to reconsider this lowest possible priority for all affected rules When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select a patrolling profile Only one patrolling profile on one device can be selected it is not possible to select several patrolling profiles This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one patrolling profile has been defined for the device s You define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions In one of the following steps the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop patrolling Without this stop action patrolling would potentially never stop You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Pauses PTZ patrolling the continuous moving of a
288. fill in the needed info Remember to select Front page as an element to include in you report otherwise the front page you customize will not be included in your report 4 Click Formatting to customize your font page size and margins In the window that appears select the wanted settings 5 When you are ready to export click Export and select a name and save location for you report Tip Remember not all fonts support all special characters If you have trouble viewing your special characters try selecting a different font www milestonesys com 272 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Configure report details The following is available when setting up reports o Select All Selects all elements in the list o Clear All Clears all elements in the list o Front Page Opens a dialog allowing you to customize the front page o Formatting Opens a dialog allowing you to format the report o Export Opens a dialog allowing you to select the save location for the report and create the pdf Server logs Manage logs In the Management Client you are able to view and copy contents from different logs related to the management server The different logs have different purposes e Audit Log records user activity e Event Log records event related information see Events overview on page 221 e Rule Log records rules see Manage rules on page 226 in which the Make
289. for managing speakers e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices select Speakers expand the required device group and select the required speaker If no device groups are available you must first group your speakers Refer to About Device Groups on page 139 for information about creating groups as well as adding speakers to your groups e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server and select the required speaker Check the product release notes to verify that speakers are supported for the devices and firmware used Enable speakers When speakers are detected with the wizard Add Hardware they are by default disabled You can enable speakers when needed If a device has several speakers you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the speaker is placed 3 Right click the required speaker and select Enabled On some devices a speaker can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a speaker does not work after enabling it in the Ma
290. fore the initial boundaries of a recording It allows you to view video from before an event occurred If for example you are going to use the event in an rule specifying that recording should start when the event occurs being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may also be important An example could be if you are using five seconds of prebuffering video from the camera will always be stored provisionally for five seconds If the event occurs five seconds worth of video will be available for attaching to any recording triggered by the event as specified in a rule PTZ tab video encoders The PTZ tab lets your enable PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom for video encoders It is only available if the selected hardware is a video encoder www milestonesys com 171 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 What is a video encoder A video encoder also known as video server is a piece of hardware which is able to stream video from a number of connected cameras Video encoders contain image digitizers making it possible to connect analog cameras to a network For video encoders the use of PTZ must be enabled on the hardware level before you can use the PTZ features of PTZ cameras attached to the video encoder The Settings tab lets you enable the use of PTZ separately for each of the video encoder s channels To access the PTZ tab select the required hardware in the Overview
291. g Server service on page 347 on all management servers in the cluster 2 Uninstall see Remove system components on page 53 the management server on all servers in the cluster 3 Use the procedure for installing multiple management servers in a cluster as described for install in a cluster on page 45 IMPORTANT When installing make sure to reuse the existing SQL configuration database which will automatically be upgraded from the old existing database version to the new one www milestonesys com 47 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Multiple recording server instances Some information in this section may not be relevant due to differences in software versions It is only recommended to install multiple instances of the Recording Server service on the same server under the following conditions If you e arerunning XProtect Corporate and are upgrading from XProtect Corporate version 4 1 or older and e are already running more 32 bit Recording Server service instances on the same server oince it is not possible to move devices cameras from one recording server to another setups running more than one 32 bit Recording Server service instances on the same server will need to maintain this structure For all other setups the newer 64 bit recording server eliminates the need for running more 32 bit instances on the same server Install multiple recording ser
292. g configurations for the event server in the same way This is done directly in the affected configuration file www milestonesys com 281 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 How to update port number information 1 Onthe server running the XProtect event server click Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 2 Right click the Milestone XProtect event server click Stop 3 Open C Program Files Milestone XProtect event server config XPconfig xml in Microsoft Notepad or another editing tool of your choice 4 Inthe XML file edit the port number information so it matches the port number s specified in XProtect Central add on in the XProtect Enterprise Server lt host gt guid gt cb4735ae fb4a 48e2 b8b5 a9f7 2309dSad guid gudParent 00000000 0000 0000 0000 00000000000 id gt 10 100 0 183 lt c gt user gt SysTest lt user gt pass gt 06 ZTZ7hLAB lt pess gt IMuser gt SysTest lt iMus IMpass 06 ZTZ7hLA8 IMport gt 8080 lt IMport event True event server ype 1 serverT ype engineName XPE Systest4 v2 engineName gt lt path gt 5 Save the changes you have made to the XML file 6 Restart the XProtect event server by repeating steps 1 amp 2 Instead of Stop click Restart Alarm definitions IMPORTANT Alarms can register and handle events from both your system and any other XProtect sy
293. g deleted or archived depending on archive settings The retention time must always be longer than the retention time of the last archive or the recording database This is due to the fact that the number of retention days stated for an archive includes all retention stated earlier in the process Example If you specify 24 hours recordings must be at least a day old before they will be archived If archiving is scheduled to take place before the 24 hours have passed only recordings older than 24 hours will be archived Bear in mind that the archive s scheduling may mean that recordings will be older than the specified number of hours before they are archived This may especially be the case if you specify an archiving schedule with long time spans between archiving Archiving is set up by adjusting several interdependent settings see About storage and archiving on page 88 Select the maximum number of gigabytes of recording data to save in the recording database Example If you want to store up to 100 gigabytes of recording data in the database select 100 Recording data in excess of the specified number of gigabytes will be auto moved to the first archive in the list if any is specified or deleted IMPORTANT This is one of two maximum size settings for the storage area The Retention Time setting specified earlier may mean that recordings are removed from the archive before the specified number of gigabytes is reached
294. g opens Depending on server type the dialog shows the exact version of your Management Server service or Recording Server service www milestonesys com 349 Services administration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Recording server settings When you configure Recording server settings specify the following IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the management server to which the recording server Address should be connected This information is necessary in order for the recording server to be able to communicate with the management server Port number to be used when communicating with the management Fat server Default is port 9993 You can change this if you need to Port number to be used for handling web server requests for example for handling PTZ camera control commands and for browse and live requests from XProtect Smart Client Default is port 7563 You can this if you need to Web server port Port number to be used when the recording server listens for TCP Alert server port information some devices use TCP for sending event messages Default is port 5432 You can change this if you need to Port number to be used when the recording server listens for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP information Also some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages and or for sending images to the surveillance system server via e mail SMTP is a St
295. g sequences However once the network is re established the central site automatically retrieves remote recordings covering the down period This requires use of the Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connection is restored option see Remote recording camera remote system on page 168 Naturally you can mix any of the above solutions to fit your organizations special needs Milestone Interconnect and licensing Cameras under remote sites in a Milestone Interconnect setup are listed on the License Information page see License information on page 72 of the central site They are listed according to the same rules as other devices and are named just like normal devices but with Milestone Interconnect in front like this e Milestone Interconnect Device Channels e Milestone Interconnect Cameras Update remote site hardware 1 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system Right click it 3 From the menu that appears select Update Hardware This opens the Update hardware dialog 4 This dialog lists all changes devices removed updated and added in the remote system since your Milestone Interconnect setup was established or refreshed last Click Confirm to update your central site
296. g server for retrieving events setting settings etc as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the de W recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible 3 33g Item database being repaired ee Hs R vh Item requires attention e P 2 Pp q co v Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this Tp a g example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is 9 z i x recording since a recording item is also an enabled item Manage output On many devices you are able to attach external units to output ports on the device This allows you to activate deactivate lights sirens etc through the system Output may be used when creating rules see Manage rules on page 226 You can create rules that automatically activate or deactivate outputs and rules that trigger actions when the state of an output is changed Output can also be triggered manually from the Management Client and the XProtect Smart Client Devices output ports are automatically detected when you add the devices to the system through the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 78 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use By default output are disabled You can enable output when needed You have two entry points for managing out
297. g to handle a hard disk drive e Fire water etc avoid www milestonesys com 344 Database corruption Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 SQL database administration Update SQL server address When a system is installed as a trial or if a large installation is restructured a need for using a different SQL database may arise This can be handled with the Update SQL Server Address tool With it you can change the addresses of the SQL servers used by the management server the event server and the log server Only limitation is that you cannot change the management server and event server SQL address at the same time as the log sever SQL address It is however possible to do so sequentially IMPORTANT This SQL update must be done locally on the machine where the management server event server or log server are installed you cannot do it from the Management Client If your management server and event server are not located on the same machine you can still use the tool but you will have to run it on both the machine where the management server is installed and on the machine where the event server is installed Updating management server and or event server SQL address 1 If your management server and event server are located a together on the same machine and you wish to update both SQL addresses go to the machine where your management server is installed b on different machines and you wish to
298. ganization disable virus scanning on the management server Port numbers of special interest Your system uses particular ports when communicating with other computers cameras and so on www milestonesys com 43 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 What is a port A port is a logical endpoint for data traffic Networks use different ports for different types of data traffic Therefore it is sometimes necessary to specify which port to use for particular data communication Most ports are used automatically based on the types of data included in the communication On TCP IP networks port numbers range from 0 to 65536 but only ports 0 to 1024 are reserved for particular purposes For example port 80 is used for HTTP traffic which is used when you view web pages In your XProtect system you must therefore make sure that certain ports are open for data traffic on your network Ports used by the system If nothing else is stated ports are both inbound and outbound Port 20 and 21 Used by recording servers to listen for File Transfer Protocol FTP information some devices use FTP for sending event messages FTP is a standard for exchanging files across networks Port 25 Used by recording servers to listen for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP information Also some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages and or for sending images to the surveillance system serv
299. gation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select Roles For more information refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles and Specify rights of a role on page 262 Roles may also determine access to views in clients Note that renaming a role will not change the name of a view group based upon the role More about administrators role The Administrators role is predefined and cannot be deleted Users and groups with the Administrators role have complete and unrestricted access to the entire system For this reason it is not necessary to specify role settings for the Administrators role Because the Administrators role has complete and unrestricted access it is associated with the Default Smart Client Profile profile and does not have a time profile see Manage time profiles on page 235 You add users and groups to the Administrators role just as with any other role refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles A s Users amp Groups IMPORTANT Users with local machine administrator rights on the computer running the management server will automatically have administrator rights on the management server It is therefore important that you verify which users have local machine administrator rights on the computer running the management server Only users whom you trust as administrators of your system should have local machine administrator rights on the computer running the management server Ad
300. gement server installation see Install your system Single Server option on page 31 Event server o What Stores and handles incoming alarms and map functionality and receives analytic and generic events from system servers including any XProtect servers in a possible federated hierarchy This enables powerful monitoring and instant overview of alarms and maps and possible technical problems within your systems If your setup does not have an event server installed neither of the features mentioned under this bullet will work o Where Usually installed on the same server as the management server and runs as a service Log server o What Provides the necessary functionality for logging information from your system www milestonesys com 13 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 o Where Usually installed on the same server as the management server and runs as a service Service channel o What Enables automatic and transparent configuration communication between servers and clients in your system o Where Usually installed on the same server as the management server and runs as a service Recording server What Used for recording video and for communicating with cameras and other devices In large installations more than one recording server is often used on the surveillance system Failover recording servers can be set up to take over if a recording server becomes temporaril
301. grams gt Microsoft SQL Server 2008 gt SQL Server Management Studio Express 1 Inthe tool do the following o When connecting specify the name of the required SQL Server Use the account under which the database was created o Find the Surveillance database containing your entire system configuration including event server recording servers cameras inputs outputs users rules patrolling profiles etc o Make arestore of the Surveillance database and make sure to e Select to backup from device e Select backup media type file e Find and select your backup file Surveillance bak www milestonesys com 322 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Select to overwrite the existing database 2 Follow the instructions in the tool to the end If you also backed up the SurveillanceLog database from the old management server restore it on the new management server using the same method Note that the system basically does not work while the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 is stopped it is important to remember to start the services again once you have finished restoring the database Manual backup and restore of system configuration Backing up your system database is always recommended In case of a disaster recovery scenario this offers you the ability to quickly restore your system c
302. gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit Microsoft NET 4 0 and Internet Information Services IIS 5 1 or newer Software Computer running log server CPU Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Dual Core recommended RAM Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Adapter eee GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Hard Disk Space Minimum 10 GB free depends on number of servers cameras rules and logging settings www milestonesys com 19 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Microsoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter gt Microsoft Window
303. h it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time 197 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Save attached Ensures that when an image is received from the Images Received event Image see Events overview on page 221 sent via SMTP e mail from a camera it is saved for future usage In future other events might also be able to trigger this action No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Activate archiving Starts archiving on one or more archives When you select this type of action on archives the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select required archives No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time On lt site gt trigger Relevant mostly within Milestone Federated Architecture see Milestone user defined Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 but can also be used in a event single site setup Used for triggering a user defined event on a site normally a remote site within a federated hierarchy No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it w
304. h must occur in order for the rule to apply for example Motion Started www milestonesys com 230 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 o Devices recording server management server When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link lets you specify the devices on which the event should occur in order for the rule to apply Depending on your event specification you may be able to select from a list of cameras inputs outputs etc In this example illustration the selectable devices are all cameras Select Group Members E3 Device Groups Fiecondert rel ii Revoir Sene PS Cameras 1 0n As 209 HFD Camera 10 10 50 72 zi ld Recording Serve 1 pap Came 1 on tors 201M Comers ETO SO 74 B Camera 1 on Accs 205 mt om ies 212 PTS Comers 10 10 50 71 Th Camera 1 on Adis 203 Fp Lanes 1 ones 2330 Camera 10 100150 583 B Carers 1 on car 208 gt area n Ast 711 Th Camera on Avan 212 Tp Camera 1 on dicar 233 Sp Camera l on Axis P33 Cp Camera 1 on jr Q7 T Lar in Aat 7 You specify the required devices by moving them from the Available devices list to the Selected devices list To move a device from the Available devices list to the Selected devices list either select the device and click the Add button double click the device or simply drag the device from one list to the other Tip When devices are grouped into so called
305. h you may want to configure some of the new features in the new version www milestonesys com 48 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Backward compatibility with recording servers from versions older than this current version is limited You can still access recordings on such older recording servers but to be able to change their configuration they must be of the same version as this current one Therefore it is highly recommended to upgrade all recording servers in your system When you do an upgrade including your recording servers you are asked whether you want to update or keep your video device drivers If you choose to update it might take a few minutes for your hardware devices to make contact with the new video device drivers after restarting your system This is due to several internal checks being performed on the newly installed drivers Prerequisites e Have your temporary license ic file ready The license file changes when your SLC changes so you are likely to have received a new license file when you purchased the new version When you install the management server the wizard asks you to specify the location of your license ic file which the system verifies before you can continue If you do not have your license file contact your XProtect product vendor e Have your new product version ready If you have not purchased the software on a DVD you can downloa
306. he XProtect Smart Client is not updated with information about configuration changes made by other users in the XProtect Smart Client This means that users risk overwriting each others configuration changes If XProtect Smart Clients are not time synchronized with the computer running the Service Channel service you see an error informing you of this Management Server service and Recording Server service When the management server software is installed you are able to check the state of the Management Server service by looking at the Management Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the management server Likewise when the recording server software is installed you are able to check the state of the Recording Server service by looking at the Recording Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the recording server in question The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Management Server service Recording Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is also known as the system tray It is located at the far right of the management recording server s Windows taskbar IMPORTANT When the Recording Server service is running it is very important that neither Windows Explorer nor other programs are accessing Media Database files or folders associated with www milestonesys com 347 Services administration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administ
307. he camera to the required preset position While you do this you are able to verify the position of the camera through the preview image 3 Specify a name or number for the preset position in the Name field Tip Use a descriptive name the name may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about the item e g when using it in a rule 4 Optionally type a description of the preset position in the Description field e Click OK This will close the Add Preset window and add the preset position to the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera How to use the navigation buttons The navigation buttons let you move the camera as follows moves the view up and to the left up up and to the right to the left to its default position to the right down and to the left down down and to the right Zooms in one zoom level per click Zooms in one zoom level per click e le F 9 5 s 9 9 How to use the axes navigation sliders The navigation sliders let you to move the camera along each of its axes Click inside the sliders to move the sliders red handles to the required positions The slider for the X axis allowing you to pan left right is located immediately below the preview image The slider for the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down is located immediately to the left of the preview image www milestonesys com 132 Management Client
308. he events you define can subsequently be used in rules You can define events for a selected input but not for all inputs in a device group 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices and select Inputs 2 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required input www milestonesys com 148 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Select the Events tab and click Add Propertens T Configured Everts Select Driver Event ui Input Faing event OF Cae Ad Quito Gh Setting OQ no K venti 4 Inthe Select Driver Event dialog select the appropriate option Input Rising event Input Falling event or Input Changed event 5 Click OK Your selected type of input event will now appear in the Events tab s Configured events list To the right of the list settings for the selected input event are displayed in a table The table s first column lists available settings the second column lists the value of each setting The settings on the Events tab is determined entirely by the relevant devices and is likely to vary depending on the input selected Content may vary but you will typically see the following property e Enabled Select between True enabled or False disabled You are typically able to change the values 1 Select the row with the property you want to change 2 Click the button t
309. he hot standby will just take over again and also keep the recordings from the previous period Recordings www milestonesys com 333 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Ka are kept until they are merged back to the primary recorder or until the failover recording server runs out of disk space Will lose recordings A failover solution does not provide complete redundancy It is however a very reliable way of minimizing downtime When the recording server becomes available again the Failover Server service will make sure that the recording server is ready to store recordings again Only then is the responsibility for storing recordings handed back to the standard recording server So a loss of recordings at this stage of the process is very unlikely How will clients experience a failover setup Clients should hardly notice that a failover recording server is taking over There will however be a short break usually only some seconds when the failover recording server is taking over During this break there will be no access to video from the affected recording server Clients will be able to view live video as soon as the failover recording server has taken over Since recent recordings are stored on the failover recording server they will also be able to play back recordings from after the failover recording server took over Clients will not be able
310. he previous contents of position 5 are pushed to position 6 the previous contents of position 6 are pushed to position 7 and so on as illustrated in this example Element insertion Presets tab monitor properties The Presets tab displays a preview of the XProtect Smart Wall preset s Select a preset from the Preset drop down list Presets are created on the Smart Wall s Presets tab see Presets tab XProtect Smart Wall properties on page 178 To define how the monitor behaves when used with a selected preset click Edit This opens the Select View Members window 1 Click Clear if you want to delete the current layout in the preset so you can change it to another layout or keep it clear If kept clear this monitor is left untouched by the preset 2 Click View Layout to open the Select Layout window p www milestonesys com 181 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Inthe Select Layout window select which view layout to use with your monitor then click OK E c cot Cun E Leeni Ej es lelt 325 13 feb T4 EF 4x Ex E34 d 4 In the Select View Members window drag cameras from the Device Groups Recording Servers or Child Sites tab onto the view positions You can leave view positions blank so they are left untouched by the preset if you want to view other content 5 Click OK Manage roles with XProtect Smart Wall To specify which XProtect
311. he time period ends First Select stop cnteria Perform stop action when time interval ends The suggestion is also reflected in the rule description However we still need to specify exactly which stop action we want performed Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 7 Inthis step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions www milestonesys com 211 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 gt In this example Based on the start action start patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action stop patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is stopped immediately when the time period ends ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval thin selected time in Daytime tart patrolling on Parking Lot E cam 2 using My Patrolina Profile with PTZ priority 50 erform an action when time interval ends top patrollina immediately This is exactly what we want we do not need to change it Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window Name PTZ Cam trve v Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later
312. hen creating event based rules see Events overview on page 221 in the system Technically they occur on the actual hardware device rather than on the surveillance system Events based on signals from input and or output units connected to camera devices are managed elsewhere Refer to Manage inputs see Manage input on page 145 and Manage outputs see Manage output on page 150 In Milestone Interconnect setups some events originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but generic see Manage generic events on page 248 and user defined see Manage user defined events on page 243 events must be added manually To view events added after a Milestone Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 87 Microphone Some microphones are capable of creating events themselves These events can be used when creating event based rules see Events overview on page 221 in the system Technically they occur on the actual hardware device rather than on the surveillance system www milestonesys com 169 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Hardware Some hardware is capable of creating events itself These events can be used when creating event based rules see Events overview on page 221 in the system Technically they occur on the actual hardware device rather than on the surveillance syste
313. herefore the action Start recording has a compulsory stop action called Stop recording The Manage Rule wizard makes sure you specify stop actions when necessary Fist Select stop action to perform M Move camera to preseb position Set device output to state M Send notification to profile Each type of action is described additional actions may however be available if your system installation uses add on products special plug ins etc For each type of action stop action information is listed as well Start recording ON Begin recording i e begin saving data in the database from the selected www milestonesys com 190 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 lt devices gt Start feed on lt devices gt Set lt Smart Wall gt to lt preset gt www milestonesys com devices When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify when recording should start either immediately or a number of seconds before the triggering event beginning of the triggering time interval as well as on which devices the action should take place This type of action requires that recording has been enabled on the devices to which the action will be linked Being able to save data from before an event or time interval is only possible if prebuffering is enabled for the devices in question You enable recording and specify prebuffering settings for a d
314. hether you want to keep the recording server s recordings www milestonesys com o3 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Management Client Management Client overview The Management Client is the feature rich administration client used for configuration and day to day administration of your system The Management Client software is typically installed see Installation overview on page 29 on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar Management Client s elements Available functionality depends on your product version The Management Client window is divided into a number of panes The number of panes will change depending on your task The following illustrations outline the Management Client window s default layout the window layout can be customized see Customize the Management Client s layout on page 64 and may therefore be different on your computer e When working with recording servers and devices cameras inputs outputs the Management Client window contains a menu bar and four panes see Panes overview on page 5 7 www milestonesys com 54 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e When working with rules time and notification profiles users roles and so on the Management Client window typically contains a menu bar and three panes Eo ei N e When viewing logs the Management Cli
315. hich you want to assign addresses for multicast streams from the selected recording server do the following For each multicast camera feed the IP address port combination IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 6000 must be unique You can either use one IP address and many ports or many IP addresses and fewer ports By default the system suggests a single IP address and a range of 1000 ports but you can change this as required Example If you want multicast for 1000 cameras you would need either o 1 IP address and a range of 1000 different ports OR o arange of two IP addresses and a range of 500 different ports or any matching combination OR o arange of 1000 IP addresses and a single port When specifying the IP address in the Start field specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the End field Tip If required a range may include only one IP address IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 232 0 1 0 IP addresses for multicasting must be within a special range set aside for dynamic host allocation by IANA the authority overseeing global IP address allocation If using IPv4 there is a certain range which goes from 232 0 1 0 to 232 255 255 255 If using IPv6 on page 360 the range is different www milestonesys com 108 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Network tab recording server properties You define a recording server s public IP addre
316. hile the restoration of the configuration is being loaded Back up log server database Handle the SurveillanceLogServer database using the same method as when handling system configuration described earlier in this topic The SurveillanceLogServer database name may be different if you renamed the system configuration database contains all your system logs including errors reported by recording servers and cameras The database is located where the Log Server Service is installed typically the same place as your management server Backing up this database is not vital since it does not contain any system configuration but you may later appreciate having access to system logs from before the management server backup restore Restore system configuration from scheduled back up Prerequisite To prevent configurational changes being made while you restore the system configuration database stop the e Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 e Event Server Service can be done from Windows Services search for services msc on your machine Within Services locate Milestone XProtect Event Server e World Wide Web Publishing Service also known as the Internet Information Service IIS Learn how to stop the IIS at http technet microsoft com en us library cc732317 WS 10 aspx Open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express from Windows Start menu by selecting All Pro
317. ication area s Management Server service icon and select Restore Configuration 2 Next you are presented with an important note Read the contents of the note Click Restore 3 In the file open dialog browse to the location of the configuration backup file select it and click Open 4 The Restore Configuration window will now run showing progress and status information Wait for it to finish and click Close Your restore is finished www milestonesys com 325 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Back up restore fail and problem scenarios Problem The event server or other registered services log server etc have been moved after the system configuration was backed up Solution The user must choose which registered service configuration they want for the new system In this case it is actually possible to keep the new configuration after the system is restored to the old version Choose by looking at the host names of the services Problem If the event server is not located in the specified destination for instance if the old registered service setup is chosen the restore will fail Solution Do another restore Move system configuration to new management server It can sometimes be necessary to move the management server installation from one physical server to another The management server stores your system configuration in a database If you
318. ice While the recording server service is stopped your system will not be able to interact with devices connected to the recording server Consequently no live viewing or recording will be possible While the management server service is stopped you will not be able to use the Management Client at all 1 Access the server service on page 348 2 Select either Stop Recording Server service or Stop Management Server service www milestonesys com 348 Services administration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Change recording server settings To change basic settings for the Recording Server service such as which port numbers to use do the following To be able to change settings the Recording Server service must be stopped While the Recording Server service is stopped the system will not be able to interact with devices connected to the recording server Consequently no live viewing or recording will be possible 1 Refer to Access the server service on page 348 2 Select Stop Recording Server service 3 Right click the notification area s recording server icon 4 From the menu that appears select Change Settings The Recording Server Settings window see Recording server settings on page 350 appears Change the appropriate settings View status messages 1 Refer to Access the server service on page 348 2 Select Show Status Messages Depending on the current server type
319. ice drivers Video device drivers aremodules used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to a recording server When the video device drivers are removed communication between the recording server and the camera devices will no longer be possible To remove video device drivers use the following procedure on the recording server computer on which the video device drivers are installed The following procedure describes standard system component removal in recent Windows versions the procedure may be slightly different in older Windows versions 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and then o If using Category view find the Programs category and click Uninstall a program o If using Small icons or Large icons view select Programs and Features 2 Inthe list of currently installed programs right click the required Milestone program or service 3 Select Uninstall if you wish to uninstall all components Select Change if you only wish to uninstall some components 4 Follow the removal instructions Note that you should not remove the device pack when upgrading you can install the new version on top of the old one The device pack should only be removed when whole system is uninstalled www milestonesys com 330 Device drivers Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Failover recording servers regular hot standby About failover recording servers regular and hot st
320. ice is installed typically the same place as your management server Backing up this database is not vital since it does not contain any system configuration but you may later appreciate having access to system logs from before the management server backup restore Install new management server on new server step 2 Installing a management server is divided into three steps During step 2 of the installation on your new management server make sure you select Create a new database for the system configuration database even though you have a backup of the database from your old management server Next see Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 on page 328 overwrite the new and empty database by restoring the backup we just created Since you are going to overwrite the new and empty database it is important that it has the same name as the backed up database if your backed up database has the default name Surveillance just use the default name Surveillance when creating the new database too The password for the database is not significant in this backup restore context but we recommend that you just use the default setting Allow server to control password Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 Prerequisite To prevent configurational changes being made while you restore the system configuration database stop the www milestonesys com 328 Backup restore and move system configuration Milesto
321. icenses online on page 69 When your XProtect Smart Wall license is activated your XProtect Smart Wall is ready for configuration see Manage XProtect Smart Walls on page 176 Manage XProtect Smart Walls To add a new XProtect Smart Wall do the following 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Client and select XProtect Smart Wall In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click Smart Walls and select Add Smart Wall In the Add Smart Wall dialog type a name for the new XProtect Smart Wall and optionally a description The description here is only used internally in the Management Client In the General View Item Properties area see the Info tab see Info tab XProtect Smart Wall properties on page 177 select your settings for the new XProtect Smart Wall configuration click OK XProtect Smart Wall properties are configured on the Info tab see Info tab XProtect Smart Wall properties on page 177 Presets tab see Presets tab XProtect Smart Wall properties on page www milestonesys com 176 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 178 and Layout tab see Layout tab XProtect Smart Wall properties on page 179 in the Management Client s Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Info tab XProtect Smart Wall properties Fropedties Saat adl nl crat
322. ich the remote user caused the logged incident e Rule Name o Rule Log only Name of the rule triggering the log entry e Generator Type o Rule Log only Type of equipment on which the logged incident was generated Since the log entries are administrator defined and relate to incidents in your system generator type will normally be System e Generator Name o Rule Log only Name if any of the equipment on which the logged incident was generated Navigate log If a log contains more than one page of information you are able to navigate between the log s pages by clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the log pane ES gt rm Ls lets you move one step towards the log page containing the most recent log entries Lan indicates which page you are currently viewing e g page 1 of 171 By clicking the button you are able specify a page number and go straight to that page L lets you move one step towards the log page containing the oldest log entries Furthermore in the lower left corner lets you jump to a specific date and time in the log Change log language 1 In the bottom part of the log pane in the Show log in drop down box select the wanted language show 100 n Engish United State gt You can choose from the following log languages www milestonesys com 275 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 o Danish o English o French
323. icrosoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework DirectX 9 0 or newer and Software Windows Help WinHlp32 exe which you can download from http www microsoft com downloads Active Directory You normally add users from Active Directory although you can also add users without Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems It identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them www milestonesys com 22 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 If you wish to add users through the Active Directory service a server with
324. ide QUT Deunpaon cie s Shep Ts Tyge el sue First Select the rule hype bo generate Sr Pierfomn an action on eran C Reform an schon n s Bre internal Hina Edit thee nde dercnphion click an underlined dem form an ection on event hr device recerderimrver tac The wizard guides you through the process of specifying the content of your rule The wizard makes the process interactive yet intuitive based on your main selections it asks you to specify your exact requirements for the rule 2 Begin by specifying a name compulsory and a description optional of the new rule in the Name and Description fields respectively Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 hen select the required type of condition for the rule either a rule which performs one or more actions when a particular event occurs or a rule which performs one or more actions when a specific period of time is entered Perform an action on event If you select an event based rule the lower part of the wizard window will display an initial rule description Next Edit the rule description click an underined tem Perform an action on event from devices recorder Server Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content o Event Clicking the event link lets you select the event whic
325. ifferent on your system 1 Inthe Select Time window specify time range recurrence pattern and range of recurrence 2 Click OK Tip A time profile is able to contain several periods of time If you want your time profile to contain further periods of time add more single times or recurring times 1 When you have specified the required time periods for your time profile click OK in the Time Profile window Your new time profile is added to the Time Profiles list in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 If at a later stage you wish to edit or delete the time profile you can do that from the Time Profiles list Edit a time profile 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 s Time Profiles list right click the required time profile and select Edit Time Profile Tip Instead of right clicking to select Edit Time Profile you can select the required time profile and press F2 on your keyboard This will open the Time Profile window 2 Inthe Time Profile window edit the time profile as required www milestonesys com 237 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When you have made the required changes to the time profile click OK in the Time Profile window You will be returned to the Overview pane s Time Profiles list 4 October 2010 b SMTwWTFS 1 2 3456789 10 11 4949 15 16 17 18 46 26 34 22 23 24 25 4e 93 96 29 30 31
326. ill be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Create typical rules online The following is a introduction to examples of typical rules what you can do with them and how they can be constructed The descriptions are examples only If you wish to base real life rules on the examples substitute the examples device names and parameters with device names and parameters relevant to your system Numerous other rule configurations are possible If the rule you require is not listed among the examples it does not mean that the rule you require cannot be created in the System Introduction to basic rules e Use higher live frame rate on motion Ensures that when motion is detected on a specific camera the system will use a higher than default live frame rate for the camera and return to using the camera s default live frame rate when motion is no longer detected The effect is higher quality live video whenever there is motion When the specified part of the day ends the PTZ camera will stop patrolling Introduction to PTZ related rules e Use specific PTZ patrolling profile during specific part of day Ensures that during a specific part of the day a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile i e the exact definition of how patrolling should be carried out including the sequence for moving between preset positions timing settings etc
327. ill open the Export Log window Export Loe X Export information Fienene Fiber Level Emo Exped tange Stat date and time 12 05 2010 11 29 36 AM v End dete and ime 01 05 2001 11 2936 AM vw Hep j Emon Cance 4 Inthe Export Log window s Filename field specify a name for the exported log file By default exported log files will be saved in your My Documents folder However you are able to specify a different location by clicking the browse button next to the field 5 Anycriteria you have selected in order to target the content of the exported log will be listed in the Filters field The field is non editable if you find that you need to change your criteria close the window and repeat steps 2 4 6 Specify the time period you want the export to cover You do this by specifying the required boundaries in the Start date and time and End date and time fields respectively By clicking the arrow you are able to select the required date from a calendar Stat Gate and ame 02 01 2011 10 00 00 v 2n 3 9 410 11 12 13 5 16 W 18 19 4 5 26 2 Today 1 4 2011 www milestonesys com 277 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 To specify an exact time overwrite the required time elements hours minutes seconds with the required values In this example the hours element is being overwritten stat dale and iene 241 2011 1400 00 v Tip When y
328. imestamp has an image from the relevant video recording attached While the alarm information itself is stored on the event server the video recordings corresponding to the attached image are fetched from the relevant surveillance system server when users wish to view them Therefore if you must have access to video recordings from all your alarms make sure that video recordings from relevant cameras are stored on relevant surveillance system servers for at least as long as you intend to keep alarms on the event server Specify the number of days for which to keep events Specify the number of days for which to keep the Alarms log On all the above default setting is 30 days but you can define any number up to 99 999 days server space permitting The value 0 can be used to indicate keep closed alarms indefinitely server space permitting Select the check box if you want to save a separate log of server communication in addition to the regular log for the number of days specified Generic events Options settings The Options see Options on page 293 Generic Events tab lets you specify generic events and data source related settings Data source www milestonesys com Selectable data sources You can choose between two default data sources and any number of data sources created by you What to select depends on what kind of third party program you work with and or what kind of hard or software you want to interface from
329. in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 For descriptions of the exact functionality of the Patrolling tab refer to Patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 Creating the Rule 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane expand Rules and Events gt Rules gt Add New Rule 2 Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field gt In this example the rule will only cover a specific camera called PTZ Camera and how it should patrol on Saturday afternoons We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name Name Retail Area PTZ Saturday Aftemo Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 OnStep 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type gt In this example we want to base the rule on a time period Therefore we select Perform an action in a time interval First Select the nde type to generate C Perform an action on event O Perform an action in a time interval Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 4 Onthe wizard s next step specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply nd In this example we want the rule to apply between 1 00 and 8 00 on Saturdays so two time conditions are required one which specifies use of a start time and end time and one which specifies
330. in the XProtect Smart Client About Matrix recipients With Matrix an integrated solution for distributed viewing of video you can send video from any camera on a network operating your system to Matrix recipients A Matrix recipient is basically a computer capable of displaying Matrix triggered video There are two kinds of Matrix recipients computers running a dedicated Matrix Monitor application and computers running the XProtect Smart Client see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 www milestonesys com 187 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 To see a list of Matrix recipients configured in the Management Client expand the Client node in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select Matrix A list of Matrix configurations is displayed in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Each Matrix recipient regardless whether it is a computer with the Matrix Monitor or the XProtect omart Client must be configured to receive Matrix triggered video See the Matrix Monitor and XProtect Smart Client documentation for more information Add Matrix recipients To add an existing Matrix recipient i e an existing Matrix Monitor or XProtect Smart Client installation through the Management Client do the following 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the Clients node the
331. ines how an image is refreshed on a screen The image is refreshed by first scanning the odd lines in the image then scanning the even lines This allows a faster refresh rate because less information is processed during each scan However interlacing may cause flickering or the changes in half of the image s lines may be noticeable Availability of live tabs panes camera playback and overlay AE buttons bookmarks and live related MIP plug ins Availability of playback tabs panes layout of print reports Playback independent playback and bookmark and playback related MIP plug ins Availability of general setup panes buttons setup related MIP plug Setup in and rights to edit a map and is it possible to edit live video buffering Paths privacy masks video and still image formats and what to Exports include when exporting these export formats for XProtect Smart Client Player and much more Whether to include audio or not visibility of indication of time and Timeline motion and finally how to handle playback gaps Which type s of views should be available Expand the Layouts View Layouts folder and if relevant use Select All or Select None as shortcuts when making your selections Note that on some tabs in the Settings column most settings are selectable as drop downs However a few must be filled in as text fields In the Locked column many selections can be locked so that choices made here cannot be changed by users
332. ing the priority link lets you specify the priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 of the camera position In this example the wizard s suggestion immediately suits us fine so we leave it as it S www milestonesys com 216 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The rule description now indicates which camera will pause patrolling which preset position it will move to and how soon xt Edit the rule description click an underlined item rform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor use patrolling on PTZ Camera and Move PTZ Camera to position PTZ Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 500 Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard 7 Onstep 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started nd In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would make the camera pause patrolling then move to the preset position and remain there indefinitely Based on the elements in our rule description we therefore must select a stop criterion Since our rule is triggered by an event the wizard automatically suggests that we base our stop action on an event as well In the rule description the wizard even suggests that the stop action is performed when input is deactivated on the back door sensor However we want som
333. installed When you select this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select a Matrix recipient see About Matrix recipients on page 187 and one or more devices from which to display video on the selected Matrix recipient This type of action lets you select only a single Matrix recipient at a time If you want to make video from the selected devices appear on more than one Matrix recipient you should create a rule for each required Matrix recipient or use the XProtect Smart Wall feature Tip By right clicking a rule in the Rules list you are able to copy and re use the content of rules This way you can avoid having to create near identical rules from scratch As part of the configuration on the Matrix recipients themselves users must specify the port number and password required for the Matrix communication Make sure that the users have access to this information The users must typically also define the IP addresses of allowed hosts i e hosts from which commands regarding display of Matrix triggered video will be accepted In that case the users must also know the IP address of the management server 196 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Send SNMP trap Retrieve and store remote recordings from lt devices gt Retrieve and store remote recordings between lt start and end time from lt devices gt www milestonesys com or any router or firewall
334. instance see Install multiple recording server instances on page 48 on the current machine Select Failover 4 Specify failover recording server properties see Recording failover recording server install properties on page 34 Click Continue 5 When installing a failover recording server it is mandatory to use a particular user account This account see Select service account on page 35 If needed enter a password and confirm this Click Continue 6 Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 31 step 4 5 When the failover recording server is installed you can check its state see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 from the Failover Server service icon and start using it Install other components such as Milestone Mobile server All XProtect system components including the Milestone Mobile server are available for separate download and installation from the management server s download web page see Download www milestonesys com 33 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Manager download web page on page 38 controlled by the Download Manager You may need these separate component installers for installing for example e the Milestone Mobile server e acomponent on a dedicated server e oneor more failover recording servers Some components are only available from here About installing the Milestone Mo
335. iod of time sets a particular frame rate to be used when displaying live video from the selected cameras instead of the cameras default frame rate specified on the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 160 When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify which frame rate to set and on which devices Always verify that the frame rate number of frames per second you specify is available on the cameras in question Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions In one of the following steps the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Restore default live frame rate Without this stop action the default frame rate would potentially never be restored You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Sets a particular frame rate to be used when saving recorded video from the selected cameras in the database instead of the cameras default recording frame rate When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify which recording frame rate to set and on which cameras Specifying recording frame rate is only possible for MJPEG a video codec technology for compressing and decompressing data with which each frame is separately compressed into a JPEG image This type of action also requires that recording has been enabled on the cameras to which the action will be linked You enab
336. ion settings must be configured individually for each camera This is the case with exclude regions areas in which not to use motion detection as these are very likely to vary from camera to camera Enable and disable motion detection Motion detection is enabled by default To enable disable motion detection for a camera select clear the Motion tab s Motion detection check box When motion detection is disabled for a camera any motion detection related rules see Manage rules on page 226 for the camera will not work Motion detection settings www milestonesys com 119 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 You are able to specify settings relating to the amount of change required in a camera s video in order for the change to be regarded as motion You are also able to specify intervals between motion detection analysis any areas of an image in which motion should be ignored etc Sensitivity slider Determines how much each pixel in the camera s images must change before it is regarded as motion Drag the slider to the left for a higher sensitivity level and to the right for a lower sensitivity level The higher the sensitivity level the less change will be allowed in each pixel before it is regarded as motion The lower the sensitivity level the more change in each pixel will be allowed before it is regarded as motion This way you are able to allow insignificant changes whi
337. ired T A da vi Item requires attention s 2 Pp Lu co v Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this Sy amp gd example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is Q recording since a recording item is also an enabled item www milestonesys com 115 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Client tab camera properties The Client tab lets you specify information which will affect clients use of the selected camera To access the Client tab select the required camera in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select the Client tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Propostes y Cheni setir 2 Live macas Led in ult miopie Microphone 1 Cea Leta speak el Speaker 1 I Cle Ch llcul B5 rne ary Selling Bd Steams G Recod q Events fb Cier E Moin Client settings The system supports multicasting see Multicasting tab recording server properties on page 105 sending of single data packets to multiple recipients within a group thereby saving bandwidth and system resources of live streams from recording servers to XProtect Smart Clients see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 To enable multicasting of live streams from the selected Live multicast camera select the check box Hemember that for the feature to work multicasting see Multicasting tab recording ser
338. is example Based on our selection Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt the wizard automatically prompts us to specify the required camera patrolling profile and its priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 lext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval vithin the time period 1 00 to 8 00 and day of week is Saturday start patrolling on device using profile with PTZ priority priori We click the device link expand the relevant camera folder select the required camera and click OK Select Device X 3 Cameras Lab Cameras 13 Parking lot E 173 Red Sector Cameras 1 Retail Area PTZ Cameras Next we click the profile link select the required patrolling profile from our list of previously defined patrolling profiles and click OK Select a Profile ES gt Al Camera 7h LsbPTZ 1 7b Retail Arica PTZ Daytime Nek time Saturday Afteimoon Finally we click the priority link to set the priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 of the patrolling profile www milestonesys com 206 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 By doing this we have further specified the content of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time in
339. ish to make when clicking and dragging the grid to select regions for privacy masking Default is set to small which is equivalent to one square in the grid Pen size Privacy masking in Milestone Interconnect Note that in a Milestone Interconnect setup any privacy masking see Privacy Mask tab camera properties on page 123 set on a remote system will be disregarded by the central system PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties The Patrolling tab lets you create patrolling profiles the automatic movement of a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera between a number of preset positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 Before you are able to work with patrolling you must have specified at least two preset positions for the camera You manage patrolling on the Patrolling tab which is available only when the selected camera is a PTZ camera Patrolling profiles are the definitions of how patrolling should take place This includes the order in which the camera should move between preset positions how long it should remain at each position for etc You are able to create an unlimited number of such patrolling profiles and use them in your rules see Manage rules on page 226 For example you may create a rule specifying that one patrolling profile should be used during daytime opening hours and another during nights www milestonesys com 126 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS
340. isting presets The actual definition of the preset properties is managed on the individual monitor s Presets tab Adding a new preset 1 Click Add New This opens the Add Smart Wall Preset dialog 2 Type a name and optionally a description then click OK The description is only used internally in the Management Client 3 When you have created a preset either click Activate to enable the preset for XProtect Smart Client users or create a rule to activate the preset see Manage rules with XProtect Smart Wall on page 183 Editing an existing preset 1 Click Edit This opens the Add Smart Wall Preset dialog 2 Edit preset name and or description and click OK Deleting a preset 1 To delete a preset select the required preset in the list and click Delete www milestonesys com 178 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Layout tab XProtect Smart Wall properties The Layout tab displays a graphical overview of the XProtect Smart Wall Monitors added to the XProtect Smart Wall can be moved around Click Edit to change the monitor setup this opens the Edit Smart Wall Layout dialog Edit Sosa Wo asit hiser Hir 5 Apmis fii J Lx om J To move a monitor to a new position click the required monitor then
341. istration process When the SLC is registered use your system s Activate Online again remembering to log in with the same user name and password as you used when registering the SLC gt Could not acquire a new license The specified user is not allowed to activate this system Problem The SLC for your system has been registered by another user name than the user name e mail address you have specified on Activate Online s Enter new user information step Online activation must take place with the user name under which the SLC was registered What to do Find out under which user name the SLC was registered then activate as an existing user selectable on Activate Online s first step If in doubt about which user name was used for registering the SLC contact Milestone support quoting your SLC gt Could not acquire a new license The specified user name or password was not correct Problem License activation was not possible to due to a problem with the user name or password you have specified on Activate Online s Enter new user information step What to do Verify that you have typed user name and password exactly as they were specified when you registered the SLC for your system If in doubt about which user name was used for registering the SLC contact Milestone support quoting your SLC gt Could not acquire a new license Too many licenses for camera feeds requested Problem If you have added more camera feeds to your
342. istrator s Manual VMS 2013 Database corruption Protect recording databases from corruption If a recording server s databases become corrupted the recording server is in many cases able to repair the corrupt databases While the ability to repair corrupt databases is highly valuable it is of course even better to take steps to ensure that your databases do not become corrupted Power outages Use a UPS The single most common reason for corrupt databases is the recording server being shut down abruptly without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly This may happen due to power outages due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server s power cable or similar The best way of protecting your recording servers from being shut down abruptly is to equip each of your recording servers with a UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply The UPS works as a battery driven secondary power source providing the necessary power for saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities UPSs vary in sophistication but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files for alerting system administrators etc Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization s environment is an individual process When you assess your needs however bear in mind the amount of runtime you require the UPS to be able to provide if the power fails Saving open files and shutting
343. ites to a hierarchy accept inclusion in a hierarchy rename sites in a hierarchy detach sites from hierarchy work with site properties and refresh site hierarchy Due to the nature of federated sites when the context menu is activated from a parent you cannot accept inclusion in the hierarchy When activated from a child you cannot refresh the site hierarchy Add site to hierarchy You can add children to both your home site and to its children when connected to them Prerequisites To add a child to a parent in your hierarchy one of the following two scenarios must be true e The management server is installed as a network service Before a parent child link can be established without the acceptance from the administrator of the child both computers involved parent and child must be added as a user to the other s XProtect system administrator role Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles e The management server is installed as a user account This user account must be a member of the administrator group of the server being linked to before a parent child link can be established without the acceptance from the administrator of the child If neither of these criteria are met the administrator of the child needs to accept the request for inclusion in the hierarchy see Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 314 before the link can be established Refer to Milestone Federated Architecture overview on page 302 for m
344. itions we therefore want to skip step 2 entirely 6 Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform gt In this example we want to set a specific live frame rate We therefore select the action Set live frame rate on lt devices gt First Select actions to perom Start recording et nn a nn ee ee ne rn er a e e Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window gt In this example Based on our selection Set live frame rate on lt devices gt the wizard automatically suggests a rule description in which the frame rate should be set on the device on which event occurred The wizard furthermore prompts us to specify the required number of frames per second Next Ede the rule descnption chck an underined tem Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set live frame rate on the device on which event occurrec to frames per second www milestonesys com 201 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 To specify the required number of frames per second we click the frames per second link specify a frame rate of 25 and click OK Frame Rate Xj Select kame tate The rule description now indicates that the frame rate will be set to 25 frames per second 7 Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard On step 4 of the wizard s
345. itions for the selected patrolling profile When patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile ends the camera will go to the specified end position Specify manual PTZ session timeout Patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted manually by XProtect Smart Client see Install XProtect omart Client on page 25 users with the necessary user rights You may specify how much time should pass before regular patrolling is resumed after a manual interruption 1 In the Management Client s menu bar select Tools Options This opens the Options window 2 Onthe Options window s General tab select the required amount of time in the PTZ manual session timeout list default is 15 seconds The setting applies for all PTZ cameras on your system PTZ Presets tab camera properties The Presets tab lets you create preset positions to be used for example in rules see Manage rules on page 226 for making a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera move to a specific preset position when an event occurs as well as in patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset positions www milestonesys com 130 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 You manage preset positions on the Presets tab which is available only when the selected camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera The Presets tab will not be available if the sel
346. ity see About maps on page 341 e Log server used for providing the necessary functionality for logging system information see Manage logs on page 273 e Service channel enables automatic and transparent configuration communication between servers and clients e Axis One click Connection Component see Remote connect services on page 75 only available here e Milestone Mobile server only available here e More options may be available in your organization For installation of device packs refer to Device pack not available on Download Manager download web page see Device pack installer must be downloaded on page 43 Add publish Download Manager installer components Making non standard components and new versions available on the management server s download page involves two procedures First you add new and or non standard components to the Download Manager Then you use it to fine tune which components should be available in the various language versions of the web page If the Download Manager is open close it before installing new components Adding new non standard files to the Download Manager www milestonesys com 41 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 1 Onthe machine where you downloaded the component s go to Window s Start enter a Command Promt 2 Inthe Command Promt execute the name of the file exe with space ss registration Exam
347. ity depends on your product version The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Smart Client or other relevant clients The following rights are available e Trigger external event with time profile On the XProtect Smart Client s Live tab it is possible to manually trigger your surveillance system s external events This right determines whether users with the selected role should be able to trigger the selected external event in their XProtect Smart Clients For the right to work the role must also be granted the right to view the XProtect Smart Client s Live tab This right is granted as part of the application rights www milestonesys com 267 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 View Group rights The View Group tab lets you specify which view groups i e groups of views in clients users groups with the selected role should be able to use in the XProtect Smart Client The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Smart Client or other relevant clients The following rights are available e Visible Determines if the selected
348. k drive for the database will prevent low disk performance Furthermore when formatting the hard disk it is important to change its Allocation unit size setting from 4 to 64 kilobytes This is to significantly improve recording performance of the hard disk You can read more about allocating unit sizes and find help at htip support microsoft com kb 140365 en us IMPORTANT The oldest data in a database will always be auto archived or deleted if no next archive is defined when less than 5GB of space is free If less than 1GB space is free data will be deleted A database always requires 250MB of free space if this limit is reached if data is not deleted fast enough no more data will be written to the database until enough space has been freed The actual maximum size of your database will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 5GB Attaching devices to a recording server Once you have configured the storage area and archiving settings for a recording server where to store recordings archives how often to transfer recordings to archives and so on you can enable storage and archiving for individual cameras or a group of cameras see Attach a device or group of devices to storage area on page 91 This is done from the individual devices or from the device group Effective archiving When archiving is enabled for a camera or a group of cameras the contents of the camera s database will automatically be moved to an archiv
349. l rules online on page 198 How a rule is triggered Two types of conditions can trigger rules When events occur on the surveillance system for example when Events motion is detected when the system receives input from external Sensors etc www milestonesys com 227 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When specific periods of time are entered for example Thursday Time 16th August 2007 from 07 00 to 07 59 or every Saturday and Sunday What you can cover in a rule Your exact number of options depends on the type of rule you want to create and on the number of devices available on your system Rules however provide a high degree of flexibility You are able to combine event and time conditions you are able to specify several actions in a single rule and very often you are able to create rules covering several or all of the devices on your system You can make your rules as simple or complex as required For example you can create very simple time based rules Example 7 Very Simple Time Based Rule On Mondays between 08 30 and 11 30 time condition Camera 1 and Camera 2 should start recording action when the time period begins and stop recording stop action when the time period ends And you can create very simple event based rules involving events on one device only Example 7 Very Simple Event Based Rule When motion is detected event condition on Camera
350. le recording for a camera on the Record tab see Record tab overview on page 164 The maximum frame rate you will be able to specify will depend on the camera types in question and on their selected image resolution Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions In one of the following steps the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Restore default recording frame rate Without this stop action the default recording frame rate would potentially never be restored You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Begins PTZ patrolling the continuous moving of a camera between a number of preset positions according to a particular patrolling profile the exact definition of how patrolling should be carried out including the sequence of preset positions timing settings etc for a particular PTZ camera with a particular priority What is Priority When several users on a surveillance system wish to 192 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Pause patrolling on lt devices gt www milestonesys com control the same PTZ camera at the same time conflicts may occur PTZ priority lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected PTZ camera s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from 1 to 32 000 where 1 is the lowest priority Default PTZ priority is 3000 I
351. le t3 Emai Recperni MS 44 Subject Parcel anat ditechon a TaggerT met Message bat Add ipile r ciaahon cick inke 5 meet wanaties rio hesdihekd Becordra Server name Hades nane Tene bw e mad 0 Second lest nad Data T include mage F include AVI Help lt Back Freh Cancel 5 If you want send a test e mail notification to the specified recipients click Test E mail 6 If you want to include pre alarm still images in e mail notifications under the notification profile select Include images and specify number of images time between images and whether images should be embedded in e mail or not 7 If you want to include AVI video clips in e mail notifications under the notification profile select Include images and specify time before and after event and frame rate 8 Click Finish www milestonesys com 240 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Use rules to trigger e mail notifications You use the Manage Rule for creating rules The wizard takes you through all required steps You specify the use of a notification profile during the step on which you specify the rule s actions First Select actions to pertorm Start recording Set ive frame rate on devices Set recording frame rate on devices C Start patroling on device specific prohl When selecting the action Send notification to lt profile gt you get the option
352. le to select several preset positions If your system is upgraded to version 4 0 or future versions rule priority settings is a new feature Existing rules created without priority automatically get priority 1 It is strongly recommended to reconsider this lowest possible priority for all affected rules This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one preset position has been defined for those devices You define preset positions for a PTZ camera on the Presets tab see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Moves one or more particular cameras to their respective default preset positions however always according to priority When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select which devices the action should apply for If your system is upgraded to version 4 0 or future versions rule priority settings is a new feature Existing rules created without priority automatically get priority 1 It is strongly recommended to reconsider this lowest possible priority for all affected rules This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a
353. lestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 Right click the unwanted role in the Overview pane and select Delete Role 3 Click Yes If you delete a role this does not delete a view group based upon the role For information about deleting view groups refer to Manage view groups on page 183 View effective roles With the Effective Roles feature you are able to view all roles see About roles on page 255 of a selected user or group see Manage users and groups on page 255 This ability is especially convenient if you are using groups in fact it is the only way of viewing the roles of individual group members 1 2 3 Open the Effective Roles window There are three ways in which you can open the Effective Roles window o From the Management Client s menu bar by selecting Tools gt Effective Roles o From the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 when working with roles by right clicking anywhere inside the pane then selecting Effective Roles o From the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 by expanding Security then right clicking Roles then selecting Effective Roles In the Effective Roles window s User name field type the user name of the required user teris Fries er C If you typed the user name directly into the User name click Refresh in the lower part of the window to display the roles of the user If you used Active Directo
354. licenses on page 71 Using the Activate Online wizard see Activate licenses online on page 69 you must reactivate your licenses after replacing hardware devices Also note that if the new number of cameras microphones inputs outputs etc exceeds the old number of cameras microphones inputs outputs etc you might also have to buy new licenses see About licenses on page 71 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server right click the hardware device you wish to replace 2 From the menu that appears select Replace Hardware 3 The Replace Hardware wizard appears Click Next 4 Inthe wizard in the Address field enter the IP address of the new hardware If known select relevant hardware device driver from the Hardware Driver drop down list Otherwise select Auto Detect If port user name or and password data is different for the new device also correct this before starting the auto detect process if needed www milestonesys com 82 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tip The wizard is prefilled with data from the existing hardware device If you replace it with a similar hardware device you can reuse some of this data for example port and driver information 1 Do one of the following o If you selected the required hardware device driver directly from the list click Next o If you selected Auto Detect in th
355. line on page 198 for other step by step descriptions of how to create rules Tip When you create a rule based on an in or output event the actions you specify in the rule do not have to relate to the device on which the external in or output was activated you can easily specify that the actions should take place on one or more different devices even across recording servers Rule that activates deactivates an output 1 Start the Manage Rule and in step 1 select a rule type and if necessary a condition in step 2 2 n Manage Rule s step 3 Step 3 Actions select the Set device output to lt state gt action 3 If you like the output to be activated deactivated immediately skip this step If you do not want to activate or deactivate the output immediately after the event click the immediately link in the initial rule description and select an interval between the event and the activation deactivation of the output Click OK to confirm your selection 4 Click the state link in the initial rule description and select whether you want to activate or deactivate the output Click OK to confirm your selection 5 Click the devices link in the initial rule description and select which output you want to activate or deactivate Click OK to confirm your selection 6 If wanted you can select more actions in the Manage Rule s step 3 Step 3 Actions Do so or click Next to continue to the next step 7 n Manage Rule s step 4 Step 4
356. ll The rules of your system can be used to control the behavior of your XProtect Smart Walls much the same way as rules are used for controlling the behavior of cameras etc For example a rule can trigger your XProtect Smart Wall to display a certain preset during a certain day You can even use rules to control what individual monitors in a XProtect Smart Wall display Refer to Manage rules on page 226 for information about how to create rules Perform an action in a time interval day of week iz Thursday cet smart wall London to preset Factory and Set smart wall London monitor UK Monitor 9 using current layout to shows Camera 1 EE starting in position b About view groups The way in which video from one or more cameras is presented in clients is called a view A view group is basically a container for one or more logical groups of such views In clients a view group is presented as an expandable folder from which users can select the group and subsequently the view they want to see 9 O o a ne M Bd 101 Bar Area LH 102 Games Rooms GB 103 Pool Hall Manage view groups By default each role you define in the Management Client is also created as a view group When you add a role in the Management Client the role will by default appear as a view group for use in clients e Aview group based o
357. ll SQL server on the management server itself If you select an SQL Server Express Edition you might need to have Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Service Pack 1 installed on the server running the SQL Server even though Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 is already installed Refer to System requirements on page 15 e 2x Windows Server 2003 Fix If you use Windows Server 2003 Milestone recommends that you install two supported fixes before starting Fix 1 and Fix 2 Otherwise the installation of your management server might fail due to Microsoft Windows Installer process having insufficient contiguous virtual memory to verify that the msi package or the msp package is correctly signed e Alternative installation for workgroups If you do not use a domain setup but a workgroup setup do the following when installing 1 Login to Windows using a common administrator account 2 Depending on your needs start the management or recording server installation and click Custom www milestonesys com 30 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Depending on what you selected in step 2 select to install the Management or Recording Server service using a common administrator account 4 Finish the installation 5 Repeat steps 1 4 to install any other systems you want to connect They must all be installed using a common administrator account This approach however can not be used when u
358. llance camera films a street in order to protect residents privacy you can mask certain areas of a building could be windows and doors with privacy masking This is even needed in some countries to comply with national legislation As administrator you are also able to see through privacy masked areas and can turn showing of privacy masked areas on and off When viewed via XProtect Smart Client or any other media privacy masked areas will be represented as black areas and it is impossible to see behind the privacy masking or in any way remove it Properties 4 Privacy masking Mask preview Use left and ngt mouse buttons to select clear 16x16 F Show grid pn Clear J Show privacy mask j iiic Smal Large Events m Client EB Privacy Mask Motion www milestonesys com 123 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Red areas indicate the areas masked for privacy When privacy masks are used with PTZ cameras and you pan tilt zoom the camera the selected area masked for privacy will not move accordingly This might mean that objects masked for privacy become visible This is due to the fact that the masked area is locked according to the camera s view not the masked object Consequently it is not recommended to use privacy masking with PTZ cameras Enable and disable privacy masking The privacy masking feature is enabled by default To enable disable the privacy
359. longer be transferred from the device to the system in which case live viewing and recording of video for example will no longer be possible However a device on which the feed has been stopped will still be able to communicate with the recording server and the feed can be started again automatically through a rule as opposed to when the device has been manually disabled in the Management Client Sets the XProtect Smart Wall to a selected preset specified in the Smart Wall Presets see Presets tab monitor properties on page 181 tab No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time 191 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Set lt Smart Wall gt lt monitor gt to show Set live frame rate on lt devices gt Set recording frame rate on lt devices gt Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt www milestonesys com Sets a specific XProtect Smart Wall monitor to display live video from the selected cameras on this site or any child site configured in Milestone Federated Architecture No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a per
360. m In Milestone Interconnect setups some events originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but generic see Manage generic events on page 248 and user defined see Manage user defined events on page 243 events must be added manually To view events added after a Milestone Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 87 Add an event 1 On the Events Tab click Add This opens the Select Driver Event window 2 Select the required event You can only select one event at a time 3 Click OK The selected event will be added to the Events tab s list of configured events 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Note that deleting an event when possible affects any rules in which the event is used In Milestone Interconnect setups some events originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but generic see Manage generic events on page 248 and user defined see Manage user defined events on page 243 events must be added manually To view events added after a Milestone Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 87 Use several instances of an event To be able to specify different properties for different instances of an event see Specify event properties on page 170 you are able to add an event
361. m Administrator s Manual Group failover recording servers 333 338 H Handle log settings 274 279 Hard disk failure Protect your drives 345 Hardware 162 171 Help menu items 63 Hide remove Download Manager installer components 41 42 How a rule is triggered 228 How do set up users and their rights 25 How to connect to the system 25 How to write IPv6 addresses 363 Illustration Failover process in details 334 How does the alarms feature work 282 Illustration of Milestone Federated Architecture e 309 313 Important information if using the system with IPv6 362 Important prerequisites when running federated sites 304 305 308 Info tab monitor properties 181 Info tab recording server properties 98 Info tab XProtect Smart Wall properties 178 Info tab overview 115 139 145 157 Info tab properties 98 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Install failover recording server recording server 29 30 33 34 333 336 Install failover recording servers 336 Install in a cluster 45 47 Install multiple recording server instances 33 48 Install new management server on new server step 2 330 Install other components such as Milestone Mobile server 33 Install SNMP service 358 Install STS environment for One click camera connection 76 Install the XProtect Smart Client from server or DVD 26 Install the XProt
362. made e mail notifications which can automatically be triggered by a rule for example when a particular event occurs www milestonesys com 189 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e User defined events see Manage user defined events on page 243 User defined events are custom made events making it possible for users to manually trigger events in the system or react to inputs from the system e Analytics events see Manage analytics events on page 245 Typically analytics events are data received from an external third party video content analysis VCA providers Analytics events can be used as basis for alarms e Generic events see Manage generic events on page 248 Generic events allow you to trigger actions in the XProtect event server by sending simple strings via the IP network to your system Refer to Events overview on page 221 for a list of events Actions and Stop actions Available functionality depends on your product version When you create rules in the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 226 you are able to select between different actions First Select actions to perform v Start recording _ Set ive frame rate on devices Set recording frame rate on device Some of these actions will require a subsequent stop action Example If you select the action Start recording recording will start and potentially continue indefinitely T
363. management server s system configuration database before the move By backing up the database and subsequently restoring it on the new server you will avoid have to reconfigure your cameras rules time profiles etc after the move Some of this prerequisite information is only relevant for users of SQL Server Express Edition If you use any other SQL setup ask your IT department for backup details Prerequisites e Your software installation file for installation on the new management server e Your initial license lic file i e the one you used when initially installing your system not the lic file which is the result of your license activation see Activate licenses online on page 69 License activation is among other things based on the specific hardware on which the activation took place therefore an activated lic file cannot be reused when moving to a www milestonesys com 326 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 new server Note that if you are also upgrading your system software in connection with the move you will have received a new initial lic file together with your new Software License Code SLC e SQL Server Express Edition users only Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express a tool downloadable for free from www microsoft com downloads Among its many features for managing SQL Server Express databases are some easy to use backu
364. masking feature for a camera select clear the Privacy Mask tab s Privacy masking check box Privacy masking settings When you enable privacy masking the preview image is divided into selectable sections by a grid To define privacy mask regions drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image Pressing down left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section You are able to define as many privacy mask regions as you require Privacy mask regions are shown in red Three privacy mask regions defined in the preview window In this case the grid is visible The red privacy mask indications will also appear in the preview image on the Motion tab www milestonesys com 124 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Grid Size Show Grid www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual The value selected in the Grid size list determines the density of the grid regardless whether the grid is shown or not Select between the values 8x8 i e a grid dividing the image into eight sections along the X axis and eight sections along the Y axis 16x16 32x32 or 64x64 With a grid of 8x8 the image will be divided into relatively few sections for you to select for privacy mask regions Each section will be relatively large you will not be able to define very detailed privacy mask regions With a grid size of 64x64 the image will be divided into relatively many secti
365. may for example be used for detecting if doors windows or gates are opened Input from such external input units is treated as events by the system Such events can be used in rules see Manage rules on page 226 For example you could create a rule specifying that a camera should begin recording when an input is activated and stop recording 30 seconds after the input is deactivated Devices input ports are automatically detected when you add the devices to your system through the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 78 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use You have two entry points for managing input e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices select Inputs expand the required device group and select the required input If no device groups are available you must first group your input Refer to About Device Groups on page 139 for information about creating groups as well as adding input to your groups e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select the Recording Server node then expand the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select the required input www milestonesys com 145 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation
366. me Tip If you select a time period by dragging in the calendar before right clicking the selected period will automatically be used in the dialog that appears when you select Add Single Time or Add Recurring Time Specify a single time When you select Add Single Time the Select Time window appears f pom Ra Select Time t3 Start tme Mon 9 5 2010 v 130FM w End time Mon 9 5 2010 v 300PM 1 Al day event OK Cancel Time and date format may be different on your system 1 In the Select Time window specify Start time and End time If the time is to cover whole days select the All day event box 2 Click OK www milestonesys com 236 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tip A time profile is able to contain several periods of time If you want your time profile to contain further periods of time add more single times or recurring times Specify a recurring time When you select Add Recurring Time the Select Recurring Time window appears FF A o Y Ba Select Recurring Time Si t3 Time range Stat 1 30PM w End Duiabon 1 5 hours v Recurrence ptem O Daly Reci evey 1 weeks oe O Weekly O Monthly C Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday OYeay Thursday Friday C Saturday Range of recurrence Stat Mon 9 5 2005 Y No end date End after 10 occurrences End by Mon 11 7 2005 v OF Cancel Time and date format may be d
367. mera databases in the recording server s default storage area Archives can be added to a storage area at any time convenient To access the Storage tab select the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select the Storage tab in the Properties pan see Panes overview on page 57 e www milestonesys com 98 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 It is not possible to add databases or edit a storage area if the recording server is offline UNE 4 Aea woorega citer fran 7 days of fer uod thae schedule Aiie bectap 500 GB 337 GB used A o mem noring otter ten 8 aevi a Men cet oca schedis Asche 2 rare backup Y M Dga 12 mt e mm s z Ge j ap Ufroe de iot Ff eoa Storage tab properties Storage configuration list contents Name Indicates the name of the storage area Click to edit Indicates how many devises use the storage Click the number link to see device details The following devices are using the datsbase a Camera 21 Microphone 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 21 Speaker 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 21 D U Camera 26 s _ Microphone 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 26 evice Usage Speaker 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 26 Camera 29 _ Microphone 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 29 Speaker 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 29 Microphone 1 on ACTi TCM TCD VO senes 10 100 64 33 Speaker on A
368. milestonesys com 202 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 gt In this example Based on the start action set frame rate in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action restore default frame rate It furthermore suggests that the default frame rate should be restored immediately after the last detected motion iext tdg the rule Gescnption chck an undermined em Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 cet live frame rate on the device on which event occurre to 25 frames per second Perform stop action on Motion End from Camera 1 restore default live frame rate immediately This is also just what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g 3 seconds Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window N Retail Area P De Active fv Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 9 Click Finish This will add your new rule to the list of rules Use specific PTZ patrolling profile during specific part of day rule Tip When patrolling stops you can if needed get the PTZ camera to start patrolling immediately after according to another patrolling pr
369. ministrator s Manual VMS 2013 event is used in a rule to start recording on a camera associated with the activated access control device It is defined in the meta data which camera is associated with what rule This way the company does not need to have 35 user defined events and 35 rules triggered by the user defined events a single user defined event and a single rule are enough When user defined events are used this way you may not always want them to be available for manual triggering in the XProtect Smart Client You can use roles to define which user defined events should be visible in the XProtect Smart Client Whichever way you choose to use user defined events each user defined event must first be added through the Management Client Note that if you rename a user defined event already connected XProtect Smart Client users must log out and log in again before the name change will be visible Also note that if you delete a user defined event this will affect any rules in which the user defined event is used Furthermore a deleted user defined event will not disappear from XProtect Smart Clients immediately only after XProtect Smart Client users log out Add a user defined event 1 2 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Rules and Events and select User defined Events In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click Events and select Add User
370. more than once The following example is specific to cameras Example The camera in question has been configured with two motion windows called A1 and A2 You have added two instances of the Motion Started HW event In the properties of one instance you have specified use of motion window A1 in the properties of the other instance you have specified use of motion window A2 When you use the event in a rule you are able to specify that the event should be based on motion detected in a specific motion window in order for the rule to be triggered First Select conditions to apply d time in time profile ected time in time profile v lime period lt starttime gt to endi week is days vent is from lt motion window Specify event properties www milestonesys com 170 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Administrator s Manual For each event you have added you are able to specify properties The number of properties depends on the item in question In order to work as intended some or all of the properties must be specified identically on the item as well as on the system Even though the following list is not exhaustive you may often be able to specify the following properties Enabled Include Images Motion Window Prebuffer frames per second Prebuffer Seconds Determines whether use of the event is enabled Select True to enable select False to disable Enable
371. motion is detected on a particular camera or you may create a rule specifying that a camera should start recording if a siren sounds Refer to Define Input and Output Related Rules see Define in and output related rules on page 155 for more information e Manual activation of output Output may be activated manually from the Management Client and the XProtect Smart Client 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices and select Outputs 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required outputs folder and select the required output Tip You may select a group of outputs for example All Outputs to manually activate all outputs in the group 3 The availability of features for manually activating an output depends entirely on the device in question and may vary 4 Typically the following elements are shown for each output in the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 ra 1332 44 Desnas oll eL Durpur 15 5 Select clear the check box M 9 to activate deactivate the selected output When an output is activated the indicator lights up green ic 15 0728 Actvared C He hapa Ey 6 Alternatively click the rectangular button ___Ito activate the output for the duration defined in the Output Trigger Time setting on the Settings tab this feature setting may not be available for all outputs After the defined duration the output is automaticall
372. mstances the icon will after a short while change to Stopped In indeterminate state Appears when the Recording Server service is initially loaded and until the first information is received upon which the icon will under normal circumstances change to Starting and subsequently to the Runnning 351 Services administration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Running offline Typically appears when the Recording Server or Failover recording service is running but the Management Server service is not Reg failover recording server it typically appears if e the failover recording server is not enabled see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 through the Management Client e the failover recording server s information about the management server address is incorrect see Change the management server address on page 339 e the user account under which the Failover Recording Server service runs has no access to your system To fix this make sure that the user account specified during installation of the failover recording server d under which the Failover Server service runs has access to your system with administrator rights Gh To verify this do the following 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security and select Roles 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page
373. must be specified separately In case you accidentally delete the default start feed rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action in a time interval always start feed on All Cameras Perform an action when time interval ends stop feed immediately www milestonesys com 220 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Events overview When creating an event based rule in the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 226 you are able to select between a number of different events Select an Event 3X iu Hardware Aa Configurable Everts ii Predefined Events ae Devices A Configurable Eventa ix Predefined Events External Events H Predefined Events Generic Events User defined Events qu Fiecordeng Servers In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they are Some hardware is capable of creating events themselves for example to detect motion These can be used as events but must obviously be configured on the hardware before they can be used in the system Events listed here may only be possible on some hardware For example only selected cameras are able to detect tampering or temperature changes Configurable events hardware These configurable events are unknown until they are automatically imported from device drivers As a result they cannot be documented separately or in
374. n see Playback remote system on page 165 In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Note that in a Milestone Interconnect setup any privacy masking see Privacy Mask tab camera properties on page 123 set on a remote system will be disregarded by the central system Retrieve remote recordings from remote site camera 1 4 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system Select the relevant camera In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the Record tab and select the Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connection is restored option see Remote recording camera remote system on page 168 In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save As an alternative you can use rules see Add a rule on page 229 or start remote recording retrievals from the XProtect Smart Client when needed Note that in a Milestone Interconnect setup any privacy masking see Privacy Mask tab camera properties on page 123 set on a remote system will be disregarded by the central system About storage and archiving Available functionality depends on your product version www milestonesys com 88 Management Client
375. n a Smart Client profile There are the following tabs with options for Smart Client profiles Name and description priority of existing profiles and an overview of which roles use the profile ee wet tee cut eee J yz OO ar Info How does Smart Clientprofiles work If a user is a member of more than one role each with their individual Smart Clientprofile the user will get the Smart Client profile with the highest priority Settings such as show hide and mini and maximize menu settings General login out startup timeout info and messaging options Sequence Explorer settings and much more www milestonesys com 186 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Advanced settings such as maximum decoding threads deinterlacing and time zone settings What is maximum decoding threads and deinterlacing Maximum decoding threads controls how many decoding threads are used to decode video streams It can help improve performance on multi core computers in live as well as playback mode The exact performance improvement depends on the video stream It is mainly relevant if using heavily coded high resolution video streams like H 264 for which the performance improvement potential can Advanced be significant and less relevant if using for example JPEG or MPEG 4 With deinterlacing you convert video into a non interlaced format Interlacing determ
376. n a role will by default only be available to users groups assigned to the role in question You may change these view group rights on page 268 e Aview group based on a role will by default carry the role s name Example If you create a role with the name Building A Security Staff it will by default appear in the XProtect Smart Client as a view group called Building A Security Staff In addition to the view groups you get when adding roles you may create as many other view groups as you like You can also delete view groups including those automatically created when adding roles e Even though a view group is created by default each time you add a role see Manage roles on page 257 view groups do not have to correspond to roles You may therefore add rename or remove any of your view groups if required Note that if you rename a View group client users already connected must log out and log in again before the name change will be visible www milestonesys com 183 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 View groups from a client user s perspective For more information about views from a client user s perspective see the separate XProtect Smart Client documentation available on the software DVD as well as from www milestonesys com Add a view group 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the Clients node right click View Group
377. n administrator account 6 Refer to Add site to hierarchy on page 313 for details on how to proceed It is not possible to mix domain s and workgroup s i e connect sites from a domain to sites from a workgroup and vice versa Licensing of Milestone Federated Architecture To learn about licensing in general refer to About Licenses on page 71 MFA can be used freely within the same legal entity as many times as needed In an MFA setup all sites share the same software license code see Manage Software License Codes on page 74 SLC and device licenses are shared between all sites In the case of different legal entities running MFA each system requires a valid set of base and device licenses Furthermore in order for a device to be accessible across a federated setup one Milestone Federated Architecture Device License is required per device accessed in the federated site To get additional licenses for your system contact your product vendor www milestonesys com 304 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Basic rules of federated sites One parent many children A child can only have one parent but a parent can have an unlimited number of children Parent requests child not the other way around A new parent child link is always requested by the parent and if necessary authorized by the child Refer to Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 314
378. n also create a new user in XProtect Enterprise and assign the required user rights in XProtect Enterprise so they match the role in your system Refer to the XProtect Enterprise documentation for more information about creating new users in XProtect Enterprise Before you are able to give roles access to XProtect Enterprise servers the servers must be added through the Management Client Refer to Manage XProtect Enterprise servers on page 287 Define roles with access to XProtect Enterprise servers To give access to data from XProtect Enterprise servers do the following in the Management Client 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security and select Roles 2 Select the required role from the list If you want to define a new role refer to About roles on page 255 for more information 3 Atthe bottom of the Role Settings pane select the Servers tab 4 Select the XProtect Enterprise server to which you want to assign the role 5 Select a user with the XProtect Enterprise user rights that represent the correct user rights for the role in your system you are assigning it to You can do this in two ways o Inthe Basic Authentication section enter the user name and password for a user which is defined as basic authenticated user in XProtect Enterprise Or o Inthe Windows Authentication section enter the Windows account name for a user which is defined as a Windows au
379. n also do several things on the SQL Server itself to keep the size of the transaction log down For numerous articles on this topic go to support microsoft com and search for SQL Server transaction log Prerequisites SQL Server Express Edition users only Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express a tool download able for free from www microsoft com downloads Among its many features for managing SQL Server Express databases are some easy to use backup and restoration features Download and install the tool on your management server www milestonesys com 320 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Scheduled back up of system configuration 1 From Windows Start menu open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express by selecting All Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server 2008 gt SQL Server Management Studio Express 2 Inthe tool do the following When connecting specify the name of the required SQL Server Use the account under which the database was created o Find the Surveillance database containing your entire system configuration including event server recording servers cameras inputs outputs users rules patrolling profiles etc No Surveillance database Surveillance is the default name of the database containing the system configuration If you can find the database but it is not called Surveillance it could be because you gave the da
380. n also optionally select the type of driver you want to add to speed up hardware detection o Address Specify the IP address of the hardware you want to add o Port Specify the port number to which the camera is added o Hardware driver Select the driver of the hardware you want to add Or select Auto detect to let the wizard detect which driver to install 5 Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator will show the detection process Select or clear the network ranges to use in the detection process If you successfully detect hardware a Success message will appear in the Status column If you fail to add a network range click the Failed error message to see why Once detection is complete click Next 6 Choose to enable or disable successfully detected hardware and cameras Detected hardware such as hardware device camera microphone and speaker is listed individually allowing you to for example add a hardware device s camera without enabling its speaker if needed 7 Select a default group for all device types or group the devices individually The devices are listed according to type for example camera microphone speaker Click Finish Tip The list of drivers that appears when you scan is typically very long and by default all drivers are selected With Select All and Clear All you can avoid having to select clear all check boxes manually Tip Select the Show hardware running on other recording servers ch
381. n in a virtual environment it is important that the hardware host has the same amount of physical memory as allocated for the virtual servers and that the virtual server running the recording server is allocated enough CPU and memory which it is not by default Typically the recording server needs 2 4 GB depending on configuration Another bottleneck is network adapter allocation and hard disk performance Consider allocating a physical network adapter on the host server of the virtual server running the recording server This makes it easier to ensure that the network adapter is not overloaded with traffic to other virtual servers If the network adapter is used for several virtual servers the network traffic might result in the recording server not retrieving and recording the configured amount of images www milestonesys com 37 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Download Manager download web page The management server has a built in web page This web page enables administrators and end users to download and install required XProtect system components from any location locally or remotely on Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS contains a set of administrative applications which are downloaded and installed trom this page User applicstions can be found on the default downloed page Tf you want to view this page in another language use the language mena in the top right corner
382. n page 226 The two events are further described in the Events overview on page 221 Read failover recording server status icons The following icons represent the status of failover recording servers icons are visible in the Management Client in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Icon tj Description The failover recording server is either waiting or watching When waiting the failover recording server is not configured to take over from any recording server yet When watching the failover recording server is configured to watches one or more recording servers The failover recording server has taken over from the designated recording server Tip When hovering over the server icon in the Management Client a tooltip appears You can use this tooltip to identify which recording server the failover recording server has taken over from The tooltip text is defined in the failover recording server s Description field see Failover recording server properties on page 335 Connection to the failover recording server is broken www milestonesys com 338 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Failover Recording Server service When you have installed a failover recording server you are able to check the state of the Failover Recording Server service by looking at the Failover Recording Server service icon in the notification
383. n select Matrix 2 In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click Matrix Configurations and select Add Matrix This opens the Add Matrix dialog In the Name field enter a descriptive name for the Matrix recipient In the Description field enter a description of the Matrix recipient In the Address field enter the IP address or the host name of the required Matrix recipient In the Port field enter the port number used by the Matrix recipient installation Uv Oe oa uu X9 In the Password field enter the Matrix recipient s password Remember that passwords are case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing amanda and Amanda Tip If in doubt you can find the port number default 12345 and password this way For a Matrix Monitor application go to the Matrix Monitor s Configuration dialog For an XProtect omart Client see the separate Matrix Monitor or XProtect Smart Client documentation 8 In the Type field select the type of Matrix recipient you are adding a Matrix Monitor or an XProtect Smart Client Your system does not verify that the specified port number or password is correct or that the specified port number password or type corresponds with the actual Matrix recipient Therefore make sure that you enter the information correctly 9 Click OK to save the settings You are now able to use the Matrix recipient in rules Define rules sending video to Matrix recipients
384. n this example However some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such motion detection can also be used in system rules although that is beyond the scope of this example Prerequisites This rule is based on motion detection on a specific camera Therefore motion detection must be enabled on the camera in order for the rule to work as intended Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e Motion detection is enabled for the camera in question Show me how to verify this www milestonesys com 199 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 To verify that motion detection has been enabled for a camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Select the required camera from the list and select the Motion tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 On the Motion tab verify that the Enable motion detection check box is selected D Cinara Bie Sects 7p Pus Sector Back Doc P Bue Seca risance U LJ Fed Sector p Ned Sector rterce B t Al C woe at Propestes U ahh s lt gt Moonen 1 gt Pyocesi dye every ma LI v Opteared detection _ Use emchade segni sero ine Pec LU Aeterno dp
385. n time of 10 days Furthermore archiving is set to occur every day at 10 30 ensuring a much more frequent archiving than retention time www milestonesys com 90 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 You can also control archiving by use of rules and events see About rules and events on page 189 Attach a device or group of devices to storage area Once a storage area is configured for a recording server you can enable it for individual devices Cameras microphones or speakers or a group of devices You can also select which of a recording server s storage areas should be used for the individual device or the group 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices and select either Cameras Microphones or Speakers as required 2 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required device or a device group In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the Record tab In the Storage area select Select In the dialog that appears select the wanted database click OK 9 Xu d w In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save View archived recordings You view archived recordings in the XProtect Smart Client As long as the archived recordings are stored locally or on accessible network drives you can use the XProtect Smart Client s many features timeline browser smart search
386. nagement www milestonesys com 143 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Client you should verify whether the problem may be due to the speaker being disabled on the device itself Configure speakers You configure individual speakers by selecting the required speaker in the list then specifying the speaker s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Info see Info tab overview on page 156 The selected speaker s name etc Settings see Settings tab The selected speaker s general settings overview on page 160 Record see Record tab The selected speaker s recording database and archiving storage overview on page 164 settings View current state of speakers When you have selected a speaker in the Management Client information about the current status of the selected speaker is presented in the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 When a speaker is not active it is shown as When a speaker is active it is shown as Read speaker list s status icons The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 input see Manage input on page 145 and output see Manage output on page 150 events in item lists Item enabled The device is enabled and we retrieve a a SP
387. nalytics events to work The window consists of two tabs Test Analytics Event Tasks Epors Task Status af Changes saved Success f Analybcs events enabled Success af Address allowed Success X Analyscs even used in alam dehrnihbon Failed af Send analyscs event Success The first tab the Task tab lists these conditions in the order they are tested Step 1 Changes saved If the event is new is it saved Or if there are changes to the event name are these changes saved Step 2 Analytics Events enabled Is the analytics event feature enabled Step 3 Address allowed Is the IP address hostname of the machine sending the event s allowed listed on the address list Step 4 Analytics event used in alarm definition Is the analytics event used actively in any alarm definitions Step 5 Send analytics event Did sending a test event to the event server succeed Each step is marked by either failed XX or successful v The second tab the Errors tab shows a list of errors corresponding to any possibly failed conditions Possible errors are www milestonesys com 246 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Error corresponding to step 1 Save changes before testing analytics event Solution Explanation Save changes Error corresponding to step 2 Analytics events have not been enabled Solution Explanation Enable analytics events see Analytics events setting
388. native to time profiles refer to Day length time profiles see Manage day length time profiles on page 238 Time profiles are also assigned to roles see Manage roles on page 257 along with Smart Client profiles see About Smart Client profiles on page 184 Per default all roles are assigned the default time profile Always This means that members of roles with this default time profile attached has no time based limits to their user rights in the system An alternative time profile can easily be assigned to a role see Add a role and manage its XProtect Smart Client and time profiles on page 258 Also refer to Work with Smart Client profiles roles and time profile see Work with Smart Client profiles roles and time profiles on page 185 to learn more about their relationship Time profiles are highly flexible they can be based on one or more single periods of time on one or more recurring periods of time or a combination of single and recurring times Many users will be familiar with the concepts of single and recurring time periods from calendar applications such as the one in Microsoft Outlook Time profiles always apply in local time This means that if your system has recording servers placed in different time zones any actions e g recording on cameras associated with time profiles will be carried out in each recording server s local time Example If you have a time profile covering the period 08 30 to 09 30 any associ
389. nce Improvement Program check box Follow the on screen Head more link for further information on this d Consider the following installation methods e Single Server installs all management server components recording server and clients on the current computer You only need to make a minimum of selections and all components are selected in the component list which cannot be edited e Distributed installs all management server components and clients on the current computer However you must install the recording server on a separate machine This means that the recording server is cleared in the component list which you cannot edit e Custom lets you select freely among management server components to install on the current computer The only exception is the management server By default recording server is cleared in the component list but you can edit this Select Single Server A list of components to install appears you cannot edit this list Click Continue www milestonesys com 31 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4 Select Files location for the program file In Product language select the language in which your XProtect product should be installed Click Install The software now installs When done you see a list of successfully installed components Click Close If you do not have Microsoft IIS installed this is automatically installed during the proc
390. nced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Registered services settings In the Add Registered Service or Edit Registered Service window specify the following Services type Prefilled field N Name of the registered service The name is only used for display ame l purposes in the Management Client Description Description of the registered service The description is only used for display purposes in the Management Client Click Add to add the IP address or hostname of the registered service in question If specifying a hostname as part of a URL the host in question must exist and be available on the network URLs must begin with http or httos and must not contain any of the URL following characters gt amp Example of a typical URL format hito ioaddress port directory where port and directory are optional Note that you can add more than one URL if required Select if the registered service connects to the management server externa with a public IP address Select if the registered service should be trusted immediately this is often the case but the option gives you the flexibility to add the registered service and then mark it as trusted by editing the Trusted registered service later Note that changing the trusted state will also change the state of other registered services sharing one or more of the URLs defined for the relevant registered service Options Options The Management Client s Optio
391. ndex Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Work with clients 23 Work with system monitor 272 Work with users groups and roles 256 261 354 X XProtect Enterprise 289 XProtect Enterprise server network configuration 292 XProtect Smart Wall installation 177 www milestonesys com 380 Index About Milestone Systems Founded in 1998 Milestone Systems is the global industry leader in open platform IP video management software The XProtect platform delivers powerful surveillance that is easy to manage reliable and proven in thousands of customer installations around the world With support for the widest choice in network hardware and integration with other systems XProtect provides best in class solutions to video enable organizations managing risks protecting people and assets optimizing processes and reducing costs Milestone software is sold through authorized and certified partners For more information visit www milestonesys com
392. ne XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 e Event Server Service can be done from Windows Services search for services msc on your machine Within Services locate Milestone XProtect Event Server World Wide Web Publishing Service also known as the Internet Information Service IIS Learn how to stop the IIS at http technet microsoft com en us library cc732317 WS 10 aspx This should all be done to the new management server Since second part of a copy is in reality identical to a restore refer to Restoring system configuration from scheduled back up see Restore system configuration from manual back up on page 325 steps 1 2 and rest of the topic for details www milestonesys com 329 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Device drivers Manage video device drivers Video device drivers are modules used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to a recording server The video device drivers should therefore be installed on each recording server on your system Video device drivers are installed automatically during the initial installation of your system However new versions of video device drivers are released and made available on our website hito www milestonesys com downloads Remove video dev
393. ne and any DST from the computer on which the client is used and converts those time settings to UTC This means that there is a very simple solution for viewing recordings from the DST change hour Viewing DST change hour recordings in clients When you want to view recordings from the last most recent hour of the DST change hour go ahead and view them When you want to view recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour do the following 1 On the computer on which the client is used go to Windows Start menu and select Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Date and Time 3 Inthe Date and Time Properties window select the Time Zone tab 4 Make sure the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is cleared then click OK Date and Time Properties ESI Date amp Time Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Cansda v v Automatically adjust dock For daylight saving changes Lo Cancel Apply When the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is cleared recordings from the entire DST period will be Standard Time or one hour off compared to DST This means that recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour can now be viewed IMPORTANT When you are done viewing recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box again to avoid confusion We recommen
394. new log entry action see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 has been specified e System Log records system related information Your system has a number of default settings related to the different logs refer to Handle log settings on page 278 Furthermore you are able to view logs in a number of different languages export them and save the exported logs as tab delimited text txt files at a location of your choice refer to Export log on page 276 View log To view a log expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select appropriate the log Read and copy logs Each row in a log represents a log entry A log entry contains a number of information fields which are listed and briefly explained Note it is also possible to double click any row and have all its details presented in a Log Details window From the Log Details window it is also possible to copy paste any log contents e Level o Alllogs Display an icon indicating the level of the log entry www milestonesys com 273 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 indicates info indicates error indicates warning e UTC Time o All logs Timestamp in coordinated universal time UTC an international high precision time standard e Local Time o All logs Timestamp in the local time of your system s server e Description
395. nfigure the fisheye functionality of a camera Fisheye is a technology that allows viewing of 360 panoramic images through an advanced lens www milestonesys com 117 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Configuration If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust the behavior of the navigation buttons to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling mount check box The camera s fisheye functionality is configured by adjusting its fisheye view field indicated by a green ellipse in the preview image so it encloses the actual image area of the fisheye lens Click Auto Calculate to do this automatically lt is also possible to adjust the fisheye view manually You do this by specifying a number of values which will be used by the fisheye technology for converting the elliptic image into an ordinary rectangular image You can set the ellipse s X radius Y radius X center and Y center by using the arrow buttons to adjust the ellipse Preview In the preview section of the Fisheye tab you can set a particular position in the fisheye rendered view as the camera s home position Navigate to the required position using the navigation buttons then click Set as Home Position The navigation buttons let you move the camera as follows moves the view up and to the left up up and to the right to the left to its default position to the right down and to the left down down and to the righ
396. ng or not a hot standby server has a non stop TCP connection to its assigned recording server 2 This connection is interrupted i e the recording server is not running 3 From the management server the hot standby server already knows the current configuration of its assigned recording server and starts recording on its behalf 4 The hot standby server and the relevant camera s exchange video data 5 The hot standby server continually tries to re establish connection to the recording server 6 When the connection to the recording server is re established and the hot standby server goes back to hot standby mode the recording server fetches video data if any recorded during its down time and the video data is merged back in to the recoding servers database FAQs failover recording servers regular hot standby How does a failover recording server know when to take over It polls i e regularly checks the state of relevant recording servers every 0 5 seconds If a recording server does not reply within 5 seconds the recording server is considered unavailable and the failover recording server takes over How long does it take for a failover recording server to take over For a regular failover server it takes approximately 5 seconds plus the time it takes for the failover recording server s Recording Server service to start plus the time it takes to connect to the cameras A hot standby server however can do it faster because the
397. ng profiles for a PTZ camera the preset positions required for the patrolling profiles must be defined 213 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Select the required PTZ camera from the list and select the Presets tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 For details of how to define preset positions on the Presets tab refer to Preset Positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 Once you have defined the required preset positions patrolling profiles for the PTZ camera are defined on the neighboring Patrolling tab For details of how to define patrolling profiles on the Patrolling tab refer to Patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 126 Creating the Rule 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane expand Rules and Events Rules Add New Rule 2 Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field In this example the rule will cover a specific camera simply called PTZ Camera and how it should behave upon an activated input We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name lame PTZ Camera to Back Doo on Back Door Sensor Tip Always u
398. ng the profile to be active only when needed All times and dates are based on the management servers time and date settings In addition you can set a positive or negative offset in minutes for the start sunrise and end time sunset The offset for the start and the end time can be identical or different Day length time profiles can be used when creating both rules see Manage rules on page 226 and roles see About roles on page 255 Create a day length time profile 1 In the Management Client expanding the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 s Rules and Events folder select Time Profiles 2 n the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 in the Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add Day Length Time Profile 3 In the Day Length Time Profile window fill in the needed information In order to deal with transition periods between lightness and darkness it is possible to offset activation and deactivation of the profile Also time and month names are shown in the language dictated by your computer s language regional settings www milestonesys com 238 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4 To see the location of the entered GPS coordinates in a map click Show Position in Browser will open a browser 5 Click OK Day length time profile properties Set the following properties for day length time profile N
399. nglc i Recordings Server irctaber with a E ngh V Management Chord inci ater Ez 2 0 T English lA amp fe Chinese T radheonal Hera eaat Os English Arabic Chinese Traditional Czech Danish v Dutch French German Itakan Japanese v Korean Polish v Russian Simplied Chinese v Spanish v Swedish v Admin v Engish v Recordng Server Installer 2 v English v Management Chent Installer v English v Arabic t Chinese Traditional eeteereeeee ee eG The first level of the tree structure one red dot in the example illustration simply indicates what XProtect product you are working with The second level two dots refers to the two targeted versions of the web page Default refers to the web page version viewed by end users Admin refers to the web page version viewed by surveillance system administrators The third level three dots refers to the languages in which the web page is available The fourth level four dots refers to the components which are or can be made available to users The fifth level five dots refers to particular versions of each component which are or can be made available to users The sixth level six dots refers to the language versions of the components which are or can be made available to users www milestonesys com 40 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013
400. ngs etc as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the de 9 recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible 3 Item database being repaired T A R e Item requires attention Pp q co v Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this Tp amp g example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is 9 z i x recording since a recording item is also an enabled item Clients About clients In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 you are able to work with the following under Clients e Manage view groups on page 183 Here you manage your View Groups which are basically containers for one or more logical groups of views e Manage Smart Client profiles see About Smart Client profiles on page 184 Here you manage your XProtect Smart Client Profiles These impact what users of the XProtect Smart Client can and cannot do within the XProtect Smart Client www milestonesys com 174 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Manage Matrix recipients see About Matrix recipients on page 187 Here you manage your Matrix Recipients However this is only relevant if you use Matrix About XProtect Smart Wall Available functionali
401. ngs etc you should use the XProtect Smart Client The following table outlines the main differences between the three clients www milestonesys com 23 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Accessed through an Installed on users Internet browser smartphones or tablets A You must install and You must install and dn Dui the user s integrate the Milestone integrate the Milestone computer Mobile server into your Mobile server into your system setup before you System setup before you can use XProtect Web can use Milestone Mobile Client client ne eteature Feature rich Limited set of features Limited set of features Very easy to use You can handle setup and views locally as well as User s ease of Centrally Very easy to use Setup of views is handled locally so use With central views users can begin using their client upon first login handling web users can begin using their client upon first login None required System although the Administrator s E None installation XProtect Smart Client on his her workstation Very flexible configuration through System the Management Client feature set handling of local IP address ranges NAT multicasting etc System Administrator s Users and their access rights are set up as part of the roles definition process in access control the Management Client options Flexibility Offers a high degree of regarding future flexibility for i
402. nk Click it to view historic data and reports to view reports on a camera click the name of the camera For each historic report you can view data for the last 24 hours 7 days or 30 days If you want to save and or print reports click the Send to PDF icon About current task To get an overview of tasks under a selected recording server their begin time estimated end time and progress do the following From the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand System Dashboard and click Current Task In general all information showed in Current Tasks are snapshots and are refreshed by clicking on the refresh button in the lower right corner of the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 About configuration report When creating your pdf configuration reports you can include any possible elements of your system which you want to see in the report Examples of what can be included ranges from licenses over device to alarm configuration and much more Furthermore you can customize your font and page setup and include a customized front page as listed Add a configuration report 1 From the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand System Dashboard and click Configuration Reports This brings up the report configuration page 2 Select the elements that you want to include in your report 3 Optional Click Front Page to customize your front page In the window that appears
403. notification profile is triggered You can change this to the number of seconds you require Specify the number of frames per second you want the AVI file to Frame rate contain Default is five frames per second The higher the frame rate the higher the image quality and AVI file size Manage user defined events If the event you require is not on the Events Overview list you can create your own user defined events Such user defined events can be useful if you want to integrate other systems with your surveillance system Example With user defined events you can use data received from a third party access control system as events in the system the events can subsequently trigger actions This way you can for example begin recording video from relevant cameras when somebody enters a building User defined events can also be used for manually triggering events while viewing live video in the XProtect Smart Client see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 or automatically if used in rules see Manage rules on page 226 Example When user defined event 37 occurs PTZ camera 224 should stop patrolling and go to preset position 18 Through roles see Specify rights of a role on page 262 you define which of your users should be able to trigger the user defined events User defined events can be used in two ways simultaneously if required e For providing the ability to manually trigger events in the XProtect Smart Client
404. ns to browse for the required domain 3 Inthe Enter the object names to select box type the required user names initials or other types of identifier which Active Directory can recognize Tip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the names initials etc you have typed are recognized by Active Directory 4 Click OK The selected users groups are now added to the Users amp Groups tab s list of users who have been assigned the selected role Assign basic users to role www milestonesys com 261 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 a Select Basic User This opens the Select Basic Users to add to Role dialog Select Basie Liners to add to Role Hen b Select the basic user s that you want to assign to this role Optional Click New to create a new basic user c Click OK The selected basic user s are now added to the Users amp Groups tab s list of basic users who have been assigned the selected role Remove users and groups from role Bear in mind that a user may also have roles through group memberships When that is the case you cannot remove the individual user from the role Group members may also hold roles as individuals To find out which roles users groups or individual group members have use the Effective Roles see Manage roles on page 257 feature a Onthe Users amp Groups tab selec
405. ns dialog lets you specify a number of settings related to the appearance of the application to logging to mail server configuration etc You access the Options dialog from the Management Client s menu bar see Management Client overview on page 54 by selecting Tools gt Options The Options dialog features the following tabs General Specify the following from Options see Options on page 293 General tab www milestonesys com 293 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Number of log rows to retrieve per page Default preview frame rate Max no of previews Motion detection on when adding camera devices Enable multicast live when adding camera devices Language Timeout for PTZ sessions www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Select how many rows to appear on a single log page The default value is 50 rows If a log contains more rows than your selected value it displays the additional rows on additional pages Select which frame rate to use for the thumbnail camera images displayed in the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Default is 1 frame per second Refreshing the Management Client layout by pressing F5 on your keyboard or selecting Action gt Refresh from the menu bar is required for a change to take effect Note that a high frame rate that is a high image quality in combination with a large number of thumbnail images in the Preview pane may slow the s
406. ns out to be required for a recording in which case it is automatically added to the recording Speakers Unlike video and incoming audio which the system continuously receives from connected cameras and microphones outgoing audio is only transmitted when XProtect Smart Client users press a button to talk through speakers This can depending on which events or times are used to start recordings mean that there will be very little or no outgoing audio available for prebuffering Illustration of how prebuffered video audio is added to a recording This is the stream received by the system These are the initial boundaries of a recording as defined for example by start and stop events mMm p However a rule specifies that recording should start 5 seconds prior to the start event so 5 seconds of prebuffered video or audio is added This is what is actually recorded Enable and disable prebuffering Prebuffering is by default enabled with a prebuffer size of 3 seconds To enable disable prebuffering select clear the Pre buffer in seconds check box When enabling remember to specify a prebuffer size www milestonesys com 166 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Specify prebuffer Select or type the required prebuffer size in seconds in the Pre buffer check box Clicking the Pre buffer box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one
407. nstallation or upgrade scenario is handled by one common installer Depending on your selections this installer installs all or some of the following components e Management server the center of your system installation Typically installed on a dedicated server e Recording server used for recording video feeds communicating with cameras via video device drivers see Manage video device drivers on page 330 and other devices Typically installed on one or more separate computers rather than on the machine where the management server is installed The needed video device drivers are automatically installed along with the recording server Tip Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the cameras connected to a recording server As mentioned you get the drivers automatically during installation However new versions of the drivers are released from time to time and must be downloaded from the management server s download web page and installed manually e Management Client used for configuration and day to day management of the system Typically installed on the system administrator s workstation or similar e XProtect Smart Client feature rich client used for accessing live and recorded video and other features from your XProtect system Must be installed on users computers see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 e Service channel enables automatic and transparent configuration c
408. nt Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Enter password Must be identical to the one entered when the Passwords for ST server Axis One Click Connection Component was installed Register Unregister at the Indicate whether you wish to register your Axis camera with the Axis Dispatch Service Axis dispatch service Can be done at time of setup or later only relevant for hardware Hardware serial number as specified by Serial number the manufacturer The serial number is often but not always identical to the MAC address If it was decided during installation of the ST server to use Use credentials credentials select the check box User name for Dispatch Enter user name Must be identical to the one received from your Server system provider Enter user name Must be identical to the one entered when the User name for ST server Axis One Click Connection Component was installe Servers and hardware Add hardware The Add Hardware wizard helps you detect IP hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders on your network and add them to recording servers on your system 1 To access Add Hardware expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select the Recording Server node 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the required recording server and select Add Hardware The wizard off
409. nt file in quiet mode Sets the language for the installer and product e g en US Sets the partner ID Used mostly for the Download Manager Sets the ID for the Internet Download Manager Installs the software in quiet mode Shows this message Enables extended msi logging Sets the path to the log file Enables the Customer Expenence Improvement Program Generates a file with the default argurnents im the folder Enables console output in quiet mode Sets the path to the license file Sets the hcense type Registers this installer on the download page 36 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Install your system on virtual servers You can run all system components on virtualized see Installation overview on page 29 Windows servers such as for example VMware and Microsoft Hyper V Contact your IT department for more information Tip Virtualization is often preferred to better utilize hardware resources Normally virtual servers running on the hardware host server do not load the virtual server to a great extent and often not at the same time However recording servers record all cameras and video streams This puts high load on CPU memory network and storage system So when run on a virtual server the normal gain of virtualization disappears to a large extent since in many cases it will use all available resources If ru
410. nt server logs See Manage logs on page 273 for more information Mail server The Options on page 293 Mail Server tab lets you specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server you are going to use with your system Type the e mail address you want to appear as the sender of e mail Sender e mail address notifications for all notification profiles Example sender organization org Type the name of the SMTP mail server which will be used for sending e mail notifications for all notification profiles Example mailserver organization org Outgoing mail SMTP server name AVI generation The Options see Options on page 293 AVI Generation tab lets you specify compression settings for the generation of AVI video clip files Specifying these settings is necessary if you want to include AVI files in e mail notifications sent out by rule triggered notification profiles see Manage notification profiles on page 239 opecify the following from Options on page 293 AVI generation tab Select the required codec compression decompression technology Indeo 5 10 if available generally provides a good compromise between quality and file size You can configure some but not all codecs Compressor www milestonesys com 295 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Not available for all codecs Use the slider to select the required degree of compression 0 100 to be performe
411. ntegration ined features and of new features plug l plug ins ins etc www milestonesys com 24 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Users who require audio access to the Recommended latest features and who use demand a high degree of flexibility regarding use of plug ins Users with Internet access who prefer a limited feature set and find a web based client suitable to their needs Users on the move who prefer a limited feature set and find a mobile client suitable to their needs How to connect to the system Users connect to the management server for initial authentication then transparently to the recording servers for access to for video recordings etc How do I set up users and their rights You set up your surveillance system s users and their access rights as part of the roles see Manage roles on page 257 definition process in the Management Client Find more information Manuals are available on the product DVD or on hitp www milestonesys com downloads e XProtect Smart Client introduction see Install XProtect Smart Client on page 25 and Milestone XProtect Smart Client User s Manual e XProtect Web Client tutorials e Milestone Mobile Administrator s Manual http clouddownload milestonesys com XProtect 20Mobile 2020a Manuals MilestoneXProte ctMobile Administrators Manual en US pdf Install XProtect Smart Client The XProtect Smart Client provide
412. nternal processes on the management server only Port 8844 Used for User Datagram Protocol UDP communication between failover recording servers Port 9000 Used by management servers for communication between the system and XProtect Transact Port 9993 Used for communication between recording servers and management servers Port 11000 Used by failover recording servers for polling i e regularly checking the state of recording servers www milestonesys com 44 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Port 12345 Used by management servers and XProtect Smart Client for communicating between the system and Matrix recipients Port 22331 Used for communication between event server and XProtect Smart Client and event Server and Management Client Port 65101 Used between processes on the same machine only i e Inter Process Communication IPC on a single machine only Multiple management servers cluster The management server can be installed on multiple servers within a cluster of servers This ensures that the system has very little down time If a server in the cluster fails another server in the cluster will automatically take over the failed server s job running the management server The automatic process of switching over the server service to run on another server in the cluster only takes a very short time up to 30 seconds Note that the allowed number of failover
413. nterprise server IP Host name field 4 Enter the port number used by the XProtect Enterprise server s Image Server in the Port number field Tip The default port number is 80 if in doubt you can find the port number in the Image Server Administrator window on the XProtect Enterprise server 5 Now enter information about the administrator of the XProtect Enterprise server You can do this in two ways o Select Windows and click the browse button to the right of the User name field to use the Windows authentication method which authenticates the administrator through the administrator s Windows login Of o Select Basic and enter the XProtect Enterprise administrator s user name and password in the User name and Password fields The reason why it is important that you enter the XProtect Enterprise administrator information is that you as administrator then will have unlimited rights to data from both your system and the XProtect Enterprise installation The connection to the XProtect Enterprise server is now established but no roles in the Management Client except the Administrator role have been given access to data from the XProtect Enterprise server Refer to Define roles with access to XProtect Enterprise servers on page 289 for more information about giving users access to data from added XProtect Enterprise servers Remember to define the network configuration settings so the management server will be able to handl
414. number of preview images you want in your Preview pane as well as their frame rate select Options gt General from the Tools menu By default the information shown with preview images in the Preview pane will concern cameras live streams shown in green text If you want information about recording streams instead select Show Recording Streams Recording stream information will be shown in red text By default the Federated Site Hierarchy pane is enabled and this command lets you toggle it on and off By default the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 is enabled and this command lets you toggle it on and off 63 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Customize the Management Client s layout You can rearrange panes in the Management Client and customize its look to suit your needs If you rearrange the panes you can always reset the entire layout to the Management Client s default layout Resize panes You can resize panes by dragging the borders of the panes 1 Place your mouse pointer over a border 2 When the pointer becomes a double headed arrow drag the border in the required direction The size of the content inside the panes stays the same regardless of the size of the panes with one exception the larger the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 is the larger preview images and state information will appear a
415. o the right of the properties column 3 Change the value of the property 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the gray information box below the settings table Read the input list S status icons The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 input see Manage input on page 145 and output see Manage output on page 150 events in item lists www milestonesys com 149 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 E Item enabled The device is enabled and we retrieve a cp A Q vo we ea Can be started stopped automatically through a rule a d 2i Item recording Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules 7n 2 A da When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recordin
416. o to the Failover tab 3 To choose failover setup type see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 select either None Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group or Hot standby server If relevant select the needed server or groups from the dropdowns You cannot select the same failover group as both primary and secondary failover group Also regular failover servers already part of a failover group cannot be selected as hot standby servers Tip From the Primary Secondary failover server group dropdowns select Add new to create new failover groups and add failover recording servers 4 Next click Advanced failover settings this opens the Advanced Failover Settings window listing all devices attached to the selected recording server Tip Even if you selected None Advanced failover settings will be available Any selections are kept for later failover setups 5 To specify the level of failover support select Full Support Live Only or Disabled for each device in the list Click OK 6 Finally in the Failover service communication port TCP field edit the port number if needed www milestonesys com 104 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Failover tab properties None Select a setup without failover Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group Select a regular failover setup with one primary and
417. ode Generic Event 3 In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 do the following o In String to send as generic event enter Please RecordCameral1 that would be nice o In Data source to send event string to select International 4 Click Send If you did not change default echo settings refer to Generic Event Data Source Settings see Generic events Options settings on page 298 you should get the following response in Echo from event server and local error message 1 39 1 RecCam 1 This means that request number 1 had 39 characters and that there was 1 match with a generic event named RecCam1 To try out the event from a non XProtect application start a DOS box enter telnet localhost 1235 and press Enter Next type RecordCamera1 that would be nice and press Enter You should get the same response What is Telnet Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet however you might have to enable Telnet on you machine before using it www milestonesys com 250 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Generic event properties Unique name for the generic event Name must be unique among Name all types of events such as user defined events analytics event
418. oeer esas vacui Saa v netus deve caca aar Ob Ue su Evan E RE cupP METUS 239 Manage user defined evells erii crm ooau nianu sia sexe aetas abu eU US enn s suc cusuusiua cuneus kacrsOIMi uM Uus 243 Manage ANAIVIICS events 5 ierra Ee coca ense natos a censa ma Das nane aE 245 Manage Geneli eVellisiuciiascxaceieiu atatum Rc rix cub nxEr le aix Miu mac dU DEREN E ER Der DNEE DUE 248 lup e 255 ADOT SECUTI Y C S 255 hing fcc 255 PID OUT DASIC USETS me nn X m 269 SYSTEM DASHBOARD T 270 About system dashboard snnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 270 About Eiccinlniii 270 ADOUt CUEN TASK cosses aE aa 272 About configuration report ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 272 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 SERVER LOGS soies P 273 Monade logs rep E E 273 ALARM osora a a 279 Manage Alari S i 279 More AIO CU alarms seer A EER 280 Alarm defiNil N c aani aiaia 282 Alam Data SENNO S con E E A AEE 286 SOUNA SENG Seaain EE EE 287 APRHOTECT ENTEBPHISE dicir an 287
419. of the management server Also verify that the user account under which the Failover Server service runs has access to your system with administrator rights By default failover recording servers are enabled If you have disabled it you must enable it see Setup and enable failover recording servers on page 334 be fore it can take over from recording servers All failover recording servers should always be installed on separate computers www milestonesys com 331 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 lt is possible to specify what type of failover support you want on device level see Assign failover recording servers on page 104 For each device on a recording server you can select full live only or no failover support This helps you prioritize your failover resources and for example only set up failover for video and not for audio or only have failover on essential cameras not on less important ones A failover recording server has two services installed A Failover Server service which handles the processes of taking over from the recording server By default this service is always running constantly checking the state of relevant recording servers A Failover Recording Server service on page 339 which enables the failover recording server to act as a recording server In a failover group setup this service is only started when required
420. ofile Prerequisites When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it continuously moves between different preset positions Therefore the required preset positions and at least one patrolling scheme must be defined for the PTZ camera in question Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e The camera in question is a PTZ camera e Atleast two preset positions are defined for the camera How to define preset positions To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select Cameras In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required PTZ camera from the list then select the Presets tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 For descriptions of the exact functionality of the Presets tab refer to Preset positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 130 e Atleast one patrolling profile is defined for the camera www milestonesys com 203 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 How to define a patrolling profile To define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select Cameras In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required PTZ camera from the list then select the Patrolling tab
421. oint to management servers not the other way round The configuration normally takes place during one of the steps in the recording server installation process Here you specify recording server setup parameters among these the IP address or host name of the management server to which the recording server should be connected Fortunately you do not have to re install recording servers in order to specify which management servers they should connect to Once a recording server is installed you can verify change its basic configuration the following way 1 Onthe computer running the recording server right click the Recording Server icon in the notification area 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Recording Server service Important Stopping the Recording Server service means that you cannot record and view live video while you verify change the recording server s basic configuration 3 Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon again 4 From the menu that appears select Change Settings The Recording Server Settings window appears Verify change the following settings o Management server hostname IP address Specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the management server to which the recording server should be connected This information is necessary in order for the recording server to be able to communicate with the management server o Management server port S
422. ol in Milestone Federated Architecture 312 Accept inclusion in hierarchy 307 308 315 316 Access clients 14 Access registered services configuration 293 Access the server service 350 351 Action menu items 62 Actions and Stop actions 170 191 207 211 212 216 217 274 312 Activate licenses online 69 72 73 74 83 178 328 367 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Activate licenses after grace day period 72 Active Directory 22 Active Directory user and group concepts 257 Add a configuration report 273 Add a device group 141 Add a generic event 250 Add a patrolling profile 128 Add a preset position type 1 132 Add a role and manage its XProtect Smart Client and time profiles 187 236 259 Add a rule 89 230 Add a storage area 101 104 Add a stream 137 Add a user defined event 245 Add a view group 185 Add an alarm 286 Add an analytics event 246 247 Add an event 171 Add and configure a Smart Client profile e 185 Add and edit registered services 293 Add basic user 271 Add hardware 59 78 82 87 96 114 138 144 146 147 151 152 296 Add hardware to a recording server 96 Add Matrix recipients 189 Add notification profiles 241 Add site to hierarchy 305 306 315 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Add users and groups through Active Directory normal way 257 Add users not using Active
423. om 121 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The blue exclude area indications will only appear in the preview image on the Motion tab not in any other preview images in the Management Client or access clients Grid Size The value selected in the Grid size list determines the density of the grid regardless whether the grid is shown or not Select between the values 8x8 i e a grid dividing the image into eight sections along the X axis and eight sections along the Y axis 16x16 32x32 or 64x64 With a grid of 8x8 the image will be divided into relatively few sections for you to select for exclude regions Each section will be relatively large you will not be able to define very detailed exclude regions With a grid size of 64x64 the image will be divided into relatively many sections for you to select for exclude regions Each section will be relatively small enabling you to define more detailed exclude regions Examples of 8x8 16x16 32x32 and 64x64 grids respectively The four different grid sizes Show Grid The grid may be visible or hidden depending on whether the Show grid check box is selected or not When the Show grid check box is selected default the preview image will feature a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections The grid may help you when selecting exclude regions in the preview image The density of the grid is determined
424. omatic IIS installation fails you will see an error message asking you to install the IIS manually In the error message box click Install IIS Manually oelect Server Manager from Windows Start menu In the left side of the Server Manager window select Roles then the Roles Summary Now select Add Roles to start a wizard In the wizard click Next select Web Server IIS and follow the wizard s steps When you reach the wizard s Select Role Services step you will see that some role services are selected by default However you should select some additional role services o Under Security select Basic Authentication and Windows authentication o Under Management Tools select IIS Management Console expand it and select IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility IIS 6 WMI Compatibility IIS 6 Scripting Tools and IIS 6 Management Console Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When ready the relevant part of the Role services tree should look like this EM Security B j V Basic Authentication Ex IJ Windows Authentication i Select Role Services Digest Authentication F Chent Certificate Mapping Authentication _ IIS Client Certificate Mapping Authentication Add Roles Wirare Before Y gt eae are xpi URL Authorization serv ei Web Server 115 T m V Request Filtering IP and Domain Restrictions EX Performance V Static Content Compression
425. omatically added These sub directories each represent approximately an hour s worth of recordings The one hour split makes it possible to remove only relatively small parts of an archive s data if the maximum allowed size of the archive is reached The sub directories are named after the device followed by an indication of whether recordings come from an edge camera or via SMTP if relevant plus the date and time of the most recent database record contained in the sub directory Naming structure Storage Path Storage name N device name plus date and time of most recent recording If from edge camera Storage Path Storage name device name Edge plus date and time of most recent recording If from SMTP Storage Path Storage name device name SMTP plus date and time of most recent recording Real life example www milestonesys com 92 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4PrfNOurArchiveVvyArchivelWXCamera 1 on Axis 07404 Video Server 10 100 50 137 2011 10 05T11 23 474 02 00 Even further sub directories are automatically added The amount and nature of these sub directories depend on the nature of the actual recordings For example several different such sub directories will be added if the recordings are technically divided into sequences something which is often the case if motion detection has been used to trigger recordings If
426. ome physical cameras are able to store recordings on their own local storage Either on request or automatically depending on settings recordings can be retrieved from remote storages to the surveillance system when the network is re established To save bandwidth it is possible to set up rules regarding when to retrieves recordings With remote systems the principle is the same However recordings are not retrieved from remote cameras edge storages but from remote systems recording servers Select Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connections are restored see Retrieve remote recordings from remote site camera on page 88 to enable automatic retrieval of recordings once connection is re established The type of hardware selected determines where recordings are retrieved from e Fora camera with local recording storage recording are retrieved from the camera s local recording storage e Fora Milestone Interconnect remote system they are retrieved from the remote systems recording servers see About Milestone Interconnect on page 85 Note that the Retrieve remote recordings from devices rule see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 can be used independently of this setting Events tab overview On the Events tab you can manage events from hardware cameras microphones or Milestone Interconnect remote systems see About Milestone Interconnect on page 85 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview
427. ome registered services are advanced When a service is advanced it has specific URI schemes for example http https tcp or udp that need to be set up for each host address you define A host address therefore has multiple endpoints each with its own scheme host address and IP port for that scheme 1 In the Add Remove Registered Services window click Add or Edit depending on your needs 2 In the Add Registered Service or Edit Registered Service window depending on your earlier selection specify or edit settings see Registered services settings on page 293 3 Click OK Manage network configuration With the network configuration settings you specify the management server s server LAN and WAN addresses in order for the management server and the trusted servers to be able to communicate 1 In the Add Remove Registered Services window click Network 2 Specify the LAN and or WAN IP address of the management server If all involved servers both the management server and the trusted servers or the required XProtect Enterprise are on your local network you can simply specify the LAN address If one or more involved servers access the system through an internet connection you must also specify the WAN address mz Network Configuration M Server Sethegs Server address LAN NO 10 43 191 Server address WAN 3 Click OK www milestonesys com 292 Management Client Milestone XProtect Adva
428. ommunication between servers and clients in your system By default installed on the management server but if you need to increase performance it can be installed on another server e Event server handles alarms and maps Does not have to be installed on the management server better performance can often be achieved by installing it on another dedicated server e Log server provides the necessary functionality for logging information from your system By default installed on the management server but if you need to increase performance it can be installed on another server When installing the event server or log server the URL address of the management server is expressed like this http 123 123 123 123 f installing the event server or log server on the management server itself this should be specified as ocalhost The address can also include a port like this http 123 123 123 123 2356 or http Localhost 2356 www milestonesys com 29 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The common installer saves all components on the management server s download web page no matter whether you install them or not Once you have run the installer single components can be re Jinstalled from the management server download web page see Download Manager download web page on page 38 Refer to Download Manager s standard installers users see Download Manager s standard installers user
429. oms erices aaau a t Configure 4 Service or 4polication View P Refresh Help 2 Inthe High Availability dialog click Next select Generic Service and click Next Do not specify anything on the third page of the dialog click Next 3 Select the Milestone XProtect Management Server service click Next Specify the name host name of the cluster that clients use when accessing the service click Next 4 No storage is required for the service click Next No registry settings should be replicated click Next Verify that the cluster service is configured according to your needs click Next The management server is now configured as a generic service in the failover cluster Click Finish 5 In the cluster setup the event server and the Data Collector should be set as a dependent service of the management server so the event server will stop when the management server is stopped 6 To add the Milestone XProtect Event Server service as a resource to the Milestone XProtect Management Server Cluster service right click the cluster service and click Add a resource gt 4 Generic Service and select Milestone XProtect Event Server 7 Repeat step 6 but instead of the event server select to add Milestone XProtect Data Collector Server Upgrade in a cluster Make sure to have a backup of the database in question before updating the cluster 1 Stop the Management Server services see Management Server service and Recordin
430. on Services IIS 5 1 or newer If you are installing on Windows Server 2008 you must customize a standard IIS installation 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel then select Programs and Features 2 Inthe Programs and Features window click Turn Windows features on or off This opens the Windows Features window window name may be different depending on which operating system you are installing the service channel on 3 Inthe Windows Features window expand Internet Information Services 4 Expand and select Web Management Tools then expand and select IIS 6 Management Compatibility then select IIS Metabase and IIS 6 configuration compatibility 5 Expand and select World Wide Web Services then expand and select Application Development Features then select the following NET Extensibility ASP ASP NET ISAPI Extensions ISAPI Filters 6 Expand and select Security then select Windows Authentication 7 Click OK www milestonesys com 21 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Computer running XProtect Smart Client Intel Core2 Duo minimum 2 0 GHz Quad Core recommended for CPU larger views RAM Minimum 512 MB 1 GB recommended for larger views 1 GB recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics Adapter AGP or PCI Express minimum 1280 x 1024 16 bit colors Hard Disk Space Minimum 500 MB free gt M
431. one to one relationship between sites and XProtect Smart Clients How do view video from federated sites You can view video from federated sites in any XProtect Smart Client i e there is no need for a one to one relationship between sites and XProtect Smart Clients You will always get the view i e see the site structure as the parent you are currently logged in to The next item section is only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate Can include XProtect Enterprise slave s in my federated hierarchy Yes that is possible but only as slave s to a management server For more details on how the relationship with the XProtect lt ENames gt server will work refer to Manage XProtect Enterprise servers on page 287 Is Milestone Federated Architecture the same as multiple management servers a k a clustering No Milestone Federated Architecture is not the same as clustering Clustering is a method of obtaining failover support for a management server on a site With clustering it is only possible to have one active management server per surveillance setup but other management servers may be set up to take over in case of failure On the other hand Milestone Federated Architecture is a method of combining multiple independent sites into one large setup offering flexibility and unlimited possibilities Refer to Manage Milestone Federated Architecture on page 312 Refer to Defining alarms see Alarm definitions on page 282 for
432. onfiguration Furthermore being able to easily do a manual backup of your entire system configuration via your Management Client no need for third party tools offers you flexibility security and full control of your configuration The type of backup described in this topic is best suited if you have a smaller system setup and wish to do a one time non scheduled backup Besides manual backups it is strongly recommended to also configure regular scheduled system backups see Scheduled backup and restore of system configuration on page 320 especially if you run a larger system setup What is included in this type of backup and what is not With the exception of logs this backup type includes your full system configuration client views event server configuration and configuration of any Milestone published MIP plug ins Before backing up and restoring any system configuration you must set a backup folder for this purpose 1 Right click the notification area s management server service icon and select Select shared backup folder 2 In the window that appears browse to the wanted file location 3 Click OK twice 4 f asked if you want to delete files in the current backup folder click Yes or No depending on your needs Important information e Both the user installing and the user doing the restore must be local administrator on the management server and on the SQL server e Except for your recording servers your system
433. ons for you to select for privacy mask regions Each section will be relatively small enabling you to define more detailed privacy mask regions Examples of 8x8 16x16 32x32 and 64x64 grids respectively p TTA T LB Fi LI LED Siedes The four different grid sizes The grid may be visible or hidden depending on whether the Show grid check box is selected or not When the Show grid check box is selected default the preview image will feature a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections The grid may help you when selecting privacy mask regions in the preview image Showing the grid is not a requirement for selecting privacy mask regions even without the grid you are able to select privacy mask regions as described above Hiding the grid may provide a less obscured view of the preview image 125 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When the Show privacy masks check box is selected default privacy mask regions will be highlighted in red in the preview image Hiding privacy mask regions may provide a less obscured view of Show Privacy Masks the preview image However under normal circumstances it is highly recommended that you keep the Show privacy masks box selected otherwise exclude privacy mask regions may exist without you or your colleagues being aware of it Use the Pen size slider to indicate the size of the selections you w
434. open a command prompt in the directory where the installation program is located and execute following command gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe generateargsfile args xml Open the generated args xml file using for example Windows Notepad and perform any changes needed Then in order to run silent installation using these modified values execute following command in the same directory gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe arguments args xml quiet Navigate the built in help system online You can always freely navigate between the help system s contents To do this use the help window s three tabs Contents Search and Glossary or use the links inside the help topics Navigate the help system based on a tree structure Many users will Coments be familiar with this type of navigation from for example Windows Explorer To go straight to the help system s Contents tab click Contents button in the Management Client s toolbar Search for help topics containing particular terms of interest For example you can search for the term zoom and every help topic containing the term zoom will be listed in the search results Search Clicking a help topic title in the search results list will open the required topic To go straight to the help system s Search tab click the Search button in the Management Client s toolbar What is a video encoder What does PTZ mean The Glossary tab Glossary provides a glossary of common s
435. or example svcMilestone 2 Add svcMilestone example name only to the following local Windows user groups on the server running the system in the trusting domain o Administrators o IHS IUSRS Windows Server 2008 necessary for Internet Information Services IIS Application Pools o IIS WPG Windows Server 2003 necessary for IIS Application Pools 3 Ensure that the svcMilestone example name only account has system administrator rights on your SQL Database or SQL Server Express either directly or through the BUILTIN Administrators group 4 Setthe identity of the ManagementServerAppPool Application Pool in the IIS to the svcMilestone example name only account 5 Reboot the server to ensure all group membership and permission changes take effect IMPORTANT To add trusted domain users to new or existing XProtect system roles log in to Windows as a trusted domain user Next launch the Management Client and log in as user of either www milestonesys com 363 Multi domain with one way trust Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 the trusting domain or the trusted domain If you log in to Windows as a trusting domain user you are asked for credentials for the trusted domain in order to browse for users www milestonesys com 364 Multi domain with one way trust Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Appendix Ports used by the system If nothing else is stated
436. or each device in the list Click OK 6 Finally in the Failover service communication port TCP field edit the port number if needed www milestonesys com 337 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Failover tab properties None Select a setup without failover Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group Select a regular failover setup with one primary and possibly one secondary failover server group Also from the attached dropdown select a primary failover group and possibly a secondary failover group Hot standby server Select a hot standby setup Also from the dropdown select a hot standby server Advanced failover settings Opens the Advanced Failover Settings window o Full Support Select to get full failover support for the device o Live Only Select to get live failover support for the device o Disabled Select to disable failover support for the device Failover service communication port TCP By default the port number is 11000 This port is used for communication between recording servers and failover recording servers If changed the recording server in question must be running and must be connected to the management server meanwhile Failover related events Your system features two failover related events Failover Started and Failover Stopped which you can use when creating rules see Manage rules o
437. order for the rule to apply In this example the event should occur on an input called Back Door Sensor in order for the rule to apply In the Select Devices and Groups window we therefore drag the input www milestonesys com 214 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Back Door Sensor to the Selected list and click OK By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Next Eda the tule descmnplion chck an underlined te Perform an action on out Activated from Back Door Sensor Click Next to move to step 2 of the wizard 4 Onstep 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply In this example we want the rule to apply whenever input is activated on the back door sensor regardless of time When creating event based rules it is possible to bypass the time conditions we therefore want to skip the wizard s step 2 entirely Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard 5 On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform gt In this example we want to two things to happen patrolling should pause and the PTZ camera should move to a specific preset position with a specific priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 We therefore select the actions Pause patrolling on lt devices gt and Move lt device gt to lt preset gt position
438. ore details Add site to hierarchy www milestonesys com 313 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 wr pe e dw In the Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the relevant site right click and click Add Site to Hierarchy He fat View Action Toot Help ven ol A Via Mv he T T gt Add Site to Hierarchy CTRL Insert the URL of the requested child in the Add Site to Hierarchy window Click OK A link to the new child site is added to the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane If you can establish the new child link without requesting acceptance from the administrator see Prerequisites described earlier skip to step 7 If not the new child has the awaiting acceptance see Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 314 Uf icon and its administrator must authorize the request Make sure the child s administrator authorizes the link request this is done from the child site The new parent child link is established and the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated with the V icon for the new child Due to synchronization issues any changes made to children located far from your home site might take some time to be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 305 Accept inclusion in hierarchy You must accept a child link request manually if your
439. ork tab recording server properties on page 109 i e the address of the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether a client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you can define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network Working with Local IP Address ranges 1 In the Management Client s menu bar select Tools Options This will open the Options dialog see Options on page 293 Tip You can also access the Options dialog from the Network tab this can be handy if you are also configuring the public IP address of a recording server 2 n the Options dialog select the Network tab Define local IP address ranges On the Network tab click Add a Inthe Range Start column specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the Range End column Tip If required a range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 b If more ranges are required repeat steps a b c Click OK Edit local IP address ranges a Overwrite the existing information in the Range Start and Range End columns as required b Click OK www milestonesys com 301 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manu
440. ou are able to specify a very specific recording frame rate average over time for example of 20 15 FPS Recording frame rate MJPEG 2015 EM FPS www milestonesys com 165 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Prebuffer Prebuffering is essentially the ability to save video and audio in the camera s or microphone s database before the initial boundaries of a recording It can be highly advantageous as it allows you to save video and audio from before the events or times used to start recordings Cameras and microphones If for example you have created a rule specifying that recording should start when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be useful Such prebuffering is possible since the system continuously receives streams of video and audio from connected cameras and microphones unless the transfer of video or audio from cameras or microphones has in some way been disabled Storing video and audio from before the initial boundaries of a recording is therefore not a problem video and audio passes through the system anyway When prebuffering is enabled for a camera or a microphone the system continuously records video or audio from the camera s or microphones stream and provisionally stores it in the database for a specified number of seconds before automatically deleting it unless the provisionally stored video or audio tur
441. ou have selected time elements in order to overwrite them you are also able to use your keyboard s UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit 7 Click Export to export the required log content to the required location Handle log settings Your system has a number of default settings related to its logs To verify or change these settings do the following 1 Goto the Management Client s menu bar and select Tools gt Options 2 Inthe Options window select the General tab One of the tab s settings applies for all types of logs o Number of log rows to retrieve per page Lets you specify the number of log rows you want to view on a single log page If a log contains more than the specified number of rows you will be able view the remaining rows on subsequent log pages 3 Goto the Options window s Management Server Logs tab Options X Bureud Sorem Lagi biai Savm 4 armain Hobe Log satires Ca regi C Dima ba heop keg rima E Haaren mr ol o ene 1 Hap IE Carel In the tab s left box select the required log The selected log s settings are displayed in the tab s right box o Log enabled Lets you enable disable the selected log By default all logs except the Event Log are enabled The System Log and Audit Log cannot be disabled by clearing the box o Days to keep log entries Lets you specify how many days the log s information should b
442. owed external IPv4 addresses Allowed external IPv6 addresses Administrator s Manual Protocol type selector Selectable protocols which the system should listen for and analyze in order to detect the generic event Any TCP as well as UDP TCP TCP only UDP UDP only Tip It is OK for TCP and UDP packages used for generic events to contain special characters such as a etc Selectable IPv address types IPv4 IPv6 or both Indicates the separator bytes used to separate individual generic event records Default for data source type International see Data sources earlier is 13 10 13 10 lt cr gt lt if gt Selectable echo return formats gt Echo statistics Echoes the following format X Y Z Name of generic event X request number Y number of characters Z number of matches with a generic event Name of generic event name entered in the Name field gt Echo all bytes Echoes all bytes gt No echo Suppresses all echoing selectable encodings By default the list only shows the most relevant options Select Show all see next bullet to display all available encodings Encoding is used for interpreting incoming bytes and turning these into strings of characters which can be matched against the strings entered as expressions for generic events See previous bullet Allowed IPv4 addresses Select between allowed addresses Depending on you selection in the
443. ownload on Google Play and the App Store System requirements IMPORTANT Your system no longer supports Microsoft Windows XP however you can still run access clients from computers with Windows XP Professional For easy user group management see Manage users and groups on page 255 Milestone recommends that you have Microsoft Active Directory in place before you install your system If you add the management server to the Active Directory after installing you must re install the management server and replace users with new users defined in the Active Directory For information about system requirements for the various components of your system read the release notes available on the software DVD as well as on www milestonesys com The following are minimum requirements for the computers used Computer running management server CPU Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Dual Core recommended RAM Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Adapter de GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit www milestonesys com 15 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Hard Disk Type Hard Disk Space Operating System Software Administrator s Manual E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 50 GB free depends on number of servers cameras rules and logging settings Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Mi
444. p Use a descriptive name the name may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about the item e g when using it in a rule 5 Click OK Test a preset position 1 Select the required preset position in the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera 2 Click Test 3 The Presets tab s preview image moves to the selected preset position Tip If the preview image does not appear to move to the selected preset position when you Click Test verify that preview image does not already show the selected preset position In that case try testing another preset position first 360 Lens tab camera properties Use of 360 technology requires a dedicated ImmerVision 360 lens mounted In this way 360 technology enables a o t panomorph technology through an advanced lens The 360 Lens tab lets you enable and configure panomorph support for the selected camera www milestonesys com 134 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Tip If you find that a camera with an ImmerVision 360 lens mounted takes a very long time to initialize try turning the lens back and forth a bit This long initializing time might be due to the lens no being fitted optimally Properties 350 Lent J Enable panomomh sot immersion Erables paromorph RPL number My Camera postion onentation Cebng mount Pc a Q x Lens 7 Enable and disable panomorph
445. p and restoration features Download and install the tool on your existing management server and on the server which will be your future management server you will need it for the entire copy process backup as well as restoration Management server hostname and IP address When you move the management server from one physical server to another physical server it is by far the easiest to give the new server the same hostname and IP address as the old one This is due to the fact that the recording server will connect to the hostname and IP address of the old management server In case the new management server has been given a new hostname and or IP address the recording server will not be able to find the management server Manually stop each recording server in your system change their management server URL and when done restart them Move system configuration Moving your system configuration is in reality a three step process 1 First you make a copy of your system configuration identical to making a scheduled backup see Scheduled back up of system configuration on page 321 2 Then you install the new management server on the new server refer to scheduled backup see Scheduled back up of system configuration on page 321 step 2 3 And finally you copy restore your system configuration to the new system refer to restore a scheduled backup see Restore system configuration from scheduled back up on page 322 Copy s
446. p node Generic Event In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 fill in the needed information Click Send Depending on your selected data source You might get a response an echo from the event server in the Echo from event server and local error message field This can be either Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 successful or failed Refer to Generic event test properties see Generic event test properties on page 252 Example Create and test a simple generic event To trigger recording on Camera1 you must send the string RecordCameral1 to a TCP port on the event server But the event server will not understand RecordCamerat1 as such you will have to teach it 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Rules and Events right click Generic Events and select Add New o Inthe Name field enter for example RecCam1 o Inthe Expression field enter RecordCamerat o Inthe Data source field select International 2 Save your changes Next add a rule see Manage rules on page 226 defining that when the generic event RecCam1 is triggered recording should start on Camerat1 When done test the scenario from the Management Client 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Rules and Events select Generic Events 2 n the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the top n
447. p rules regarding when to retrieves recordings With remote systems the principle is the same However recordings are not retrieved from remote cameras edge storages but from remote systems recording servers Direct playback from remote sites on request good network connections The most straight forward setup The central site is continuously on line with its remote sites which send remote recordings on request Central site users play back remote recordings directly from the remote sites This requires use of the Play back recordings from remote system option see Playback remote system on page 165 Rule or XProtect Smart Client based retrieval of selected remote recording sequences from remote sites periodically limited network connections Used when selected recording sequences originating from remote sites should be stored centrally to ensure independence from remote sites Independence is crucial in case of network failure or network restrictions Configuring retrieval of remote recordings when the network connection is optimal i e not used for other priority data can be done from the Remote Recordings tab see Remote Retrieval tab on page 173 Alternatively remote recordings retrieval can be started from the XProtect Smart Client when needed or a rule can be set up In some scenarios remote sites are on line and in others off line most of the time This is often industry specific For some industries it is common for the
448. pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select the PTZ tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Not all video encoders support the use of PTZ cameras Even video encoders which support the use of PTZ cameras may require configuration such as installation of additional drivers typically through accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address before PTZ cameras can be used Progertet v Enable PTZ on a video encoder To enable the use of PTZ cameras on a video encoder do the following on the PTZ tab 1 Inthe list of devices connected to the video encoder select the Enable PTZ box for the camera s on which you want to use PTZ nable PTZ Deyi Camera 3 2 Inthe PTZ Device ID column verify the ID of the PTZ camera s in question 3 Inthe COM Port column select which of the video encoder s COM serial communications ports should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on each required PTZ camera COM Poit COM 1 v CES www milestonesys com 172 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 4 In the PTZ Protocol column select which positioning scheme to use for each required PTZ camera PTZ Protocol Absolute v Absolute Relative I o Absolute When operators use Pan Tilt Zoom controls for the camera the camera is adjusted relative to a fixed position often referred to as the camera s home position o Relative
449. pane is updated Tip You do not have to connect to a site to detach it Just point your mouse to the relevant site and right click select Detach Site from Hierarchy Detach home site from parent hierarchy Location Home site which has a parent Prerequisites Your home site must be the child of another site i e have a parent To detach home site from a parent hierarchy 1 In the Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the home site and click Detach Site from Hierarchy 2 Click Yes 3 The Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated your home site becomes the new top site and the normal site icon Ur changes to a top site U gt icon 4 Click OK Due to synchronization issues changes might take a little time to be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 305 www milestonesys com 316 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Refresh site hierarchy Automatic synchronizations happen regularly through all steps of your parent child setup But if you want a current overview of things and do not want to wait for the next automatic synchronization you can refresh When refreshing the home site will display a current overview of the state of things from the home site s point of view Note that only changes sa
450. pecify the IP address of each required device Both options offer the possibility of automatically detecting the correct hardware drivers Verify that each recording server s storage areas will meet your needs see About storage and archiving on page 88 What is a storage area A storage area is a directory in which the databases containing recordings from the cameras connected to the recording server are stored each individual camera database by default has a maximum size of 5 GB A default storage area is automatically created for each recording server when the recording server is installed on the system Connected cameras databases are stored in the recording server s default storage area unless you specifically define that another storage area should be used for storing the databases of particular cameras If required a wizard lets you add further storage areas on the recording server computer itself or at another location for example on a network drive edit which storage area should be the default area and so on E Verify that each recording server s archiving settings will meet your needs see About storage and archiving on page 88 What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your reco
451. pecify the port number to be used when communicating with the management server Default is port 9993 although you can change this if required 5 Click OK 6 To start the Recording Server service again right click the notification area s Recording Server icon and select Start Recording Server service Tip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray It is located at the far right of the recording server computer s Windows taskbar Servers and clients require time synchronization Part of the security surrounding the use of clients with your system is based on so called time based tokens Why servers require time synchronization When a client logs in to the surveillance system the client receives a token from the management server The token contains important security related time information www milestonesys com 111 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The management server also sends a similar token to the required recording server s This is partly due to the fact that recording servers may be located all around the world Each recording server uses the token to validate the client s token against the local time in the recording server s own time zone The validity of a token expires after a while Therefore it is important that time on your management server and all of your organization s recording servers is synchronized minute and second wise hours
452. perties pane see Panes overview on page 57 on the Info tab see Info tab monitor properties on page 180 and Presets tab see Presets tab monitor properties on page 181 change the properties as required Info tab monitor properties Herda nicest a 5i a x etw Supper itin hes Fiere Behr Ermpip pariet Biren riiin Ermpip periti Bove Fietiner x N The name of the monitor The name is displayed in the XProtect ame l Smart Client ee A description of the monitor The description is only used as internal PAT ATI information in the Management Client Size The physical size of the monitor stated in inches Aspect ratio The height width relationship of the monitor Defines how the monitor s view items behave when they have no defined content in a preset Select whether the monitor should Empty preset item preserve previous view item contents when changing to a preset with empty view items or whether the view items should be cleared of content www milestonesys com 180 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Defines how elements are inserted in the monitor s view layout when viewed in the XProtect Smart Client When selecting Independent only the affected view item changes the rest of the view items remain where they were prior to the element insertion When selecting Linked the view items are pushed from left to right if for instance an element is inserted in position 5 t
453. pgrading workgroup installations refer to Alternative upgrade for workgroup on page 49 Install your system Single Server option In an upgrade scenario see Upgrade from previous version on page 48 you might not want to remove the management server database as it contains your system configuration 1 2 3 If you are installing a version downloaded from the Internet run the MilestoneAdvancedXProtectVMSSystemInstaller exe file from the location where you saved it Alternatively insert the software DVD If the dialog does not open automatically run the MilestoneAdvancedXProtectVMSSystemInstaller exe file from the DVD The installation files unpack Depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear Accept these and the unpacking continues When done the Milestone Advanced XProtect VMS dialog appears In the coming steps do the following Select the Language to use during the installation this is not the language your system will use once installed this is selected later Click Continue b In Type the location of the license file enter your license file from your XProtect provider Alternatively use the browse function to locate it The system verifies your license file before you can continue Click Continue c Read the Milestone End user License Agreement Select the accept the terms in the license agreement check box Optionally select the Sign me up for the Customer Experie
454. phones speakers inputs and outputs You can always get more licenses see Get additional licenses on page 73 as your surveillance system grows License information To get an overview of licenses in your system go to the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Basics and select License Information This brings up the License Information page displaying e your XProtect product type e your software license code e the number of available device channels typically cameras but it could also be dedicated input output boxes and cameras e if you run Milestone Interconnect see About Milestone Interconnect on page 85 the total number of available Milestone Interconnect device channels and Milestone Interconnect cameras e how many licenses you have used both the number of activated licenses and the number of temporary not activated licenses e whether you need to get additional licenses in order to have enough licenses for all of your cameras the number of additional license you need is found by adding your missing licenses with your expired licenses e any other installed products used with the system and if applicable their Software License Code Licensed Product Software License Code C50 0000 711B License Information Total Activated Temporary Expired Missing Licenses Licenses Licenses Licenses Licenses Device Channel 512 0 0 0 0 Camera 512 0 0 0 0 Miles
455. ple HecordingServer setup x64 exe ss registration The file is now added to the Download Manager but not installed on the current machine Tip To get an overview of installer commands in the Command Promt type space help and the following window appears Command tne option reference Installer 2 0 This setup package accepts following command line switches arguments filename language lang partner id id idm 1d id quiet help msilog logpaths filepath acceptstatistics s 0 1 generateargsfile path showconsole license bcensefile licensetypes type 5_regestration Sets the argurnent file in quiet mode Sets the language for the installer and product e g en US Sets the partner ID Used mostly for the Download Manager Sets the ID for the Intemet Download Manager Installs the software in quiet mode Shows this message Enables extended msi logging Sets the path to the log file Enables the Customer Expenence Improvement Program Generates a file with the default arguments in the folder Enables console output in quiet mode Sets the path to the license fie Sets the hcense type Registers this installer on the download page When you have installed new components they are by default selected in the Download Manager and are immediately available to users via the web page You can always show or hide features on the
456. poses and workflow control in the XProtect Smart Client Initial Alarm Category Lets you select an alarm category for the alarm This could be for example False alarm or Needs investigation Event triggered by alarm Lets you define an event to be triggered by the alarm in the XProtect Smart Client if needed Auto close alarm Lets you select if the alarm should automatically be closed upon a particular event This is possible for alarms triggered by some but not all events Tip If you want to disable the new alarm from the beginning clear the Enable check box in the upper right corner before saving In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Click an existing alarm to edit it Add an alarm 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Alarms right click Alarm Definitions Select Add New A window appears Fill in these properties O O Enable Lets you enable the Alarms feature Name Lets you type a name for the alarm The alarm s name will appear whenever the alarm is listed Tip Alarm names do not have to be unique but using unique and descriptive alarm names are advantageous in many situations Description Lets you type a description text optional Triggering event Lets you select the event messages to be used when the alarm is triggered It is divided into two drop downs The first drop down lets you select the t
457. profile 239 Create an archive within an existing storage area 101 104 Create many simple or a few complex rules 229 Create typical rules online 156 199 228 233 Customize the Management Client s layout 54 57 63 64 Customize transitions 130 D Database corruption 345 Day length time profile properties 240 Daylight saving time 360 Deactivate and activate a rule 234 Default goto preset when PTZ is done rule 220 Default record on bookmark rule 220 223 Default record on motion rule 220 Default record on request rule 221 Default rules 219 230 Default start audio feed rule 221 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Default start feed rule 221 Define in and output related rules 147 153 156 Define local IP address ranges 303 Define public address and port 110 Define roles with access to XProtect Enterprise servers 290 292 Define rules sending video to Matrix recipients 189 190 Delete a role 260 Delete an archive from within an existing storage 103 Delete an entire storage area 103 Detach a site from hierarchy 318 Device drivers 43 332 Device pack installer must be downloaded 41 43 Device rights 264 282 298 Devices 114 Devices which require a license 72 Disable enable hardware device 84 Download Manager 14 Download Manager and virus scanning 43 Download Manager download web page 14 15
458. puts e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices select Outputs expand the required device group and select the required output If www milestonesys com 150 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 no device groups are available you must first group your output Refer to About Device Groups on page 139 for information about creating groups as well as adding output to your groups e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers then in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server and select the required output Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via Common Gateway Interface CGI script commands Also check the system release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the devices and firmware used Enable output When outputs are detected with the Add Hardware on page 78 process they are by default disabled You can activate outputs when needed If a device has several outputs you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers
459. py of it and quickly create the second rule based on the copy Both rules are covered in this example Prerequisites This rule is based on a PTZ camera being able to patrol according to two different patrolling profiles and a time profile being used to determine which patrolling profile should be used Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e You have specified a time profile covering at least one of the time periods you want to differentiate between You could specify time profiles covering both time periods but it will not be necessary since rules can be set up to apply within as well as outside a time profile How to specify a time profile To specify a time profile expand Rules and Events in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select Time Profiles The Time Profiles list will appear In the Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add Time Profile For detailed information about specifying time profiles refer to Manage time profiles on page 235 e he camera in question is a PTZ camera e Preset positions and at least two patrolling profiles are defined for the camera How to define preset positions and patrolling profiles When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it moves between a number of preset positions Thus before you able to define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera the preset positions required for the p
460. r entire city areas Each site in a federated hierarchy is installed and configured as a normal stand alone system with standard system components settings rules schedules administrators users and user rights Once each site has been installed these can be connected by requesting an MFA link from one site the parent to another the child When the link is established the two sites automatically create an MFA hierarchy to which more sites can be added to grow the federated hierarchy al e zu 1 a fec Click this thumbnail to view an example illustration of Milestone Federated Architecture ut oe Tu In this example the MFA hierarchy consists of six sites As illustrated each site can be both a parent and a child at the same time thus making it possible to create a hierarchy with as many levels as needed It is also evident that a site can link to several child sites on the same level in a hierarchy Once an MFA hierarchy is created it allows users and administrators logged in to a site to access that site and any child or sub child sites it may have Access to child and sub child sites in the hierarchy is not gained automatically but dependent on appropriate user and administrator rights It is only relevant to speak of a parent child setup for management servers not for recording servers see Management server on page 13 However due to their relations to management servers recording servers will automatically become part o
461. ra device Assign a default preset position If required you are able to assign one of a PTZ camera s preset positions at the camera s default preset position Having a default preset position can be useful because it allows you to define rules see Manage rules on page 226 specifying that the PTZ camera should go to the default preset position under particular circumstances for example after the PTZ camera has been operated manually To assign a preset position as the default select the required preset in your list of defined preset positions then select the default preset box below the list Only one preset position can be the default preset position Edit a preset position To edit an existing preset position defined in the system presets imported from a device should be edited on the device itself do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera www milestonesys com 133 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 Click Edit This opens the Edit Preset window Te Peesel Dons White Fane Example only features are camera dependent 3 The Edit Preset window displays a preview image from the preset position in question use the navigation buttons and or sliders to change the preset position as required 4 Change the name number and description of the preset position as required Ti
462. ras However if you plan to perform frequent regular backups of your database Milestone recommends using an existing SQL server on the network you must have administrator rights on the SQL server For large installations 300 cameras or more Milestone recommends using a full scale existing SQL server on a dedicated machine on the network IMPORTANT Milestone recommends that you install the database on a dedicated hard disk drive that is not used for anything else but the database Installing the database on its own drive prevents low disk performance IMPORTANT If relevant during the database preparation process you are asked whether you want to create a new database use an existing database or overwrite an existing database For a new installation you would typically select the default option Create new database However if you are installing the database as part of upgrading to a newer version of the system and you want to use your existing database make sure you select Use existing database Select service account In the installer dialogs see Install your system Custom option on page 32 you are asked to select a service account under which the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 runs e With a predefined network service account This predefined user account the service always runs when the server computer are running no matter which account is used The
463. rator s Manual VMS 2013 your system setup Otherwise the recording server might not be able to rename or move relevant media files Unfortunately this might bring the recording server to a halt If this situation has already occurred stop the Recording Server service close the program accessing the media file s or folder s in question and simply restart the Recording Server service EN a Lo 10 33 AM EN a Er 10 33 AM a a eS nns Access the server service on page 348 Start the server service on page 348 Stop the server service on page 348 Change recording server settings on page 349 View status messages on page 349 View version information on page 349 Work with recording server settings in details see Recording server settings on page 350 Head server service state icons see Read server service icons management recording and failover on page 350 Access the server service 1 Right click the notification area s server service icon 2 From the menu that appears depending on server type select the needed icon If using multiple instances see Multiple recording server instances on page 48 of the Recording Server service a sub menu lets you select whether you want to start a particular instance or all instances Start the server service 1 Access the server service on page 348 2 Select either Start Management Server service or Start Recording Server service Stop the server serv
464. rchiving s sssssnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnnm 88 About recording SETVE S uuega aaa EE aaa 94 Servers and clients require time SyYNCHroniZatiOn eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeees 111 www milestonesys com Contents Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 DEVICES e 113 ADOULOCVICO S PR PED IEEE 113 GEENT cH 174 ADOUCIR mee X 174 About XProtect Smart Wall sssr E 175 PDOUT VIEW Nel nnna aami airaa 183 Abo t Smart GHENT profiles issaraen aaa aaa a 184 About Matrix recipients aannsnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 187 RULES AND EVENTS cpr 189 About rules and events ssssnnsnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn ies Leu nnmnnn 189 Create typical rules Online ssisciecccencteeesxdascecnccctuncavsacicatcccienssdewenasveaiieruvseriustsseivendddaussaans 198 big 218 Cvens OVEIVICW RP TED T UE 221 Manage TUN leet X o 226 Manage time Droes sia A Uwe Eu NM Een ies Hes UIS Uu MEE EM NUEIE 235 Manage day length time profiles eeec eeeeee eee Leeeee eere eene enne nnn 238 Manage notification profiles iaccccoss cus eesa dcos us eau
465. rdings on backup media of your choice Archiving is configured on a per recording server basis Once you have configured the archiving settings for a recording server where to store archives how often to transfer recordings to the archives and so on you can enable archiving for individual cameras When archiving is enabled for a camera the contents of the camera s database will automatically be moved to an archive at regular intervals Configure any required failover recording servers see About failover recording servers C regular and hot standby on page 331 A failover recording server is a spare recording server which can take over if a standard recording server becomes unavailable Configure each recording server s individual cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 www milestonesys com 59 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 t Tip You are able to group cameras and configure common properties for all cameras within a group in one go Tip Motion detection a vital setting on most IP surveillance systems is enabled by default However you may want to fine tune motion detection settings or disable motion detection for particular cameras Enable and configure microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 if any Enable and configure speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 if any Enable and configure input see Manage input on page 145 if any
466. re device Right click the camera input or output you wish to enable 2 From the menu that appears select Enabled acording Server d Recording Servers H DKLT MKM 01 milestone dk Abengdon Road Entrance Cam 10 10 50 18 do Input Rename Device 9 Outpi r Allerton v P Cem M Refresh F5 do Input C Output 3 Add the corresponding events to the camera input or output www milestonesys com 84 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 About Milestone Interconnect Available functionality depends on your product version Milestone Interconnect allows you to integrate a number of smaller physically fragmented and remote XProtect installations with an XProtect Corporate central site These smaller sites called remote sites may even be installed on mobile units for example boats busses or trains and may not even be permanently connected to a network Overview of Milestone Interconnect 1 Milestone Interconnect central XProtect Corporate site 2 Milestone Interconnect drivers handles the connection between the central sites recording servers and the remote site must be selected in the list of drivers when adding remote systems via the Add Hardware wizard 3 Milestone Interconnect connection 4 Milestone Interconnect remote site the complete remote site with system installation users cameras and so on 5 Milestone Interconnect remote system the actual te
467. re devices are not using the factory default user name and password You can add as many user names and passwords as required by clicking Add Remember to select the Include check box for each required device You must add and include at least one user name and password in order for the wizard to continue When ready click Next www milestonesys com 79 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Select which drivers to use when you scan By default the system uses all known drivers If your organization only uses certain hardware devices and or models you can achieve faster scanning by selecting only the drivers required for those hardware devices Click Next 4 Specify the IP address network ranges you want to scan for hardware o Start address First IP address in required range o End address Last IP address in required range The start and end IP address may be identical allowing you to only scan for a single hardware device if needed o Port Port number s on which to scan Default is port 80 If your hardware devices are located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall you may need to specify a different port number When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the port and IP addresses used by the hardware devices You can add as many network ranges as needed by clicking Add to add another row You can add any network address between 0 0 0 1 and 255
468. remotely connected operating point your organization may prefer MJPEG at a lower frame rate and quality in order to preserve network bandwidth Even when cameras support multi streaming individual multi streaming capabilities may vary considerably between different cameras Refer to camera s documentation for exact information To see if a camera offers different types of streams refer to the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 160 The number of available streams in a Milestone Interconnect setup depends on the capabilities of the interconnected system If you select a device group with 400 or more cameras the Streams tab will not be available for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Add a stream 1 Onthe Streams tab click Add This will add a second stream to the list you cannot have more than two streams Optional In the Name column edit the name of the stream In the Live Mode column select when live streaming is needed In the Default column select which stream is the default one GL Ss e Jg In the Record column select the check box if you want to use the stream for recorded video or leave it cleared if you only want to use it for live video 6 In the Edge Recording column it is indicated whether the selected stream supports edge recording see Record tab overview on page 164 or not 7 Click Save Manage microphones On many devices yo
469. reset positions For the rights to work the role must also be granted the right to view the XProtect Smart Client s Live tab This right is granted as part of the application rights Furthermore the PTZ camera s must be visible in XProtect Smart Client something you determine as part of the device rights Speech rights Available functionality depends on your product version Relevant only if loudspeakers are available on your system The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Smart Client or other relevant clients The following rights are available www milestonesys com 266 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e Speak live Determines whether users with the selected role will be able talk through the selected speaker s e Speak priority When several XProtect Smart Client users want to talk through the same speaker at the same time conflicts may occur This setting lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected speaker s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from Very low to Very high Example You specify that the role Security Manager should have very high priority when talking through a speaker whereas the role Security Assistant should have lo
470. ress of the required interface Specify datagram options In this section you specify settings for data packets datagrams transmitted through multicasting www milestonesys com 107 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Maximum Transmission Unit the largest allowed physical data packet size measured in bytes Messages larger than the MTU specified MTU will be split into smaller packets before being sent Default value is 1500 which is also the default on most Windows computers and Ethernet networks Time To Live the largest allowed number of hops a data packet should be able to travel before it is discarded or returned A hop is a point between two network devices typically a router Default value is 128 TTL Enable multicasting for individual cameras Even when you have specified multicasting settings for the selected recording server multicasting will not work until you enable it for required cameras Select the required recording server in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required camera in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select Live multicast on the Client tab see Client tab camera properties on page 116 in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Repeat for all required cameras under the recording server in question Specify IP address range To specify the range from w
471. rnal investigators etc to browse and play back the exported recordings without having to install any software on their computers Finally your system handles an unlimited number of cameras servers and users across multiple sites if required Your system can handle IPv4 as well as IPv6 see IPv6 vs IPv4 on page 360 A typical system setup www milestonesys com 12 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 About updates Milestone regularly releases service updates for our products offering improved functionality and support for new devices If you are a system administrator Milestone recommends that you check the www milestonesys com for updates at regular intervals in order to make sure you are using the most recent version of your System Management server The management server stores the surveillance system s configuration in a relational database either on the management server computer itself or on a separate SQL Server on the network It also handles user authentication user rights and more To improve system performance you can run several management servers as a Milestone Federated Architecture see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 The management server runs as a service and is typically installed on a dedicated server When you install the management server you also get the following integrated components if you select a single server mana
472. rom the list and click Edit in the Add Remove XProtect Enterprise Servers dialog 2 Edit the relevant settings and click OK Registered services Manage registered services Occasionally you have servers and or services which should be able to communicate with the system even though they are not directly part of the system Some services but not all can register themselves automatically in the system Services that can automatically be registered are e Event Server service see Management server on page 13 e Log Server service see Management server on page 13 e Service Channel service see About the service channel on page 347 Automatically registered services are displayed in the list of registered services You can manually specify servers services as registered services in the Management Client Access registered services configuration 1 In the Management Client s menu bar select Tools gt Registered Services www milestonesys com 291 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 The Add Remove Registered Services window opens From this window you can manage registered services Add Heres egchend Sanice Servsce lost Tus hayan i Dingin Log D Log Serem p THE Se m Tes Tae pg gener Hor handing Repos Seni Paget Cases hie ODE SUO EXPL Tes Te serene Toc hane XP Sees Charl terpecr haere a DS ee Yi Sli regio aber of n ree Add and edit registered services S
473. rom the tray icon Change Software License Code on page 74 Restore system configuration from manual back up on page 325 Select shared backup folder on page 324 Update SQL server address on page 345 www milestonesys com 355 Tray icon Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 SNMP About SNMP support Available functionality depends on your product version Your system supports Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a standard protocol for monitoring and controlling network devices for managing their configuration or collecting statistics etc The system will act as an SNMP agent which can generate an SNMP trap as a result of a triggered rule A third party SNMP management console can then receive information about the rule triggering event and operators of the SNMP management console can configure their system for further action as required The implementation uses Microsoft Windows SNMP Service for triggering SNMP traps The SNMP Service must therefore be installed on recording servers This will when the SNMP Service has been configured through its own user interface enable recording servers to send mib Management Information Base files to the SNMP management console Install SNMP service 1 Onthe required recording servers open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe left side of the Add or Remove Programs dialog
474. rt to which the input is attached For hardware with for example four input ports the numbers will typically range from 0 to 3 Unit number Fill in Settings tab properties The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the devices in question and may vary depending on the input selected Verify or edit key input settings for a selected input or for all inputs within a selected device group If the selected device group contains 400 or more inputs the Settings tab will be unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Content may vary but you typically see the following property Define whether the input signal should be considered rising on Circuit closed or Circuit open The value of this setting is used on the input s Events tab where you define properties for input events Input Rising event Input Falling event and Input Changed event See also the description of the properties of the Events tab see Fill in properties on the Events tab on page 148 The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You can change the values of these settings if needed Input rises on Fill in properties on the Events tab Lets you define events based on changes of the input s state from circuit opened to circuit closed or the reverse order T
475. ry to browse for the user the user s roles will be displayed automatically Work with users groups and roles To assign or remove Windows users or groups or basic users see About basic users on page 269 to from a role do the following www milestonesys com 260 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security and select Roles Then select the required role in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 te 719 3 Name FA Administrators T Building A Secunty Staff Mu OA AITNE SRM 9 Building B Securty Staff 2 n the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the Users amp Groups tab at the bottom 3 Click Add select between Windows user or Basic user Assign Windows users and groups to role 1 Select Windows user This opens the Select Users Computers and Groups dialog Select Users Comauters ort Greops Selectthes object type Users Groups or Budtin security priecipals Oreect Types From thes locaton Locatons Enter the otyect names to select examples Check Names Advanced ox Canal 2 Verify that the required object type is specified If for example you need to add a computer click Object Types and mark Computer Also verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If not click Locatio
476. s Port 7563 Used by recording servers and XProtect Smart Client The main entry to the recording server where the ImageServer interface is implemented Also used for handling PTZ camera control commands and for retrieving image stream from clients etc Port 7609 Used by the report server to communicate with the Data Collector Server service and must always be keep open on the machine running the Data Collector Port 8080 Used for communication between internal processes on the management server only Port 8844 Used for User Datagram Protocol UDP communication between failover recording servers Port 9000 Used by management servers for communication between the system and XProtect Transact Port 9993 Used for communication between recording servers and management servers Port 11000 Used by failover recording servers for polling i e regularly checking the state of recording servers Port 12345 Used by management servers and XProtect Smart Client for communicating between the system and Matrix recipients www milestonesys com 365 Appendix Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Port 22331 Used for communication between event server and XProtect Smart Client and event Server and Management Client Port 65101 Used between processes on the same machine only i e Inter Process Communication IPC on a single machine only www milestonesys com 366 Appendix Milestone XProtect Advanced
477. s and so on Generic events are by default enabled Clear the check box to Enabled disable the event Expression that the system should look out for when analyzing data packages The following operators may be used o y Used to ensure that related terms are processed together as a logical unit They can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example The search criteria User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday first processes the two terms inside the parenthesis then combines the result with the last part of the string So the system first looks for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then takes the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday o AND With an AND operator you specify that the terms Expression on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example The search criteria User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday returns a result only if the terms User001 Door053 and Sunday are all included in your expression It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present The more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you retrieve o OR With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example The search criteria User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday returns any results containing either User001 Door053 or Sunday The more terms you combine with OR the more results you retrieve www mile
478. s Refer to About Device Groups on page 139 for information about creating groups as well as adding microphones to your groups e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers then in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server expand the required device and select the required microphone Check the product release notes to verify that microphones are supported for the devices and firmware used Enable microphones When microphones are detected with the wizard Add Hardware on page 78 they are by default disabled You can enable microphones when needed If a device has several microphones you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the microphone is placed 3 Right click the required microphone and select Enabled On some devices a microphone can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a microphone does not work after enabling it in the Management Client you should verify whether the problem may be due to the microphone being disabled on the device itself Configure individual microphones You configure individual microphones by
479. s and select Add View Group This opens the Add View Group dialog 2 Type the name of the new view group then click OK 3 Optionally in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the added view group then in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 add a description of the view group No roles will have the right to use the newly added view group until you have specified such rights refer to View group rights on page 268 for more information Also even when you have specified which roles should be able to use the newly added view group already connected client users with the relevant roles must log out and log in again before they will be able to see the view group About Smart Client profiles Available functionality depends on your product version With Smart Client profiles system administrators can control exactly how the XProtect Smart Client should look and behave and exactly what features panes XProtect Smart Client users are able to work with and which not Controllable user right settings are for example panes and options minimize maximize options inactivity time control remember password or not view shown after log in layout of print reports export path and much much more To manage Smart Client profiles in the system expand Client in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select Smart Client Profiles You can al
480. s on page 293 dialog When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify bookmark details and select device No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Sends a notification using a particular notification profile When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select a notification profile and which devices to include pre alarm images from Only one notification profile can be selected it is not possible to select several notification profiles Tip Even though you are only able to select a single notification profile bear in mind that a single notification profile may contain several recipients You can also create more rules to the same event and send different notifications to each of the notification profiles Tip By right clicking a rule in the Rules list you are able to copy and re use the content of rules This way you can avoid having to create near identical rules from scratch This type of action requires that at least one notification profile see Manage notification profiles on page 239 has been set up Pre alarm images are only included if the Include images option has been enabled for the notification profile in question No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop ac
481. s on page 297 Errors corresponding to step 3 The local host name must be added as allowed address for the Analytics Event service Solution Explanation Add your machine to the list of allowed IP addresses hosinames Error resolving the local host name Solution Explanation The IP address hostname of the machine cannot be found or is invalid Error corresponding to step 4 Analytics event is not used in any alarm definition Solution Explanation Use the analytics event in an alarm definition Errors corresponding to step 5 Event server not found Solution Explanation Unable to find event server on the list of registered services Error connecting to event server Solution Explanation Unable to connect to event server on the stated port most likely due to network problems event server being stopped or similar Error sending analytics event Solution Explanation Connection to event server established but event cannot be sent most likely due to network problems for example time out Error receiving response from event server Solution Explanation Event sent to event server but no reply received most likely due to network problems or port being busy see the event server log typically located at ProgramData lt Company Short XProtect Event Server logs can be opened in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool Analytics event unknown by event server Solution Explanation event server does not know the event most likel
482. s Manual VMS 2013 gt In this example patrolling should be paused on our PTZ camera In the Select Group Members window we therefore drag PTZ Camera to the Selected list and click OK device Clicking the device link lets you select to move another device than the device s on which patrolling was paused You are also able to select to move the device on which patrolling was paused gt In this example we select to move the same PTZ camera on which patrolling was paused and click OK Select Device ifs 7b Cameras 173 Lab Cameras 13 Parking lot E 173 Red Sector Cameras gt Retail Area PTZ Cameras p PT2I OK Cancel preset Clicking the preset link lets you select which preset position the PTZ camera should move to You will be able to select from a list of preset positions defined for the PTZ camera you selected before nd In this example we select a preset position called Back Door and click OK e Select a Preset n x TO Al Lametas S PTZ Camera Back Doo 2 Canned Fais Section ete Dary Products Section 2 Fresh Produce Sector 2n Frozen Food Sechon Household Goods Section eie Poultiy Section Solt Drinks Section mm immediately The wizard automatically suggests that the camera moves to the preset position immediately after it has paused patrolling Clicking the immediately link lets you specify a delay if required priority Click
483. s Manual VMS 2013 Manage basic users Once you have created a basic user you must add it to a role and add this role to a group if you want to use it actively in your system Refer to About roles on page 255 for details Add basic user 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the Security node right click Basic Users and select Create Basic Users This opens the New Basic Authentication User dialog Fill in the needed properties see Basic user properties on page 270 In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Basic user properties User name Name of basic user Description Description of basic user optional Password Enter user name Repeat password Re enter user name System dashboard About system dashboard In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 you are able to work with the following under System Dashboard System Monitor see About system monitor on page 270 Here you can view and print detailed system reports on servers devices and cameras Current Task see About current task on page 272 Here you can get an overview of tasks under a selected recording server Configuration Report see About configuration report on page 272 From here you can decide what to include in your system configuration reports and print them About system monitor From the Site N
484. s Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit Microsoft NET 4 0 and Internet Information Services IIS 5 1 or newer Software Computer running service channel CPU Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Dual Core recommended RAM Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Adapter eee GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 10 GB free depends on number of servers cameras Hard Disk Space rules and logging settings www milestonesys com 20 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Operating System gt Software gt gt Administrator s Manual Microsofte Windows 8 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Microsofte Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework and Internet Informati
485. s and system information e Handling of plug ins allowing customized integration of other systems for example external access control or VCA based systems What is a VCA based system VCA based systems provide third party video content analysis Spanning from face recognition over advanced motion detection to complex behavioral analysis where various types of abnormal behavior both of humans and vehicles can be detected VCA systems and their output can seamlessly be integrated with and hook into your system and be used for for example triggering alarms Within the system the events resulting from VCA systems are called analytics events In general alarms are controlled by the visibility of the object causing the alarm This means that four possible aspects can play a role with regards to alarms and who can control manage them and to what degree e Source device visibility If the device causing the alarm is not set to be visible to the user s role the user will not be able to see the alarm in the alarm list in the XProtect Smart Client Refer to Device rights on page 263 e Right to trigger user defined events might be an issue This right determines if the user s role can trigger selected user defined events in the XProtect Smart Client Refer to External event rights on page 267 e External plug ins If any external plug ins are set up in you system these might control users rights to handle alarms e General role right
486. s com for help 4 Remember to save any changes made during the test In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save When done check the presence of your test event in the XProtect Smart Client s Alarm list Sort by type Test Alarm See XProtect Smart Client documentation for more details Edit analytics events settings In the Management Client toolbar go to Tools gt Options on page 293 gt Analytics Events Settings on page 297 to edit relevant settings Manage generic events IMPORTANT This feature will not work if you do not have the XProtect event server installed Generic events allow you to trigger actions in the XProtect event server by sending simple strings via the IP network to your system Any hard or software which can send strings via TCP or UDP can be used to trigger generic events Your system is able to analyze received TCP or UDP data packages and automatically trigger generic events when specific criteria are met This way you may integrate your system with external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc The aim is to allow as many external sources as possible to interact with the system With the concept of data sources you avoid having to adapt third party tools to meet the standards of your system Data sources lets you to communication with a particular piece of hard or software on a specific IP port and to fine tune how bytes arriving on that port ar
487. s determine whether the user is allowed to only view or also to manage alarms What a user of Alarms can do with alarms depends like much else on the user s role and on settings configured for that particular role Refer to Alarms rights on page 269 www milestonesys com 280 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Illustration How does the alarms feature work An Legenda 1 Qiiryal anca eyctam l oUlVelllance s y stem ty Mananamant lant 2 Management Client 3 XProtect Smart Client Alarm configuration ilarm Nata fle 9 Alarm data flow FAQs XProtect Central and Alarms Same Thing Set up alarms using Enterprise slaves The next item section is only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate User name and password If your surveillance setup includes one or more XProtect Enterprise slaves and you wish to include one or more of these in your alarms setup it is important that the login name and password specified when adding the slave is the same as used in the XProtect Central add on in the XProtect Enterprise server Otherwise the event server is unable to login to the XProtect Central add on in XProtect Enterprise and collect status information Port number Furthermore if at some point you have changed port number settings in the XProtect Central add on in the XProtect Enterprise server you must update port number information in the XML file containin
488. s is limited to two within a six hour period If exceeded Management Server services are not automatically started by the clustering service The number of allowed failovers can be changed to better fit your needs Refer to Microsoft s homepage for details on how to do this Is clustering the same as Milestone Federated Architecture No clustering is not the same as federated architecture Clustering is a method to obtain failover support for a management server on a site With clustering it is only possible to have one active management server per surveillance setup but other management servers may be set up to take over in case of failure On the other hand federated architecture is a method to combine multiple independent sites into one large setup offering flexibility and unlimited possibilities Prerequisites for clustering e Two or more servers installed in a cluster Regarding clusters in Microsoft Windows 2003 refer to Deploying Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 in a cluster Regarding clusters in Microsoft Windows 20088 refer to Failover clusters e Either an external SQL database installed outside the server cluster or an internal SQL clustered service within the server cluster creating an internal SQL service will require the use of SQL Server Standard or a greater version which is capable of working as a clustered SQL Server e A Microsoft Windows Server 2003 2008 Enterprise or Data Center edition Install in a
489. s remote users with a feature rich access to the surveillance system and enables them to view live and recorded video and to access other features from the system The XProtect Smart Client supports IPv6 see IPv6 vs IPv4 on page 360 You must install XProtect Smart Client locally on the remote user s computer This can be done in three different ways from a server from a DVD or through a silent install You can also remove XProtect Smart Client at a later time Find more information about XProtect Smart Client in its own built in help system which is available after installation or see the XProtect Smart Client User s Manual available on the software DVD as well as from http www milestonesys com downloads www milestonesys com 25 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Install the XProtect Smart Client from server or DVD 1 Verify that your computer meets the XProtect Smart Client s minimum system requirements on page 15 Downloading and installing from surveillance system server typical method a Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to surveillance system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator The address is typically nttp management server address port installation where management server address is the IP address or host name of the management server and port is the port number which IIS has been s
490. s the default location in which recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual camera databases If required you can later change the path and or add paths to more storage area locations Select SQL type In the installer dialogs see Install your system Custom option on page 32 you must decide what to do regarding SQL database see Install your system Distributed option on page 32 The options are Install SQL Server 2008 Express on this computer Use the installed Microsoft SQL Server Express database on this computer or Use an existing SQL Server on the network As indicated www milestonesys com 34 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 the wording used for selecting SQL server type varies depending on whether you already have installed an SQL database on the current machine o First option when you have no SQL database installed Install SQL Server 2008 Express on this computer First option when you have an SQL database installed Use the installed Microsoft SQL Server Express database on this computer o Second option Use an existing SQL Server on the network is the second option However it can be difficult to determine which SQL server type is right for your organization The Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition is a lightweight version of a full SQL server It is easy to install and prepare for use and often suffices for systems with less than 300 came
491. se a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type n4 In this example we want to base the rule on an event Therefore we select Perform an action on lt event gt Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half or the wizard window Next Edit the rule description click an underlined tem Pertorm an action on event from devices recorde Server Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content Event link Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they are related to plug ins dependent on hardware configuration built into the system itself etc In this example we want the event to be activated input Input comes from and is configured on separate hardware rather than on the system itself so we go to the Custom Events group select the event Input Activated and click OK Devices recording server management server link When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link opens the Select Devices and Groups window which lets you specify the devices on which the event should occur in
492. se of your system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with the XProtect Smart Client regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not Knowing the sub directory structure is primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings see Archive structure on page 92 Use the Smart Client Player to view archived video You can use the Smart Client Player functionality of your XProtect Smart Client to view archived video See your XProtect Smart Client documentation for details Archive structure When recordings are archived they are stored in a certain sub directory structure within the archive During all regular use of your system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with the XProtect Smart Client regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not Knowing the sub directory structure is primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings In each of the recording server s archive directories separate sub directories are automatically created These sub directories are named after the name of the device and the name of the archive database oince you are able to store recordings from different cameras in the same archive and since archiving for each camera is likely to be performed at regular intervals further sub directories are also aut
493. second The number of seconds you specify in the Pre buffer check box must be sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements Example If like in this rule example you plan to be able to save video from five seconds prior to detected motion the prebuffer size must be at least five seconds Use prebuffer in rules The use of prebuffering enables you to create rules see Manage rules on page 226 specifying that recording should begin prior to the event or time triggering the rule Example Your ability to use this example rule specifying that recording should start ona camera 5 seconds before motion is detected on the camera depends on prebuffering being enabled for the camera in question Perform an action on Motion Started from Red Se ntrance C start recording seconds before on the device on which event occurred Storage area In the Storage area you can monitor and edit database settings for the selected item TOR gt tonus jetabese Pat nt Dent stetg e we Actes bece Tin At the top of the Storage area the selected database for the item in question and its status is stated In this example the selected database is Local Default and its status is Active Possible statuses for selected database Active Database is active and running Archives also located in old Database is active and running and has archives located in other storage storage areas as well Data for some o
494. select the individual devices in the device group to verify exactly which devices the right in question applies for PTZ rights Available functionality depends on your product version Relevant only if PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are available on your system the PTZ tab lets you specify which features users groups with the selected role should be able to use in the XProtect Smart Client The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Smart Client or other relevant clients Note that only PTZ cameras and device groups containing PTZ cameras are available for selection The following rights are available e Allow PTZ Control Determines if the selected role is able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s o False Users groups with the selected role will not be able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s o True Users groups with the selected role will be able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s www milestonesys com 265 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 e PTZ Priority Determines the priority of PTZ cameras When several users on a surveillance system wish to control the same PTZ camera at the same time conflicts may o
495. selected see Generic events Options settings on page 298 Generic event data source properties Data source New Name Enabled Reset Port www milestonesys com Selectable data sources You can choose between two default data sources and any number of data sources created by you What to select depends on what kind of third party program you work with and or what kind of hard or software you want to interface from Compatible Factory properties are enabled echoes all bytes TCP and UDP Ipv4 only port 1234 no separator local host only current code page encoding ANSI Compatible with XProtect Enterprise version 6 0 up to 8 x any version beginning with 8 but not with 2013 and future versions International Factory properties are enabled echoes statistics only TCP only lpv4 6 port 1235 lt CR gt lt LF gt as separator local host only UTF 8 encoding lt CR gt lt LF gt 13 10 Data source A Data source B and so on Click to create a new data source Name of the data source Data sources are by default enabled Clear the check box to disable the data source Click to reset all settings for the selected data source except the name entered in the Name field Indicates the port number used 253 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Protocol type selector IPv type selector Separator bytes Echo type selector Encoding type selector Show all All
496. selecting the required microphone in the list then specifying the microphone s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 Info see Info tab overview on page 156 The selected microphone s name etc www milestonesys com 137 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Settings see Settings tab overview on page 160 The selected microphone s general settings Record see Record tab The selected microphone s recording database and archiving overview on page 164 storage settings Events see Events tab overview on page 168 Evenis View current state of microphones When you have selected a microphone in the Management Client information about the current status of the selected microphone is presented in the Preview pane see Panes overview on page 57 When the microphone is not active it is shown as When the microphone is active it is shown as Read microphone list s status icons The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 113 microphones see Manage microphones on page 136 speakers see Manage speakers on page 143 input see Manage input on page 145 and output see Manage output on page 150 events in item lists Item enabled The device is enabled and we retrieve a y A dp e stream Can be started stopped automatically through a rule a
497. so learn about the relationship between Smart Client profiles roles and time profiles and how to use these together see Work with Smart Client profiles roles and time profiles on page 185 Add and configure a Smart Client profile You must complete the creation of a Smart Client profile before you can configure it In other words the configuration process is done after the creation of the profile 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Client right click Smart Client Profiles 2 Select Add Smart Client Profile This will open the Add Smart Client Profile dialog 3 In the Add Smart Client Profile dialog type a name and description of the new profile 4 Click OK www milestonesys com 184 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 5 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 click the profile you just created to configure it This is done by adjusting settings see Adjust settings on a Smart Client profile on page 186 on one more or all of the available tabs 6 Click OK Copy a Smart Client profile If you have a Smart Client profile with complicated settings and or rights and need a similar or almost similar profile it might be easier to copy an already existing profile and make minor adjustments to the copy than to creating a new profile from scratch 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane s
498. ss on the Network tab To access the Network tab select the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 then select the Network tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 This description is also valid for failover recording servers see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 Why use a public address When an access client such as an XProtect Smart Client connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers e When clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses see Manage local IP address ranges on page 301 and port numbers e When clients connect from the internet the surveillance system should reply with the recording server s public address i e the address of the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers To provide access to the surveillance system from outside a NAT Network Address Translation firewall the
499. ssary XProtect Enterprise settings must be made in XProtect Enterprise s Administrator application or other relevant XProtect Enterprise applications Refer to the XProtect Enterprise documentation for more information For client users it will be completely transparent whether feeds come from an XProtect Enterprise server or from a recording server in your system The users have access to cameras depending on their roles defined in the Management Client If a role has borrowed user rights from an added XProtect Enterprise server users with that role have access to data from the XProtect Enterprise server according to the borrowed user rights Refer to About roles on page 255 and Define access roles for XProtect Enterprise servers see Define roles with access to XProtect Enterprise servers on page 289 Prerequisites for access roles for XProtect Enterprise servers On the XProtect Enterprise server open the Image Server Administrator window to see if one of the XProtect Enterprise users has user rights that can be used in connection with a role in your system Write the XProtect Enterprise user s user name and password or Windows account down You will need this information when you use the Management Client to define roles with access to XProtect Enterprise servers Note that user names and passwords are case sensitive www milestonesys com 288 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 You ca
500. stems but they must all be run as federated sites see Milestone Federated Architecture Overview on page 302 for alarms to work When a particular event for example Motion Detected is registered on your surveillance system Alarms can be configured to cause this alarm to appear in the XProtect Smart Client You must define alarms before you can use them and they are defined based on events registered in your system servers and possibly on other XProtect systems Tip You can even use user defined events for triggering alarms and if required the same event can be used to trigger several different alarms 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Alarms right click Alarm Definitions Select Add New A window appears 2 Fill in these properties o Enable Lets you enable the Alarms feature o Name Lets you type a name for the alarm The alarm s name will appear whenever the alarm is listed Tip Alarm names do not have to be unique but using unique and descriptive alarm names are advantageous in many situations o Description Lets you type a description text optional www milestonesys com 282 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 o Triggering event Lets you select the event messages to be used when the alarm is triggered It is divided into two drop downs The first drop down lets you select the type of event to use
501. stonesys com 251 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Indicates how particular the system should be when analyzing received data packages The options are the following gt Search In order for the event to occur the received data package must contain the text specified in the Expression field but may also have more content gt Example If you have specified that the received package should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the received package contains the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday since your two required terms are contained in the received package Expression type gt Match In order for the event to occur the received data package must contain exactly the text specified in the Expression field and nothing else gt Regular expression In order for the event to occur the text specified in the Expression field must identify specific patterns in the received data packages If you switch from Search or Match to Regular expression the text in the Expression field is automatically translated to a regular expression The priority must be specified as a number between 0 lowest priority and 999999 highest priority The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for s
502. support The panomorph feature is disabled by default To enable disable it select clear the 360 Lens tab s Enable panomorph support check box Panomorph settings When enabling the panomorph support functionality you must also select a Registered Panomorph Lens RPL number from the ImmerVision Enables panomorph RPL number list This is to ensure identification and correct configuration of the lens used with the camera in question The RPL number is usually found on the lens itself or on the box it came in For details of ImmerVison panomorph lenses and RPLs see http www immervision com en home index php You must also indicate the physical position orientation of the camera in question This is done by selecting its position from the Camera position orientation list Streams tab camera properties Available functionality depends on your product version To access the Streams tab expand Devices in the Management Client s Site navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the relevant camera folder in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the required camera and then select the Streams tab in the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 The tab will by default list a single stream the selected camera s default stream used for live video as well as for video which is being recorded for playback purposes Note that while it is possible to set up and use as many live streams as the cam
503. system Identifies the driver handling the connection to the hardware For an XProtect video encoder it is the driver handling the connection to the remote site hardware only relevant for hardware and Arcus enabled hardware solutions Opens the default home page of the supplier You can use this page for administration of the hardware or system The host name or IP address of the remote system only relevant for hardware Hardware Media Access Control MAC address of the system hardware A MAC address is a 12 character hexadecimal number uniquely identifying each device on a network only relevant for Milestone Interconnect products The unique system ID of the remote site used by XProtect to for example manage licenses only relevant for Milestone Interconnect products Enter Windows user name for access through the remote desktop only relevant for Milestone Interconnect products Enter Windows password for access through the remote desktop only relevant for Milestone Interconnect products When clicked this opens a remote connection to the remote site if Windows credentials are approved 158 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 www milestonesys com 159 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Settings tab overview If you select a device group with 400 or more items the Settings tab will not be available for editing
504. system than you currently have licenses for you must purchase additional licenses for these feeds before you will be able to activate them What to do To obtain additional licenses contact your system vendor or visit www milestonesys com to log into the software registration service center When you have received an updated license file ic with the new licenses you can activate your licenses online Also refer to Get additional licenses on page 73 gt Could not acquire a new license Too many recording server licenses requested Problem If you have added more recording servers to your system than you currently have licenses for you must purchase additional licenses for these recording servers before you will be able to activate them What to do To obtain additional licenses contact your system vendor or visit www milestonesys com to log into the software registration service center When you have received an updated license file ic with the new licenses you can activate your licenses online Also refer to Get additional licenses on page 73 Offline activation www milestonesys com 70 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Basics right click License Information and select Activate License Offline gt Export License For Activation to export a file with your currently added recording servers and cameras 2 Spe
505. t In this example we first click the device link and in the Select device dialog opening we select a device and click OK Select Device E B Camna H 5 All Cameras 1 Lab Cameras r3 Parking let E Parking Lot E cam 1 iParkingLot E cam H Red Sector Cameras H Retal isea PTZ Cameras Cancel Then we click the profile link and select a patrolling profile in the dialog opening and then click OK Finally click the priority link to set the priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 190 of the patrolling profile The rule description now reflects our selection ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval ithin selected time in Daytime tart patrolling on Parking Lot E cam 2 using My Patroling Profile with PTZ priority S0 Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard 6 Onstep 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started gt In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would make the PTZ camera start patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile but it would never stop Based on the elements in our rule description we therefore must select a stop criterion Since our rule is triggered when a time period starts the wizard automatically suggests that stop action is performed when t
506. t Zooms in one zoom level per click Zooms in one zoom level per click L le F 9 5 s amp 9 Motion tab camera properties www milestonesys com 118 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The Motion tab lets you enable and configure motion detection for the selected camera Motion detection configuration is a key element in your system Your motion detection configuration may determine when video is recorded when events are generated when external output such as lights or sirens is triggered etc Time spent on finding the best possible motion detection configuration for each camera may therefore help you later avoid unnecessary alarms etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc Before you configure motion detection for a camera it is highly recommended that you have configured the camera s image quality settings such as resolution compression etc on the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 160 If you later change image quality settings you should always test any motion detection configuration afterwards Mon on pay se Operenes 2551 You can configure motion detection for all cameras in a device group see Manage cameras on page 113 in one go Note however that some motion detect
507. t server wanting to become parent to another management server Theoretically establishment of a parent child relationship happens as follows 1 2 3 4 o The parent sends a link request to the potential child Depending on administrator settings the child might have to authorize the link request If necessary the child authorizes the link request Relevant info is exchanged The new parent child link is established Administrators role and federated sites Administrator vs non administrator In general you must be an administrator to work with federated architecture However by requesting the adding of children to a top site to which you have administrator rights you can without administrator rights to the other sites create the overall initial infrastructure of a federation But as described in Manage Milestone Federated Architecture on page 312 the administrator of each individual child must later authorize the connection before it can take effect www milestonesys com 305 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 How to become an administrator using Active Directory two possible scenarios How to become administrator of a Milestone Federated Architecture setup using Active Directory depends on how the management server is installed If it is installed as described in either of the following two scenarios you gain administrator rights of the entire setup
508. t Client overview on page 54 Name of the hardware with which the item is connected The field is non editable from here but can be changed by clicking Go To next to it This takes you to hardware information where the name is editable Hardware name www milestonesys com 157 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Unit number Serial number Model Version Software license code Driver IE Address MAC address Remote system ID Windows user name Windows password Connect www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Non editable field displaying the unit on which the item is attached on the hardware For single device hardware the unit number will typically be 1 For multi device hardware such as video servers with several channels the unit number will typically indicate the channel on which the item is attached e g 3 only relevant for hardware Hardware serial number as specified by the manufacturer The serial number is often but not always identical to the MAC address Identifies the hardware model For an XProtect video encoder it identifies which remote site XProtect product the XProtect video encoder is communicating with Firmware version of the system as specified by the manufacturer For an XProtect video encoder it is the firmware version of the remote site system only relevant for Milestone Interconnect products Software license code of the remote
509. t of view you can view all its linked children and downwards in the parent child hierarchy What if only have one server and don t run Milestone Federated Architecture Your user interface looks the same but you only see the one server in your setup Menu bar The Management Client s menu bar features the following menus see Management Client menu overview on page 61 File Edit View Action Tools and Help Toolbar The Management Client s toolbar features the following options T A Save Save changes to your settings BA 22 Undo Undo your latest change T Am Help Access a help topic see Navigate the built in help system online on page 27 relevant to your task T Contents Access the help system see Navigate the built in help system online on page 27 s table of contents anos f Search Access the help system see Navigate the built in help system online on page 27 s search feature Memory indicator The memory indicator in the lower left corner of the Management Client states how much memory is available for working with the Management Client 5 Memory free 77 86hME www milestonesys com 56 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 When you expand items in the Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 the Management Client uses memory to treat data stored in the individual items Expanded items keep processing even when you
510. t output to activated deactivated state e Send notifications via e mail e Generate log entries e Generate events e Apply new device settings for example a different resolution on a camera e Make video appear in Matrix recipients see About Matrix recipients on page 187 Matrix is an integrated system for viewing of video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with the system e Start and stop plug ins e Start and stop feeds from devices How is stopping the feed from a device different from manually disabling the device Stopping a device means that video will no longer be transferred from the device to the system in which case neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a device on which the feed has been stopped will still be able to communicate with the recording server and the feed from device can be started automatically through a rule as opposed to when the device is manually disabled in the Management Client IMPORTANT Some rule content may require that certain features are enabled for the devices in question For example a rule specifying that a camera should record will not work as intended if recording is not enabled for the camera in question Before creating a rule it is therefore highly recommended that you verify that the devices involved will be able to perform as intended For a number of typically required rules such prerequisites are described in Create typical rules see Create typica
511. t the user or group you want to remove then click Remove in the lower part of the tab Tip You can select more than one user or group or a combination of groups and individual users if required b Confirm that you want to remove the selected user s or and group s Click Yes Specify rights of a role 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Security and select Roles Then select the required role in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Roles i Name 7 Administrators E Baiano Semy Stal 7 a 9 Building B Securty Staff T c oll Cs a ff 2 In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 specify required rights for the role on the relevant tabs The next item section is only relevant if you run XProtect Corporate Users and Groups rights www milestonesys com 262 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Refer to Assign remove users and groups to from roles Device rights The Device tab lets you specify which features users groups with the selected role should be able to use for each device e g a camera or device group in the XProtect Smart Client The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the XProtect Sm
512. tabase another name during the management server installation View example We will assume that the database uses the default name m Faiakaus tanap Wirus d Enter database name Surveillance ahm tle PPS Example During management server installation it is possible to change the database name from the default name Surveillance to another name o Make a backup of the Surveillance database and make sure to e Verify that the selected database is Surveillance e Verify that the backup type is full e Set the schedule for the recurrent backup e Verify that the suggested path is satisfactory or select alternative path e Select to verify backup when finished and to perform checksum before writing to media 3 Follow the instructions in the tool to the end Tip Also consider backing up the SurveillanceLog database using the same method www milestonesys com 321 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Backup and restore event server configuration The content of your event server configuration is included when you backup and restore system configuration The first time you run the event server all its configuration files are automatically moved to the SQL server You can apply the restored configuration to the event server without needing to restart the event server and the event server is capable of starting and stopping all external communication w
513. te A federated site is basically just an individual system complete with management server SQL server one or more recording server s failover recording server s and cameras To make use of Milestone Federated Architecture you must connect at least two individual systems The Management Client is used to configure federated hierarchies In principle it lets you connect to any site in the federated hierarchy at any given time if user rights permit using the log in credentials for your home site This offers you a central overview and at the same time lets you zoom in on selected sites by connecting to a specific site to have a closer look make configurations or carry out maintenance Note however that the Management Client is only able to see other sites from the level of the site you are logged into and downwards in the hierarchy What is a top site Your top site is the top level management server of your entire Milestone Federated Architecture setup An example an organization could have a top level server called MyCorp Second level servers called MyCorp RegionalServers Third level servers called MyCorp ReginalServers CityNames And so on In this case MyCorp is your top level server There can only be one top level server Tip In a federated hierarchy it is always a good idea to name your servers in a recognizable way for example using regional names or names implying where in what context the server is located Using for exampl
514. ted microphone s in the XProtect Smart Client o Get sequences This feature is currently not supported the Sequences feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected microphone s in the XProtect omart Client Speaker related rights Available functionality depends on your product version Setting determines whether o Visible the selected speaker s will be visible in the XProtect Smart Client o Listen to live audio listening to live audio from the selected speaker s will be possible in the XProtect Smart Client o Browse audio browsing of recorded audio from the selected speaker s will be possible in the XProtect Smart Client o Export audio the export feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected speaker s in the XProtect Smart Client o Get sequences This feature is currently not supported the Sequences feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected speaker s in the XProtect Smart Client IMPORTANT Although what is being said through a speaker can be recorded and archived see About storage and archiving on page 88 there is currently no way of playing back or exporting such recorded outgoing audio Therefore some of the speaker related rights currently have no effect Features for playing back and exporting recorded outgoing audio etc will be available in subsequent releases as soon as possible Input related rights www milestonesys
515. terval ithin the time period 1 00 to 2 00 and day of week is Saturday tart patrolling on Retail Area PTZ using Retail Area Saturday Afternoon with PTZ priority 50 Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard 7 On step 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started gt In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would start patrolling within the specified time period but never stop it Based on the elements in our rule description the wizard therefore automatically suggests the stop criterion Perform stop action when time interval ends First Select stop crena Perform stop action when time interval end Note that the stop criterion No actions performed on rule end is not available a stop criterion must be defined for this type of rule We still need to define exactly which kind of stop action should take place when the time period ends Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 8 In this step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions gt In this example Based on the start action start patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action Stop patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is stopped immediately when the time period ends ext Edit the rule description cli
516. the PTZ camera will by default remain for 5 seconds at each preset position specified in the patrolling profile before it moves on to the next preset position To change the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera will remain at a specific preset position do the following 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Inthe list of preset positions for the selected patrolling profile select the preset position for which you want to change the time rome Daytime Patrolling v c Back Door 2L Canned Foods Section 2L Dary Products Section www milestonesys com 128 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Specify the required time in number of seconds in the Wait time secs field Position Preset ID Back Dow Wat time secs 52 4 f required repeat for other preset positions Customize transitions By default the time required for moving the camera from one preset position to another known as transition is estimated to be 3 seconds During this time motion detection is by default disabled on the camera as irrelevant motion is otherwise likely to be detected while the camera moves between the preset positions Transitions are also known as PTZ scanning Customizing speed for transitions is only supported if your camera supports PTZ scanning and is of the type where preset positions are configured and stored on your system s server type
517. the city s video surveillance A C M E Industries Inc Downtown Residential and Limestone Center Shopping Mall also want to segment their installation in several sites as they have several physical locations that they want to monitor The segmented architecture offers them greater flexibility during installation and daily usage The city uses MFA allowing the entities independent video surveillance while being tied into the city wide surveillance system at the same time Because the police have installations that City Hall should not have access to the Police Headquarters is selected as the top site in the city s federated surveillance hierarchy www milestonesys com 309 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Each site is then tied into Limestone city s federated hierarchy as follows e Level 1 Police Headquarters o Level 2 Limestone City e Level 3 City Hall and MB Industries as one group o Level 4 Central Station Streets amp Intersections and Parks as one group under City Hall e Level 3 Limestone Center Shopping Downtown Residential Limestone Transportation Ltd and A C M E Industries Inc as one group o Level 4 Shops Branch Malls and Residential area shops as one group under Limestone Center Shopping o Level 4 Branch Office 1 and Branch Office 2 as one group under A C M E Industries Inc About XProtect Smart Wall control in Milestone Federated Architect
518. the e mail notifications Prerequisites Before you can create notification profiles you must specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server you are going to use for the e mail notifications Optionally if you want the notification profile s e mail notifications to be able to contain AVI video clips the compression settings for use when generating the AVI files must also be specified 1 Goto the Management Client s menu bar and select Tools gt Options This will open the Options window o For outgoing SMTP Mail Server Specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server see Outgoing SMTP mail server settings on page 299 on the Mail Server tab www milestonesys com 239 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 For AVI Compression Specify AVI compression settings see Specify AVI compression settings on page 299 on the AVI Generation tab O Add notification profiles 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Rules and Events right click Notification Profiles and select Add Notification Profile This will open the Add Notification Profile wizard 2 On the wizard s first step specify name and description Click Next 3 On the wizard s second step verify that Email is selected click Next 4 On the wizard s third step specify recipient subject message text and time between e mails Add Hotification Profi
519. the top right corner of the slider When required the number from 0 0001 very slow to 1 0000 default speed allows you to define exactly the same custom speed across transitions 6 In the Plug ins to disable list specify any plug ins you want to disable during the selected transition By default the plug in used for motion detection on the camera MotionDetectionPlugin is disabled in order to avoid irrelevant motion being detected during transition To add a plug in to the list click Add and select the required plug in This requires that one or more other plug ins are available and that they can be disabled To remove a plug in from the list for example if you do not want motion detection to be disabled during the transition select the plug in and click remove 7 Repeat as required for other transitions Specify an end position You are able to specify that the camera should move to a specific preset position when patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile ends 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Select the Go to specific preset on finish check box This opens the Select Preset dialog 3 Inthe Select Preset dialog select the required end position and click OK Tip You can select any of the camera s preset positions as the end position you are not limited to the preset positions used in the patrolling profile 4 The selected end position is added to the list of preset pos
520. thenticated user in XProtect Enterprise Tip If in doubt whether a user is defined as a Basic or Windows authenticated user in XProtect Enterprise open the Image Server Administrator window on the XProtect Enterprise server and click User Setup Refer to the XProtect Enterprise documentation for more information The selected XProtect Enterprise user has not automatically been assigned to the role in question through the Management Client The user s XProtect Enterprise user rights have just been borrowed by the role but the actual user has not been assigned to the role The system does not verify that the specified user name or password is correct or that the specified user name password or Windows account name correspond to a defined user in XProtect Enterprise Therefore make sure that you enter the information correctly Note also that user names and passwords are case sensitive 6 In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Add XProtect Enterprise servers To add an existing XProtect Enterprise installation to your system do the following 1 From the Management Client s Tools menu select XProtect Enterprise Servers 2 Inthe Add Remove XProtect Enterprise Servers dialog click Add www milestonesys com 289 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 3 Enter the IP address or the host name of the required XProtect Enterprise server in the XProtect E
521. ting tab recording server properties 106 117 296 Multi domain with one way trust 365 www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Multiple management servers cluster 45 Multiple recording server instances 48 350 N Navigate log 276 Navigate the built in help system online 27 56 Network 298 Network tab recording server properties 110 302 337 Notification profile settings 242 O Options 63 162 196 249 295 296 297 298 299 300 303 Outgoing SMTP mail server settings 240 301 Overview of Milestone Interconnect 86 P Panes overview 54 55 57 64 69 72 73 76 77 79 82 83 84 88 89 92 95 96 97 98 99 104 105 109 110 114 115 117 136 138 139 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 151 152 153 154 158 161 162 164 165 170 173 176 177 178 180 181 183 185 186 189 190 201 204 205 209 215 227 230 233 234 235 236 238 239 241 242 245 246 250 251 256 259 260 261 262 263 271 273 274 278 284 286 290 295 305 307 308 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 336 338 339 340 354 Panomorph settings 136 Pause PTZ patrolling and go to PTZ preset on input rule 214 375 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Playback remote system 87 89 166 Port numbers of special interest 43 Ports used by the system 44 367 Possibilities and constrains of federated sites 308 Pow
522. tion although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Generates an entry in the rule log see Manage logs on page 273 When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to specify a text for the log entry Tip When specifying the log text you will be able to quickly insert variables such as DeviceName EventName etc into the log message No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Starts one or more plug ins When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to select required plug ins and on which devices to start the plug ins This type of action requires that at one or more plug ins are available on your System 195 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Stop plug in on lt devices gt Apply new settings on lt devices gt Set Matrix to view lt devices gt www milestonesys com No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Stops one or more plug ins When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard will prompt you to
523. to play back older recordings stored only on the affected recording server until that recording server is functioning again and has taken over from the failover recording server It is not possible to access archived recordings When the recording server is functioning again there will usually be a merging process during which failover recordings are merged back into the recording server s database During this process it will not be possible to play back recordings from the period during which the failover recording server took over Is there a failover solution for failovers In a regular failover setup setting up one failover recording server as backup for another failover recording server is not necessary This is because you do not allocate particular failover recording servers to take over from a standard recording server rather you allocate failover groups A failover group must contain at least one failover recording server but you can add as many failover recording servers as needed Provided a failover group contains more than one failover recording server there will be more than one failover recording server capable of taking Over In a hot standby setup it is also not possible to set up a failover recording servers or hot standby servers for a hot standby server For more information about failover setups refer to the description of the Management Client s Failover tab see Failover tab recording server properties on page 104
524. tone Interconnect 512 5 0 0 0 Device Channels Milestone Interconnect Camera 512 5 0 0 0 Installed Products Milestone XProtect Smart Wall Software License Code 9A0 0000 7D89 Example only numbers and dates may be different on your system www milestonesys com 72 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Note that the License Information page does not list microphones speakers and in and output boxes since these are unlimited In the Site Navigation pane you can activate licenses see Activate licenses online on page 69 by expanding Basics and right clicking License Information The cameras for which you do not have a license will not send data to the surveillance system Cameras added after all available licenses are used are unavailable Cameras without licenses will be identified by an exclamation mark symbol when listed in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Tip In the short period until you have obtained additional licenses you can disable some less important cameras to allow some of the new cameras to run instead Refer to Manage Hardware see About hardware on page 81 for more information Where can I see how many grace periods have left This information is available from the License Information page When you add a new camera for which you have a license you are granted a new full grace period for the camera in question from the d
525. tone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 according to whether they are related to plug ins dependent on hardware configuration or built into the system itself etc gt In this example we want the event to be detected motion Motion detection events are technically related to the system s motion detection plug in so we go to the Plug ins group select the event Motion Start and click OK Devices recording server management server link When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link opens the Select Group Members window which lets you specify the devices on which device the event should occur in order for the rule to apply In this example the event should occur on Camera 1 in order for the rule to apply In the Select Group Members window we therefore drag Camera 1 to the Selected list and click OK By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Next Eda the rule descnption chck an underlined ter Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 5 Click Next to move to step 2 of the wizard On step 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply n4 In this example we want the rule to apply whenever motion is detected on Camera 1 regardless of time When creating event based rules it is possible to bypass the time cond
526. toneXProtectSmart Client x64 exe for 32 bit and 64 bit versions respectively You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs The httpdocs folder is located under the folder in which your Milestone surveillance software is installed The path is typically C Program Files x86 Milestone XProtect Management Server lIS httpdocs XProtect Smart Client Installer version number bit version All Languages en US For example C Program Files x86 Milestone XXProtect Management Server lIS httpdocs XProtect Smart Client Installer 2013 R2 32 bit All Languages en US 2 Runasilent installation using one of the following two options www milestonesys com 26 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 a Run with default parameter settings To run a silent installation using the default values for all parameters start a command prompt cmd exe in the directory where the installation program is located and execute following command gt MilestoneXProtectSmart Client exe quiet This performs a quiet installation of the XProtect Smart Client using default values for parameters such as target directory and so on To change the default settings see below b Customize default parameters using an xml argument file as input In order to customize the default installation settings an xml file with modified values must be provided as input In order to generate the xml file with default values
527. ty depends on your product version XProtect Smart Wall is unique in its flexible drag and drop handling of multiple and remote XProtect Smart Walls and in its independence of any specific hardware or network configurations XProtect Smart Wall provides an overview in surveillance centers and offers both higher efficiency and more precise surveillance e Preset capability enables swift change of XProtect Smart Wall layouts to meet specific surveillance situations incidents night shifts etc or personal preferences e Dynamic adjustment based on motion detection I O devices or video analytic results allows surveillance operators to focus on important matters e Intuitive drag and drop of individual cameras or views e Persistent and simultaneous update of different XProtect Smart Walls subscribing to the same views e XProtect Smart Wall supports monitor presets and camera views from child sites in a Milestone Federated Architecture hierarchy In short a XProtect Smart Wall consists of one or more monitors Presets are defined for the whole XProtect Smart Wall but the layout is set per monitor so you can have presets updating specific cameras monitors or the whole XProtect Smart Wall Example One moment you want to display a layout showing 64 different cameras on a monitor The next you want to display only a single camera With presets i e predefined layouts you can quickly switch between layouts in order to match your nee
528. types IPv4 IPv6 or both Indicates the separator bytes used to separate individual generic event records Default for data source type International see Data sources earlier is 13 10 13 10 lt cr gt lt if gt Selectable encodings By default the list only shows the most relevant options Select Show all see next bullet to display all available encodings Encoding is used for interpreting incoming bytes and turning these into strings of characters which can be matched against the strings entered as expressions for generic events See previous bullet Allowed IPv4 addresses Select between allowed addresses Depending on you selection in the IPv type selector see earlier this property might be disabled Allowed IPv6 addresses Select between allowed addresses Depending on you selection in the IPv type selector see earlier this property might be disabled Milestone recommends that you enter at least some allowed IP addresses otherwise you can only communicate with events internally om the management server Tip Ranges can be specified in each of the four positions like 100 105 110 120 As an example all addresses on the 10 10 network can be allowed by 10 10 0 254 0 254 or by 10 10 255 255 Specify AVI compression settings Outgoing SMTP mail server settings When you configure outgoing SMTP mail server settings specify the following www milestonesys com 299 Management Client Milestone XProtect
529. u select All Programs Milestone XProtect Management Client This makes the login window appear 2 In the Computer field type the name of the computer running the management server leaving out http https in front 3 You have three different options when logging in Windows Authentication current user Windows Authentication and Basic Authentication 4 By default you log in with your active Windows account This means that if you are currently logged in as for example JohnSmith by default you log in to the management server as JohnSmith as well 5 Depending on how you wish to log into the management server in the Authentication field select o Windows Authentication current user if you want to log in with your active Windows account this is the default login option o Windows Authentication if you want to log in with a different Windows account o Basic Authentication if you want to log in with a basic user authentication For Windows Authentication and Basic Authentication also fill in the User name and Password fields respectively Tip If you have logged in with a specific user type before Windows Authentication Basic Authentication or both you can select previously entered user names in the user name list 6 Click Connect to open Management Client Management Client menu overview je Edt Mew amon Toole He aR Add New Device Group CTRL N qn Edt Device Group Members
530. u are able to attach external microphones and some devices even have built in microphones Devices microphones are automatically detected when you add the devices to your system through the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 78 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use Microphones do not require separate licenses you can use as many microphones as required on your System www milestonesys com 136 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 You can use microphones completely independently of cameras Who is able to listen to audio recorded by microphones Users of the XProtect Smart Client can provided microphones are available and the users have the rights to use the m listen to audio from microphones Roles determine users right to listen to microphones You cannot listen to microphones from the Management Client Tip the system comes with a default rule which ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the system Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required You have two entry points for managing microphones e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Devices select Microphones expand the required device group and select the required microphone If no device groups are available you must first group your microphone
531. u must authorize the new recording servers www milestonesys com 94 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Why must I authorize recording servers In a surveillance system recording servers point to management servers not the other way round In theory recording servers which you do not want to include in your surveillance system could thus be configured to connect to your management servers By authorizing recording servers before they can be used surveillance system administrators have full control over which recording servers are able to send information to which management servers 1 Expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 and select the Recording Servers node 2 Right click the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 3 From the menu that appears select Authorize Recording Server m Refresh FS After a short moment the recording server will be authorized and ready for further configuration View edit a recording server s properties When a recording server is authorized you are able to view edit the recording server s properties including its database storage area settings When you select the required recording server in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 the recording server s properties are displayed in the Prop
532. uages Danish English French German Italian Japanese Portuguese Russian Simplified Chinese Spanish Traditional Chinese Restart the Management Client to make language changes take effect XProtect Smart Client users with necessary user right can manually interrupt the handling of PTZ cameras This setting lets you select how much time should pass before regular patrolling is resumed after a manual interruption The setting applies for all PTZ cameras on your system 294 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Ignore device communication Select how long a communication error may last without the system errors if communication log logging it or in other words when it is brief enough to be reestablished before ignored Tip Motion detection is a key element in the surveillance system and is by default enabled for all cameras on the system However motion detection uses a relatively large amount of computing resources If your system features a very large number of cameras and you have enabled motion detection on all cameras the system may be slowed down slightly and adding of new cameras may take longer than usual To add new cameras as quickly as possible you have the option of disabling motion detection while the wizard Add Hardware is in use Server logs The Options see Options on page 293 Server Log tab lets you specify settings for the system s five different manageme
533. uct version If your organization uses failover recording servers use the Failover tab to assign failover servers to recording servers For any other details on failover recording servers their settings failover groups and their settings refer to About failover recording servers see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 331 Assign failover recording servers On the Failover tab of a recording server you can choose between 3 different types of failover setups a No failover setup b Aprimary secondary failover setup c A hot standby setup If you select b and c you must select the specific server groups With b you must also select a primary and optionally a secondary failover group If the recording server becomes unavailable a failover recording server from the primary failover group will take over If you have also selected a secondary failover group a failover recording server from the secondary group will take over in case all failover recording servers in the primary failover group are busy This way you only risk not having a failover solution in the rare case when all failover recording servers in the primary as well as in the secondary failover group are busy 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 select Servers Recording Servers This opens a list of recording servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the wanted recording server g
534. ugh users can also be added without Active Directory Using Active Directory for adding existing user and group information to the system has several benefits the fact that users as well as groups are specified centrally in Active Directory means that you do not have to create any user accounts from scratch in the system It also means that you do not have to configure any authentication of users on the system Authentication is handled by Active Directory What is Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems It identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them Users as well as groups are specified centrally in Active Directory Active Directory user and group concepts Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups Users Users are Active Directory objects representing individuals with a user account Example Adolfo Rodriguez Asif Khan 9 Karen Otley Keith Waverley wayne Massey Groups Groups are Active Directory objects capable of containing several users In this example the Management Group has three members i e it contains three users 88 Management Group Adolfo Rodriguez Karen Otley 4 Vayne Massey Groups can contain any number of users By adding a group to the system you add all of its members in one go Once you have added the group to the system any changes made to the group
535. uired on each network segment Multicasting is an interesting option for streaming live video from recording servers to XProtect Smart Client s since video streams are not duplicated on each network segment Multicasting as described here is not streaming of video from camera to servers With multicasting you work with a clearly defined group of recipients based on options such as IP address ranges the ability to enable disable multicast for individual cameras the ability to define largest acceptable data packet size MTU the maximum number of routers a data packet must be forwarded between TTL and so on So multicasting should not be confused with the much more primitive method broadcasting which would send data to everyone connected to the network even if the data is perhaps not relevant for everyone Unicasting Sends data from a single source to a single recipient Sends data from a single source to multiple recipients within a Multicasting clearly defined group www milestonesys com 106 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Sends data from a single source to everyone on a network Broadcasting broadcasting can thus significantly slow down network communication What are the requirements To use multicasting your network infrastructure must support IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol an IP multicasting standard You must configure multicasting through the Management
536. up failover recording servers on page 336 has a clear benefit when you later specify which failover recording servers should be able to take over from a recording server you select a group of failover recording servers If the selected group contains more than one failover recording server this offers you the security of having more than one failover recording server ready to take over if a recording server becomes unavailable You can create as many failover groups as required and group them as needed However a failover recording server can only be a member of one group at a time Failover recording servers in a failover group are ordered in sequence This sequence determines in which order the failover recording servers should take over from a recording server when needed By default this sequence will reflects the order in which the failover recording servers have been incorporated in the failover group first in is first in sequence but this can easily be changed Failover recording servers are installed like regular recording servers refer to Install failover recording server see Install failover recording server recording server on page 33 Once failover recording servers are installed they automatically become visible in the Management Client Tip If a new failover recording server does not become visible in the Management Client verify that the failover recording server has been configured with the correct IP address hostname
537. update the management server SQL address and later the event server SQL address go to the machine where your management server is installed c on different machines and you wish to update the event server SQL address only or you have already updated it on the management server go to the machine where your management server is installed and copy the directory eProgramFiles 6 Milestone Protect Management Server Tools ChangeSq Address with content to temporary directory on the event server o aand b go to the notification area of the taskbar a k a Systray Right click the Management Server icon select Update SQL address 2 ae uw o C paste the directory you copied to a temporary place on the machine where the event server is installed and run the included file VideoOS Server ChangeSq Address exe 3 The Update SQL Server Address dialog appears Select Management Server and Event Server and click Next 4 Enter or select the new SQL server and click Next 5 Select the new SQL database and click Select www milestonesys com 345 SQL database administration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 6 Wait while the address change takes place When a confirmation message is presented click OK If you acted according to step 2 b you have by now only updated the management server SQL address You must therefore repeat the process in order to update the event server SQL address
538. ure With a Milestone Federated Architecture setup and XProtect Smart Wall installed on the parent site you can show cameras on the XProtect Smart Wall from MFA child sites based on events on the child sites The purpose is that video is automatically displayed on the video wall on events like robberies Apart from creating XProtect Smart Wall rules with actions triggered by events on the child sites you can also include the cameras from child sites in XProtect Smart Wall preset configurations Configuring the XProtect Smart Wall rule with events and cameras from the MFA child site only requires administrator rights on the parent site not on the child sites See About XProtect Smart Wall on page 175 and Actions and Stop actions on page 190 to read about XProtect Smart Wall configuration and rules and events www milestonesys com 310 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Illustration of Milestone Federated Architecture The idea behind Milestone Federated Architecture Parent and children linked as needed The contents of a federated site and parent child setup 1 Management server and failover recording server SQL Server Recording servers Failover recording servers Cameras A Federated Site Another Federated Site en SSS SP Yet another Federated Site Etc www milestonesys com 311 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator
539. urveillance and network related terms Select a term to view a corresponding definition in the small window below the list of terms Printing Help Topics To print a help topic navigate to the required topic and click Print Tip When printing a selected help topic the topic is printed as you see it on your screen Therefore if a topic contains expanding drop down links click each required drop down link to display the text in www milestonesys com 27 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 order for it to be included in your printout This allows you to create targeted printouts containing exactly the amount of information you require Browsers supported The following browsers support the built in help system recent versions only e Internet Explorer e Mozilla Firefox e Safari www milestonesys com 28 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Installation and removal Installation overview Note that the Milestone Mobile server and Axis One click Connection Component are not installed by the common installer These must be install from the management server s download website see Download Manager download web page on page 38 controlled by the Download Manager once the management server is installed The same goes for failover recording server s see Install failover recording server recording server on page 33 In general your i
540. ut triggers an action 156 Rules and events 190 S Scheduled back up of system configuration 323 329 Scheduled backup and restore of system configuration 322 325 search log 277 Security 256 select service account 32 33 35 Select shared backup folder 326 357 oelect SQL type 32 34 Server logs 274 296 Servers and clients require time synchronization 112 349 servers and hardware 78 Servers rights 269 services administration 349 oet site properties 319 oet up a secure connection on all items in a device group 164 Set up alarms using Enterprise slaves 283 Settings tab overview 115 120 137 139 145 161 193 200 377 Index Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Setup and enable failover recording servers 333 336 Setup with one way trust 52 365 Site Navigation pane 315 Site Navigation pane and Federated Hierarchy pane 55 SNMP e 358 Sound Settings 288 opeaker 166 Specify a time profile 237 Specify an end position 131 opecify AVI compression settings 241 301 Specify common settings for all devices in a device group 143 opecify common settings for all items in a device group cameras microphones and speakers 162 Specify common settings for all items in a device group hardware 164 Specify datagram options 108 Specify event properties 171 172 opecify for how long to stay at each preset position 129 Sp
541. ve PTZ Camera to position PTZ Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 500 erform action 15 seconds after esume patrolling immediately This is exactly what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g 3 seconds Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window lame PTZ Cam ive Iw Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 8 Click Finish This will add your new rule to the list of rules Rules E Default Start Feed Rule PTZ Camera Daytime Patroling PTZ Camera Nighttime Patrolling PTZ Camera to Back Door on Back Door Sensor Default rules Your system comes with a number of default rules ensuring that basic features work without any user intervention being required IMPORTANT Like other rules default rules can be deactivated and or modified as required The fact that default rules are present does therefore not in itself guarantee that your system will work as desired Nor does it guarantee that video feeds or audio feeds will automatically be fed to the system as the default rules may subsequently have been deactivated or modified www milestonesys com 218 Management Client Milestone XProtect
542. ve the rights required for viewing the requested live feed or because the feed is for some reason stopped Occurs when client users no longer request a live stream from a device 222 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Motion Started Motion Stopped Output Activated Output Changed Output Deactivated PTZ Manual Session Started Manual PTZ Session Stopped Motion Stopped Recording Started Recording Stopped Settings Changed www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Occurs when the system detects motion in video received from cameras This type of event requires that the system s motion detection is enabled for the cameras to which the event will be linked Exactly what constitutes motion depends on the motion detection settings specified for individual cameras in the system In addition to the system s motion detection some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such camera detected motion detection can also be used in system rules however they do not work until configured on the camera hardware itself Refer to Configurable events devices on page 221 Occurs when motion is no longer detected in received video See also the description of the Motion Started event Occurs when an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is activated This type of event requires that at least one device on your s
543. ved by the home site since the last synchronization will be reflected changes further down in the hierarchy will not be reflected For this a full scheduled synchronization is needed 1 In the Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the home site and click select Refresh Site Hierarchy 2 he Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is refreshed reflecting any changes It is not possible to schedule your own synchronizations Rename site You can rename both your home site and its children when connected to them 1 In the Management Client in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the relevant site right click and click Rename Site 2 You can now overwrite the name of the site 3 The Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated reflecting the name change Due to synchronization issues any changes to remote children might take some time to be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 305 Set site properties You can view and possibly edit properties on your home site and its children www milestonesys com 317 Milestone Federated Architecture Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 1 In the Management Client in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the relevant site right click and select Properties
544. ver instances During the recording server installation see Installation overview on page 29 select the required number of instances A maximum of 99 recording server instances is allowed on a single server Using multiple recording server instances does not require additional licenses In the Management Client each recording server instance will be displayed separately allowing you to configure each instance separately When managing the Recording Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 by right clicking its icon in the notification area on the server itself you can e Stop and start each instance individually e View status messages for each instance individually grouped on tabs Upgrade from previous version This information is only relevant if you are upgrading a previous XProtect installation IMPORTANT Your XProtect system no longer supports Microsoft Windows XP see System requirements on page 15 When upgrading all components except the management server database and if you selected so also your video device drivers are automatically removed and replaced The management server database is the management server s component it contains the entire system configuration recording server configurations camera configurations rules and so on As long as you do not remove the management server database no reconfiguration of your system configuration is needed althoug
545. ver properties on page 105 must also be configured for the recording server If multicasting is not possible for example due to restrictions on the network or on individual clients the system will revert to unicasting sending of separate data packets to separates recipients By defining a default microphone you can determine from which microphone XProtect Smart Client users should by default hear recordings when they select the camera in question in their XProtect Smart Clients The users can subsequently select another microphone if they require so Default microphone EE l Bear in mind that although you have defined a default microphone for a camera it cannot be guaranteed that all XProtect Smart Client users will hear audio from the microphone in question Some users may not have speakers attached some users may not have the rights required to listen to audio etc www milestonesys com 116 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 By defining a default speaker you can determine through which microphone XProtect Smart Client users should by default be able to speak when they select the camera in question in their XProtect Smart Clients The users can subsequently select another speaker if they require so Default Speaker mE Bear in mind that although you have defined a default speaker for a camera it cannot be guaranteed that all XProtect Smart Client users will be able to talk
546. verview on page 302 and their parent child links www milestonesys com 57 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The parent server you are logged in to your home site is always at the top and adopting its point of view you can view all its linked children and downwards in the parent child hierarchy What if only have one server and don t run Milestone Federated Architecture Your user interface looks the same but you only see the one server in your setup Overview Pane Provides overview of the item you have selected in the Site Navigation Pane typically in the form of a detailed list Selecting a particular item in the Overview pane will typically display the item s properties in the Properties pane Right clicking items in the Overview pane gives you access to management features Properties pane Displays properties of the item selected in the Overview pane In many cases properties are displayed across a number of tabs T Settings Info Ej Storage Preview pane You will see the Preview pane when you deal with recording servers and devices It displays preview images from selected cameras or states information from selected microphones speakers inputs and outputs The example shows a camera preview image with information about the resolution and data rate of the camera s live stream Live 6404480 Ook 6 ys Camera 5 By default information shown with camera preview im
547. verview pane see Panes overview on page 57 a Rules list providing an overview of all existing rules in your system will appear 2 If needed create edit copy and or validate rules from the list Tip You do not necessarily have to delete an unwanted rule you may also just temporarily deactivate the rule by clearing the Active check box in the Rule Information pane for the rule in question then saving the setting by selecting the Management Client s File menu Show me where to find the Active check box Bue UU 1 fale himan M 3 Rules n My Fett Aute Nama My Second Aude My lewd Prue 7 Mp Tad fida Clenorgnon v Active lerer Por tore an schon on Merten Start em dms Of mtm o Wedoesder ther esconde eaey o0 tie device om which exeo occured Petrs toe ecthon on Merten End ton Bee Sector Bach Door Fior Sextet Enti ome About rules on page 226 About rules In short rules specify actions which should be carried out under particular conditions Example When motion is detected condition a camera should begin recording action www milestonesys com 226 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 The following are examples of what you can do with rules e Start and stop recording e Set non default live frame rate e Set non default recording frame rate e Start and stop PTZ patrolling e Pause and resume PTZ patrolling e Move PTZ cameras to specific positions e Se
548. view pane see Panes overview on page 57 3 From the menu that appears select Remove Recording Server 4 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the recording server and all of its associated hardware from the system If you are sure click Yes 5 he recording server and all of its associated hardware will be removed Replace a recording server If a recording server is malfunctioning and you want to replace it with a new server while letting the new server inherit the settings of the old malfunctioning recording server do the following 1 Retrieve the recording server ID from the old recording server a In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 select Recording Servers then in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the old required recording server b In the Management Client s Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the Storage tab c Press and hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while selecting the Info tab d Copy the recording server ID found in the lower part of the Info tab Do not copy the term ID but only the ID number itself ID FF0BJD amp Z ABT E48 FEAT OD IMPORTANT Stop the Recording Server service see Management Server service and Hecording Server service on page 347 on the old recording server then in Windows Services set the service s Startup type to Disabled 2 Replace recording serv
549. w license The requested license could not be granted Please contact the software support to correct this problem gt Could not acquire a new license Unable to communicate with the license activation server Problem Online activation was not possible either due to a problem on the online activation server itself due to a problem with your connection to the online activation server or due to a problem with the specified information What to do Contact Milestone Support who will investigate the issue for you www milestonesys com 69 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 gt Could not acquire a new license The license has already been activated on another system Problem License activation has already taken place on another system you cannot activate licenses on more than one system What to do Activation should not be necessary as another system already runs with your licenses activated If you believe that this is wrong contact Milestone Support who will investigate the issue for you Could not acquire a new license The SLC was not registered Problem Activation cannot take place before the SLC for your system has not been registered What to do Register the SLC refer to Manage Software License Codes SLC see Manage Software License Codes on page 74 Registering Your Software License Code SLC section for a step by step description of the brief and easy reg
550. w priority when talking through the speaker Now if a user with the role Security Manager and a user with the role Security Assistant want to talk through the speaker at the same time the user with the role Security Manager will win the ability to talk If two users with the same role want to speak at the same time the first come first served principle applies For the right to work the role must also be granted the right to view the XProtect Smart Client s Live tab This right is granted as part of the application rights Furthermore the speaker s must be visible in XProtect Smart Client something you determine as part of the device rights Application rights Available functionality depends on your product version The Application tab lets you specify client access to specific functions First select a specific time profile or Always Next select the functions that the role should have access to e Status API Application Program Interface An add on product that provides complete overview of surveillance system status and alarms Used in connection with XProtect Central e Service Registration API A service that enables automatic and transparent configuration communication between servers and clients in your system Used in connection with the service channel e Reports The configuration report see About configuration report on page 272 functionality within System Dashboard External Event rights Available functional
551. w to get a certificate for your hardware device www milestonesys com 163 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 1 In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 right click the required recording server to see its device groups Select the relevant hardware under the wanted device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s hardware will be listed 5 H Recording Server 1 C3 Axis 211 Camera 10 10 69 3 x Sp Camera 5 f 9 Input 1 w Output 1 Aus 2100 Camera 10 10 69 4 1 selecting hardware under a recording server 2 Select if you want to enable HTTPS on the hardware device This is not enabled by default 3 Enter the port to which the HTTPS connection is connected The port number can be any numeric value between 1 and 65535 4 Make changes as needed 5 Click Save HTTPS is enabled for the entire hardware device that is for example a hardware device s camera microphone and speaker Record tab overview Recordings from an item camera microphone speaker or Milestone Interconnect remote systems see About Milestone Interconnect on page 85 will only be saved in the items s database when recording is enabled and recording related rule see Manage rules on page 226 criteria are met taco n iut Ls us Reccrans Ov Locet Ostet Mecha rm 182 681 o Art trae tock C emn 72
552. web page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure Tip You can change the sequence in which components are displayed on the web page In the Download Manager s tree structure drag component items and drop them at the required position Hide remove Download Manager installer components You have three options e Hide components from the web page by clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure The components are still installed on the management server and by selecting check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure you can quickly make the components available again e Remove the installation of components on the management server The components will disappear from the Download Manager but installation files for the components are kept at C Program Files x86 Milestone XProtect Download Manager so you can re install them later if required 1 In the Download Manager click Remove features www milestonesys com 42 Installation and removal Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 2 Inthe Remove Features window select the feature s you want to remove c i Remove Features c Select which features you would like to ren surveillance server Smart Client installer 7 0b 32 ba Al Languages 7 0b 64 b 2013 64 ba 2013 32 ba Mobile Server installer 2 0a 32 bit Al Languages I Cancel 3 Click OK and Yes
553. ween the two boxes Tip To select several devices in one go press the CTRL key on your keyboard while selecting 5 Click OK The selected devices will be added to your device group on the device list Specify common settings for all devices in a device group When using device groups you are able to quickly specify common properties for all devices within a given device group 1 In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 s device list click the required device group In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 5 7 all properties which are available on all of the device group s devices will be listed grouped on tabs 2 Specify the required common properties Properties not available on all of the devices in the device group will not be listed such properties must still be configured individually for each device If the device group contains 400 or more devices the Settings tab see Remote recording camera remote system on page 168 is unavailable for viewing and editing For camera groups the Streams tab is also unavailable for viewing and editing if the group contains 400 cameras or more Tip The Settings tab has convenient functionality for quickly switching between settings for the device group and settings for individual devices www milestonesys com 142 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Manage speakers On many devices you are able to att
554. will not be possible to store recordings in the storage area Your system registers the availability of its recording servers storage areas This means that when a storage area becomes available again it will again be possible to save recordings in the storage area However any recordings from the period in which the storage area was unavailable will be lost When creating rules you can use the events Database Storage Area Unavailable and Database Storage Area Available to trigger actions such as the automatic sending of e mail to relevant people in your organization Furthermore information about a storage area becoming unavailable available will be logged How do l ensure that archiving is set up correctly Archives are set up by adjusting several interdependent parameters correctly as described previously Can I create an archive on a network drive Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself or at another location which can be reached by the system for example on a network drive What happens when the maximum size of an archive is reached When you create archives from the Storage tab you specify a maximum size limit for the archive in days and gigabytes When either of the two maximum limits is reached recordings in excess of the specified number of days gigabytes www milestonesys com 93 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 will be removed However in
555. with these changes Establish remote desktop connection to remote system Preconditions The remote desktop connections to the machine you want to remote to must be up and running and its management application must be open www milestonesys com 87 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the Info tab In the Remote administration area enter the appropriate Windows user name and password Once user name and password are saved click Connect to establish remote desktop connection In the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 click Save Enable playback directly from remote site camera 1 4 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand Servers and select Recording Servers In the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system Select the relevant camera In the Properties pane see Panes overview on page 57 select the Record tab and select the Play back recordings from remote system optio
556. y deactivated Fill in properties on the Info tab Lets you view and edit basic information about an output www milestonesys com 152 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Name of the output Optional but highly recommended Used whenever the output is listed in the system and clients Does not have to be unique To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in Name the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well Description of the output Optional Will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the item s name in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 Description Qutput skuabed by entrance to red seckor To specify a description type the description and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client overview on page 54 Name of the hardware with which the output unit is connected The field is non editable from here but can be changed by clicking Go To next to it This takes you to hardware information where the name is editable Hardware name Non editable field displaying the unit on which the output can be found on the hardware For hardware capable of
557. y a system integrating externally with your system and the rule is primarily used by integrators of external systems or plug ins In case you accidentally delete the default record on bookmark rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action on Request Start Recording from External start recording immediately on the devices from metadata Perform stop action on Request Stop Recording from External stop recording immediately Default start audio feed rule Ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the System IMPORTANT While the default rule enables access to connected microphones and speakers audio feeds immediately upon installing the system it does not guarantee that audio will be recorded see Record tab overview on page 164 as recording settings must be specified separately In case you accidentally delete the default start audio feed rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action in a time interval always start feed on All Microphones All Speakers Perform an action when time interval ends stop feed immediately Default start feed rule Ensures that video feeds from all connected cameras are automatically fed to the system IMPORTANT While the default rule enables access to connected cameras video feeds immediately upon installing the system it does not guarantee that video will be recorded as cameras recording settings
558. y due to the event or changes to the event not having been saved Invalid analytics event received by event server Solution Explanation Event format is somehow incorrect Sender unauthorized by event server Solution Explanation Most likely because your machine is not on the list of allowed IP addresses hostnames Internal error in event server Solution Explanation Event server error see the event server log typically located at ProgramData Milestone XProtect Event Server logs can be opened in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool Invalid response received from Event server Solution Explanation Response is invalid possibly due to port being busy or network problems see the event server log typically located at ProgramData Milestone XProtect Event Server logs can be opened in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool Unknown response from event server Solution Explanation Response is valid but not understood possibly due to port being busy or network problems see the event server www milestonesys com 247 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 log typically located at ProgramData Milestone XProtect Event Server logs can be opened in Microsoft Notepad or similar tool Unexpected error Solution Explanation Not likely to occur If the accompanying text in the error does not provide enough information and problem continues contact Milestone support Support milestonesy
559. y to the recording servers for video recordings etc e XProtect Web Client www milestonesys com 14 Introductions Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 What XProtect Web Client is a web based client application for viewing playing back and sharing video It provides instant access to the most commonly used functions and is quick to learn and simple to operate for users of all levels It connects to your setup through almost any browser and computer Where XProtect Web Client is free of charge and does not have to be installed on any client computer s However you must integrate one or more Milestone Mobile servers in your XProtect setup How Users access XProtect Web Client via a URL using the IP address of the Milestone Mobile server and may monitor the XProtect system from any computer or tablet connected to the Internet e Milestone Mobile client What Milestone Mobile client is a mobile application which allows you to view live video from one or multiple cameras use Video push play back video recordings and more Where Milestone Mobile client is free of charge and must be installed on users smartphones or tablets or even portable music players running iOS from management server s download web page see Download Manager download web page on page 38 You must integrate one or more Milestone Mobile servers in your XProtect setup How The Milestone Mobile client is available for free d
560. y unavailable Where Recording servers as well as failover recording servers run as services and are typically installed on separate servers rather than on the management server itself Management Client What Feature rich administration client for configuration and day to day management of the system Available in several languages Where Typically installed on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar Download Manager What Lets surveillance system administrators manage which system related components e g particular language versions of clients your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted web page generated by the management server Refer to Download Manager download web page on page 38 Where Automatically installed on the management server during the installation process Access clients e XProtect Smart Client What XProtect Smart Client is the main client application that provides intuitive control over your system setup It gives access to live and recorded video instant control of cameras and connected security devices and a comprehensive overview of recordings It has an adaptable user interface that can be optimized for individual operators tasks and adjusted according to specific skills and authority levels Where XProtect Smart Client must be installed on all client computers How Users connect to the management server for initial authentication then transparentl
561. you pause your mouse pointer over the notification Description optional profile in the Overview pane see Panes overview on page 57 s Notification Profiles list www milestonesys com 241 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced VMS 2013 Recipients Subject Message text Time between e mail Number of images Time between images ms Embed images in e mail Time before event secs www milestonesys com Administrator s Manual Type the e mail addresses to which the notification profile s e mail notifications should be sent To type more than one e mail address separate addresses with a semicolon Example aa aaaa aa bb bbbb bb cc cccc cc Type the text you want to appear as the subject of the e mail notification You can insert system variables such as Device name in the subject and message text field To insert variables click the required variable links in the box below the field Type the text you want to appear in the body of the e mail notifications In addition to the message text the body of each e mail notification automatically contains this information What triggered the e mail notification gt The source of any attached still images or AVI video clips Specify required minimum time in seconds to pass between the sending of each e mail notification Examples gt If specifying a value of 120 a minimum of 2 minutes will pass between the sending of each e mail notification
562. you want to back up your archives knowing the basics of the sub directory structure enables you to target your backups Examples If wishing to back up the content of an entire archive back up the required archive directory and all of its content for example everything under lt e F OUrTArCchive If wishing to only back up the recordings from a particular camera from a particular period of time back up the contents of the relevant sub directories only for example everything under sss Fi VOUTArChive Archivel Camera 1 on Axis 07404 Video Server 10 100 50 137 2011 10 05T11 23 47402 00 Archive and virus scanning If you are using virus scanning software on the computer on which the camera databases you want to archive are located or on a computer to which data is archived it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning all the data which is being archived This may affect system performance negatively Also virus scanning software may temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively If possible you should therefore disable any virus scanning of camera databases and archiving locations Frequently asked questions about archiving What happens if a storage area becomes unavailable If a storage area becomes unavailable for example if the storage area is located on a network drive and the connection to the drive is lost it
563. ype of event to use It is possible to chose between analytics events system events and relevant plug in related events www milestonesys com 284 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 Based on your selection above the last drop down lets you select the specific event message to be used Archive Failure Enterprise Archive Move Failure Enteronse Camera Not Responding Camera Responding D sabied Enabled Edemal Evert Moton Detected Waton detected 5V storage area Running Out of Disk Space Server Not Responding Server Responding List of selectable triggering events the highlighted one is created and customized using analytics events Sources Lets you select which cameras and or other devices including plug in defined sources VCA MIP etc the event should originate from in order to trigger the alarm Your options depend upon which type of event you have selected 3 Next for alarm activation choose between Time profile and Event based e Time profile If you select Time profile you must select when the alarm should be enabled for triggering If you have not defined time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 235 you will only be able to select Always If you have defined one or more time profiles they will be selectable from this list Event based If you select Event based you must select which events should start and stop the alarm Events availa
564. ystem has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when the state of an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is changed regardless of which state the external input unit is changed to This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is deactivated This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is started on a camera This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is stopped on a camera This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Occurs when motion is no longer detected in received video See also the description of the Motion Started event Occurs when recording is started Occurs when recording is stopped Occurs when settings on a device are successfully changed 223 Management Client Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS
565. ystem configuration from old server step 1 Prerequisite Stop the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 to prevent configuration changes being made This is important since any changes made to the system configuration between the time you create a copy and the time you restore it on your new management server will be lost If changes are made after the copy was made you will have to make a new copy Note that the system basically will not work while the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 347 is stopped Remember to start the service again once you have finished backing up the database First part of a copy is in reality identical to a scheduled backup see Scheduled back up of system configuration on page 321 steps 1 3 What happens while the management server is unavailable e Recording servers will still be able to record Any currently working recording servers will have received a copy of their configuration from the management server so they will be able to work and store recordings on their own while the management server is down Scheduled www milestonesys com 327 Backup restore and move system configuration Milestone XProtect Advanced Administrator s Manual VMS 2013 and motion triggered recording will therefore work and event triggered recording will also work unless based on events related to
566. ystem down You can limit the number of thumbnail images with the Max number of previews setting Select the maximum number of thumbnail images displayed in the Preview pane Default is 64 thumbnail images Refresh the Management Client s layout to make changes take effect Note that a large number of thumbnail images in combination with a high frame rate that is a high image quality may slow the system down You can limit the frame rate used for the thumbnail images with the Default preview frame rate setting oelect whether to enable motion detection while cameras are being added to a recording server through the Add Hardware on page 78 wizard Select the check box to enable motion detection while using the wizard default Note that this setting only applies while Add Hardware is in use When the wizard is not in use motion detection is active for all cameras for which it has been enabled regardless of this setting Select whether to enable multicast see Multicasting tab recording server properties on page 105 while cameras are being added to a recording server through the wizard Add Hardware Select the check box to enable multicast while using the wizard default Note that this setting only applies while Add Hardware is in use When the wizard is not in use multicast will be active for all cameras for which it has been enabled regardless of this setting oelect the language of the Management Client Available lang

Milestone XProtect Corporate 2013: Administrator`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents